Home

Audya Series - Ketron S.r.l.

Contents

1. 14 Empty 62 Conga Slap 15 Empty 63 Conga Hi RollO 1 Conga Low Roll02 Timbales Hi Snare002 Timbales Lo Snare003 Agogo Hi 20 Snare004 68 Agogo Low 21 SnareO05 69 Cabasa 22 Snare006 70 MaracasOl 23 T FlamOl 71 WhistleO1 24 T FlamO2 72 Whistle0d2 25 Crash0l 73 GuiroOl 26 Snare007 74 GuiroO2 27 FingsnapOl 75 ClavesOl 28 Slap 76 W Block Hi 29 Scratch Up 77 W Block Lo 30 Scratch Down 78 Cuica0l 31 SticksOl 79 Cuica02 32 Click 80 TriangleOl 33 MetronomeO0 l 8 TriangleO2 34 MetronomeO02 82 ShakerOl 35 Kick05 83 ShakerO2 36 Kick02 84 SticksO2 37 85 Castagnet 38 Snare013 86 Tambourinel 39 ClapOl 87 Rimshot02 40 Snare0l4 88 Snare080 41 Tom0l 89 SnareOl2 42 Stick02 90 Snare013 43 Tom02 91 MiddleOl 44 CloseOl 92 Stick02 45 Tom03 93 Close02 46 Openol 94 OpenO2 47 Tom04 95 Reverse 48 Tom05 96 Applause 49 Crash02 97 Belltree 50 Tom06 98 Empty 5 RideOl 99 Empty 52 Crash03 100 Empty 53 RidebellO1 101 Empty 54 TambourineO 102 Empty 55 Crash04 103 Empty 56 Cowbell0l 104 Empty 57 Crash05 105 Empty 58 Vibraslap 106 Empty 59 Ride02 107 Empty 60 Bongo_Hi 108 Empty 61 Bongo_Low 109 Empty 25 Empty 73 GuiroOl 26 Empty 74 Guiro02 27 Fingsnap OI 75 ClavesOl 28 Slap 76 W Block Hi 29 Scratch Up 77 W
2. 22 Tom FlamOl 70 MaracasOl 23 Tom Flam02 71 WhistleOl 24 Crash0l 72 Whistle0O2 25 Snare007 73 Guiro0l 26 Fingsnap 0 4 Guiro02 27 Slap 75 ClavesOl 28 Snare008 76 Block Hi 29 Scratch Up 77 W Block Lo 30 Scratch Down 8 Cuica0l 31 StickO7 79 Cuica02 32 Click 80 TriangleOl 33 MetronomeOl 8 TriangleO2 34 MetronomeO02 82 ShakerOl 35 Kick03 83 ShakerO2 36 Kickl6 84 Stick07 37 Rimshotl2 85 Clap02 38 Snare095 86 TambourineOl 39 ClapOl 87 Rimshot0Ol 40 Snare096 88 Snare028 41 TomO07 89 Snare009 42 StickO2 90 Snare085 43 0 91 Kick02 44 Close0l 92 Kick08 45 Tom09 93 Stick02 46 Open0Ol 94 Stick10 47 Tomio 95 Reverse 48 Tomll 96 Applause 49 Crash02 97 Belltree 50 Toml2 98 Empty 5 RideOl 99 Empty 52 Crash03 100 Empty 53 RidebellO 101 Empty 54 TambourineO 102 Empty 55 Crash04 103 Empty 56 Cowbell0l 104 Empty 57 Crash05 105 Empty 58 Vibraslap 106 Empty 59 Ride03 107 Empty 60 Bongo Hi 108 Empty 61 Bongo Low 109 Empty Contemporary Program Change 86 14 SnareO01 62 Conga Slap 15 RollOl 63 Conga Hi 16 Roll02 64 Conga Low 17 Snare002 65 Timbales Hi 18 Snare003 66 Timbales Lo 19 Snare004 67 Agogo 20 Snare005 68 Agogo Low 21 Snare006 69 Cabasa 22 Tom FlamOl 70 MaracasOl 23 Tom Flam
3. 43 TomO08 9 Kickll 44 Close0l 92 KickO9 45 TomO9 93 MiddleO6 46 Open0l 94 Stick08 47 Tomio 95 Reverse 48 Tomll 96 Applause 49 Crash02 97 Belltree 50 Toml2 98 Empty 5 RideOl 99 Empty 52 Crash03 100 Empty 53 RidebellO1 101 Empty 54 TambourineO 102 Empty 55 Crash04 103 Empty 56 Cowbell0l 104 Empty 57 Crash05 105 Empty 58 Vibraslap 106 Empty 59 Ride03 107 Empty 60 Bongo Hi 108 Empty 61 Bongo Low 109 Empty Acid Program Change 78 14 SnareO01 62 Conga Slap 15 Rollo 63 Conga Hi 16 Roll02 64 Conga Low 17 Snare002 65 Timbales Hi 18 Snare003 66 Timbales Lo 19 Snare004 67 Agogo Hi 20 Snare005 68 Agogo Low 21 Snare006 69 Cabasa 22 Tom Flam0Ol 70 MaracasOl 23 Tom Flam02 71 Whistle0l 24 Crash0l 72 WhistleO2 25 Snare007 73 GuiroOl 26 Fingsnap 0 74 Guiro02 27 Slap 75 ClavesOl 28 Snare008 76 W Block Hi 29 Scratch Up 77 W Block Lo 30 Scratch Down 78 Cuica0l 31 SticksOl 79 Cuica02 32 Click 80 TriangleOl 33 MetronomeOl 8 TriangleO2 34 MetronomeO02 82 ShakerOl 35 Kick25 83 Shaker02 36 Kick27 84 SticksO2 37 Rimshot05 85 ClapOl 38 Snare059 86 Tambourinel 39 Clap07 87 Rimshot03 40 Snare077 88 Snare059 41 Tom38 89 Snare04 42 Stick26 90 Snare034 43 Tom4l 91 Kickl7 44 Closel3 92 Kickl5 45 Tom40 93 MiddleO5 46 OpenO5 94 Close04 47 Tom40 95 Reverse 48 Tom39 96 Applause 49 Crash02 97 Belltree 50 Tom3
4. 39 Clap02 87 RimshotO05 40 Snare06l 88 Snare045 41 0 89 Snare042 42 Close04 90 Snare074 43 Tom02 9 StickO7 44 Middle05 92 Close05 45 Tom03 93 Close03 46 OpenO2 94 MiddleO5 47 Tom04 95 MiddleO5 48 TomoO5 96 Applause 49 Crash02 97 Belltree 50 Tom06 98 Kickl7 5 RideOl 99 Empty 52 Crash03 100 Empty 53 RidebellO 101 Empty 54 TambourineO 102 Empty 55 Crash04 103 Empty 56 Cowbell0l 104 Empty 57 Crash05 105 Empty 58 Vibraslap 106 Empty 59 Ride03 107 Empty 60 Bongo Hi 108 Empty 61 Bongo Low Empty Country Program Change 89 14 SnareOOl 62 Conga Slap 15 Rollo 63 Conga Hi 16 Roll02 64 Conga Low 17 Snare002 65 Timbales Hi 18 Snare003 66 Timbales Lo 19 Snare004 67 Agogo_Hi 20 Snare005 68 Agogo Low 21 Snare006 69 Cabasa 22 Tom Flam0Ol 70 MaracasOl 23 Tom Flam02 71 Whistle0l CrashOl Whistle02 Snare007 GuiroOl Fingsnap 01 Guiro02 Slap ClavesOl Snare008 W_Block_Hi Scratch Up W_Block_Lo Scratch Down Cuica0l SticksO1 Cuica02 Click TriangleOl MetronomeO TriangleO2 Metronome02 Shaker Kick16 Shaker02 Kick06 Sticks02 RimshotO Clap02 SnareO14 TambourineO ClapOl Rimshot03 SnareO12 Snare013 Tom07 Snare011 Stick01 Snare009 Tom08 Stick05 Close01 Stick02 Tom09 Close06 OpenOl OpenOol Toml0 Reverse Toml1 Applause Crash02 Belltree Toml2 Empty RideOl Empty Crash03 Empty RidebellO1 Empty TambourineO Empty Crash04 Em
5. 19 Snare004 67 Agogo HI 20 Snare005 68 Agogo Low 21 Snare006 69 Cabasa 22 Tom 70 MaracasOl 23 Tom Flam02 71 WhistleOl 24 CrashO0l 72 WhistleO2 25 Snare007 73 GuiroOl 26 Fingsnap OI 74 Guiro02 27 Slap 75 ClavesOl 28 Snare008 76 W Block Hi 29 Scratch Up 77 W Block Lo 30 Scratch Down 78 Cuica0l 3 SticksOl 9 Cuica02 32 Click 80 TriangleOl 33 MetronomeO 8 TriangleO2 34 MetronomeO2 82 ShakerOl 35 Kick30 83 ShakerO2 36 KickO6 84 SticksO2 37 RimshotO7 85 Castagnet 38 SnareOS8 l 86 TambourineOl 55 Crash04 103 Empty 56 CowbellO 1 104 Empty 57 Crash05 105 Empty 58 Vibraslap 106 Empty 59 Ride03 107 Empty 60 Bongo Hi 108 Empty 61 Bongo Low 109 Empty Brush Program Change 41 14 SnareO0l 62 Conga Slap 15 RollOl 63 Conga Hi 16 Roll02 64 Conga Low 17 Snare002 65 Timbales Hi 18 Snare003 66 Timbales Lo 19 Snare004 67 Agogo HI 20 Snare005 68 Agogo Low 21 Snare006 69 Cabasa 22 Tom 70 MaracasOl 23 Tom Flam02 71 WhistleO1 24 Crash0l 72 WhistleO2 25 Snare007 73 Guiro0l 26 Fingsnap OI 74 Guiro02 27 Slap 75 ClavesOl 28 Snare008 76 W Block Hi 29 Scratch Up 77 W Block Lo 30 Scratch Down 78 Cuica0l 31 SticksOl 79 Cuica02 32 Click 80 TriangleOl 33 Metronome0Ol 8 TriangleO2 34 MetronomeO02 82 ShakerOl 35 Kick03 83 ShakerO2
6. 47 Tom29 95 MiddleO8 48 Tom30 96 Applause 49 Crash02 97 Belltree 50 Tom3l 98 ClapO7 5 RideOl 99 ClapO8 52 Crash03 100 Empty 53 RidebellO 101 Empty 54 TambourineO 102 Empty 55 Crash04 103 Empty 56 Cowbell0l 104 Empty 57 Crash05 105 Empty 58 Vibraslap 106 Empty 59 RideO2 107 Empty 60 Bongo Hi 108 Empty 61 Bongo Low 109 Empty Progressive Program Change 28 14 SnareO0l 62 Conga Slap 15 RollOl 63 Conga Hi 16 Roll02 64 Conga Low 17 SnareO002 65 Timbales Hi 18 Snare003 66 Timbales Lo 19 Snare004 67 Agogo_Hi 20 Snare005 68 Agogo Low 21 Snare006 69 Cabasa 22 Tom FlamOl 70 MaracasOl 23 Tom Flam02 71 WhistleOl 24 CrashO0l 72 WhistleO2 25 Snare007 73 GuiroOl 26 Fingsnap OI 74 GuiroO2 27 Slap 75 ClavesOl 28 Snare008 76 W Block Hi 29 Scratch03 77 W Block Lo 30 Scratch04 78 Cuica0l 3 SticksOl 79 Cuica02 32 Click 80 TriangleOl 33 MetronomeO 8 TriangleO2 34 MetronomeO2 82 ShakerOl 35 Kick44 83 ShakerO2 36 Kick22 84 SticksO2 37 Rimshotl6 85 ClapOl 38 Snare059 86 Tambourinel SnareOOl Conga Slap RollO1 Conga Hi Roll02 Conga Low Snare002 Timbales Hi Snare003 Timbales Lo Snare004 Agogo Hi SnareO005 Agogo Low Snare006 Cabasa Tom Flam01 MaracasOl Tom Flam02 WhistleO1 CrashOl Whistle0
7. D N B l O1 CO01 C1 gt NO O O C1 I O MUSETTE 01 ONTHEROAD 02 ONTHEROAD 03 64 5 66 68 ORGANJAZZ 02 171 POP128 01 ep IT NO O 27 JE m ZU O D J N 1 2 2 ze zzzz2m gt gt gt 5 5 5 NR RI HIIS NININ olofo o olola INT Is co NS D G gt Z D N N JI KETRON e AUDYA 147 Audio Drum Audio Drum N OP12 8 02 OP12 8 03 OPFOLK 01 OPFOLK 02 OPFOLK 03 OPFOLK 04 OPMIX 01 179 POPMIX 02 180 POPMIX 03 181 POPMIX 04 182 POPTWIST 01 183 POPTWIST 02 184 POPTWIST 03 185 POPTWIST 04 0 1 1 1 N N NI A i DU D DD DD D 0 20 ZJ U 20 20 Q QO QO Qo Qo Qo Qo Q Q Qo Qo 20 Qo Qo Q Q 20 Qo Qo Qo Qo Qo Q 20 Qo Qo Ro Qo Ro 9 JFIRE E AA A Gp Op AA Co Go Co Co A EOOSISISIIS ISISIS E 222 o Q v vim v ojojox ojojo oss rm alat a i 2 i faulal la P e o xv ov olojoloizizaiza 99o oo o1o o o o 1 0 2 o co co co oj ejjis jssjjjjt51i e olojiolo o olo v 2 v 2 9 9 8 amp 9 e s e o S9
8. DQ Ul uUcicicicic xixieleieieio DS BD oloil molo N 20 MERENGUE 03 49 NUJAZZ 01 50 NUJAZZ 02 51 NUSOUL 01 52 NUSOUL 02 53 3 31 NO O NO NO NO GO O 8 CO NO C2 33 6 6 O DOBLE 01 DOBLE 02 OLKA OPCHA 01 OPCHA 02 OPCHA 03 OPLATIN OPLATIN 02 OPLATIN 03 OP 01 OP 02 OP 03 OP 04 OP 05 OP 06 ROGRESS 01 ROGRESS 02 60 PROGRESS 03 61 PROGRESS 04 262 R amp BLUES 01 WD a NO PO NIIIN C1 JI NO O N CO NO N 329 123 124 125 126 127 128 58 59 POPCHA_03 POPLATIN O1 POPLATIN O2 49 POPLATIN O3 191 popoi 92 193 T m co DU V V T1 TI T1 T T Qo G G C CO UU UJ G GQ GQ e gt gt gt gt S al az Iri rri rmi ITI IT cp co olelo dic SINH ZZN ojo N ak 01 328 329 123 124 125 126 127 128 258 _ 259 260 261 262 138 i CO I Co NO ce CO O 32 REGGAE 04 3 REGGAE 05 RHUMBA 01 7 RHUMBA 02 88 RHUMBA 03 89 RHUMBA 04 RHUMBA 05 RHUMBA 06 RNB 01 CO N CO O 152 KETRON AUDYA N
9. nutta Pe mid she pes 7 mad y am SPOT EL Mm E ZOOM WF i born chma ned d Lbir f EF Lambin air Dee EH F poer E HE m l i 4 3 L belong bo FOL md jr Lor feel dancing ph Figure 50 Tips amp Tricks In order to get the Best Deal between Midi File and Style select firstly Midi File and play it Now activate Remix feature than select style to link on Go ahead until the best Style will be catch Please unaware if Live Guitar will be unsuitable during this procedure You ll replace it on next step Once the Audio Drum will be selected while Drum Remix is playing you could assign your own Live Guitar on different arranger from Style View Menu and than Save it as usual Accordingly Internal or User Style selection we suggest once Remix feature will be completed to Stop and Play it again in order to check procedure done Of course you could create your own Remix by using User Audio Drum also specially designed for Remix feature purpose Voicetron The Voicetron section has one volume fader for MICRO and one volume fader for VOCALIZER both with on off LED button Once you connect a microphone to the MICRO 1 connector and or MICRO 2 connector you can access to a wide range of options for the voice processing B MICRO The MICRO button enables both MICRO 1 and MICRO 2 inputs Connect one or two dynamic microphones to the connector
10. Figure 124 DORR aA inferi Bipi Papas pfheets urair Pec seu Arati Voscecnon Foctvwibch 8 Deum hee wmv Dn Peram Me cett auta switsh Crt o Get Piu arf Figure 125 11 BALLAN 5 Paar ud p d ure 5 lrrmwpos rey tic ER arango Modes Tart m oy Tae AP 9 vm wu ESLZDIERIIEUM Figure 126 3 After set your own Registration User should assign a related name of it by entering letters or number using keybed Figure 126 show i e MY REGISTRATION 4 Press SAVE button User 5 to complete When you save a REGISTRATION in automatic mode a progressive number of 4 digits is added to the file name 0001_REGIS SRG 0002_REGIS SRG etc B Recalling a SINGLE REGISTRATION 1 To recall a REGISTRATION from the list on the window you can use the CURSOR A V buttons or the DATA VALUE wheel to select a REGISTRATION and then press the ENTER button Figure 127 To recall a REGISTRATION you can also use the numeric keypad by switching the USER 3 button NUMERIC ON Figure 128 For example by using the option NUMERIC ON just press the number 1 button to recall the REGISTRATION 0001 or the number 2 button to recall the REGISTRATION 0002 and so on To recall REGISTRATION with two digits or more you must digit the number sequence of the REGISTRATION Fo
11. 11 Trag M Y PROGRAM LES BALLAD BRL A ora PES Tes 11 Transp Sekt C3 ktmes Figure 92 Program You can access the LFO parameters by using the F1 F10 buttons The selected parameter can be Press the USER 1 button Progr Edit to return from moditied by using the DATA VALUE wheel or the the LFO page to the VOICE EDIT page Press the USER CURSOR lt 4 buttons The value range for each 1 button Progr Edit again to return to the initial parameter is from 0 to 63 Press the CURSOR lt 4 gt PROGRAM EDIT page buttons together to set the default value 32 F1 VIBRATO RATE vibrato frequency F2 VIBRATO DEPTH vibrato depth F3 VIBRATO DELAY vibrato delay F6 LFO RATE oscillator frequency If you set an organ DRAWBARS on the VOICE number F7 LFO TVF LEO amount on the filter 3 of the PROGRAM the parameters of the VOICE EDIT F8 LFO TVA LFO amount on the amplifier page are visible but you cannot modify the organ voice parameters After you have modified the parameters of each VOICE in the VOICE EDIT page press the USER 1 button Progr Edit to return to the previous page select a different VOICE by using the F1 or F6 buttons and press the USER 1 button Voice Edit to modify the voice parameters KETRON AUDYA 51 Program 2ND VOICE Tiam BALLAD Press the USER 2 button 2nd Voice to see a screen mM IT like Figure 93 by using the parame
12. L d NO N G PO O amp B 0 O O Co eek h OJO amp CO Co Arp amp Licks 4STRINGS 14 06 3 4STRINGS 15 45 4 4STRINGS 0 47 4 4STRINGS 06 8PIANO 01 8PIANO 02 8STRINGS 01 8STRINGS 02 8STRINGS 03 BANJO 01 BANJO 02 1 BBANJO 03 BANJO 04 BANJO 05 BANJO 06 BANJO 07 BANJO 08 BANJO 09 8 BBANJO 10 BANJO 11 BANJO 12 BANJO 13 BANJO 14 QUIT 01 GUIT 02 QUIT 03 GUIT 04 GUIT 05 PIANO 01 PIANO 02 PIANO 03 PIANO 04 PIANO T 01 PIANO T 02 PIANO T 03 PIANO T 04 PIANO T 05 O Co CO 8 O N Co DA O A BL HR BR amp ce A Gd GO GW G GW CO CO CO CO CO ce NIOJ amp GO PO O POTN TNO ERO ENO e N OIAIOIN AJOJN RIS Co NO o CO CO 00 O o Co OO O CO CO CO CO O CO Co KETRON e AUDYA 153 Arp amp Licks Arp amp Licks G U G
13. Figure 21 42 ROMANTIC GRAND end Dark Ensemble PIAMO Page 1 BALLAD ARRANGER Tempo 0 Transp Time 00 55 PREVIEW RESTORE SAVE O Figure 22 KETRON AUDYA 2 Player Wave Edit In detail e Preview Allows preview function of edited waveform with new assigned value e Restore as Restore mean and useful as UNDO of preview use e Save Just to Save an edited file In order to hear NORM and FADE rendered feature user must select PREVIEW function As probably know this feature needs a computing time related of wave length to elaborate final wave result Rendering feature will not necessary in case of using START or END features You Il hear it immediately If for instance you select NORM parameter at 100 your own waveform will be Normalized in order to gain all dynamic range available However we suggest to use less i e at 90 is any sound source will be applied on this wave the whole amount could be overloaded even a properly distortion or overdrive is request After that pre PREVIEW and when computing rendering will be completed you could hear and see the difference as showed of Figure 23 If you would catch the right START or else Point will be really useful manage with ZOOM feature Here is the ZOOM value to use 1x 8x 16x 32x 1 8 1 4 1 2 1 1 The first 1x 8x 16x 32x set value allows to magnify waveform in a traditional way The others will be useful asa sample w
14. Figure 32 In the lateral menus there are some items that were not present in the previous ones B Page 1 3 F9 Remix parameter that allows a MIDI remix see page 34 B Page 2 3 Wave Sync function that lets you synchronize your MIDI tracks with Wave files associated with the MIDI and accurately synced see description on page 33 B Page 3 3 F8 S Medley Medley Sync function If set to On it starts the new MIDI file from the beat F9 Ch Quant Chord Quantization It enables disables the quantization of the chords using Live Guitar in case of Midi Remix B Making a MIX The Player allows the single track playback or the MIX playback of two or more tracks at the same time up to four audio tracks and one MIDI track simultaneously MIX a WAVE file and one MP3 1 Press the WAVE button 2 Select an audio file from the WAVE folder 3 Press the START button USER 5 or the ENTER button or the START button on the panel 4 The WAVE track starts playback and its LED flashes Press the MP3 button Select one MP3 file from the list Press the START button USER 5 Press the START button on the panel the WAVE track stops and you must press START again in order to start playback the MP3 track 8 The MP3 track starts playback and its LED flashes The WAVE track stops and its LED turns off 9 Instead if you press the ENTER button the MP3 track will start playback while the WAVE track is play
15. i2 0 D ough Pad artheme tar njo hamisen oto et a a 5 605 A O N e Q Co 109 D 3 O agpipe iddle rna nkle gogo teeldrum ood Block iko lotom1 ntom verse et_Noise eath ashore T m I I L d IL I l lI L L lI lI oo 41 O CO1 CO PO NIN O NO NO N CO D T Mill ho A UJ Q elephone elicopter B ek No or DII o Ka D D 128 Gunshot1 N VOICE 58 9 Tbone_Section Oberbass1 Muted Flughorn 1 Brass2 Growbrass1 Brass1 Soprano Circus Blowed Rock Alto Mariachi Growbrass2 55 O lide Tbone NOR D iV zn c D oice Flute ynth14 5 6 GM Voices 77 Analogs 78 Flanger 79 Brightpad 80 Wiring 81 Synh23 Synth22 Synth20 Fusion Synbass6 _ 87 Synbass7 88 Synbass 2nd Perc BANK C CCO Value 10 N jVOICE 1 Brigt Grand Hammer _ GrandL Grand Ro NO JI Ep Legend Real Mark Ep Phase Tine Soft Brightpad Crash 1 Tubular Bell Dry Vibe Kalimba Marimba Glockpad E Piano Hamm Slow
16. 26 SLOW ROCK 34 SLOW ROCK 4 S SWING 2 S S 8 O WING 3 WING FOX 3 SWING FOX 4 TANGO 2 8 1 42 TRIPL DISCWH 2 O01 1 4 COo O1 O1 O1 A je imic idoJjojnmj m z o N oO djo gt AE OIO CO zz zm gt gt AN Z o mim Ol zirir x 2 X r wm J U g CoD O 5 TRIPL_SOULI6 20 UP CLEAN 00 wALTZ 2 o WALZS 5 WALTZ_1_STOP 02 WESTERN JI U Q O C Z lt Co o 0l C U Q O C Z lt NO lI ALIA KETRON AUDYA 155 Styles AUDYA FACTORY STYLES 6 OGENLE REB s OBEN o owBE 2 The symbol before the name of the STYLE means that the style has AUDIO DRUM GROOVES or LIVE GUITAR parts 156 KETRON AUDYA 39 40 41 D CO gt C2 Co O D UJ gt DA CoD J Co UJ gt C2 op UO p RO 016 POP ROCK O1 O1 CO1 CO1 O1 O1 CO1 01 BH HB HBR HB RR 0 GORINTAL REB 1 ACOUSTIC_POP 2 sUBWAY 3 LOUNGE 7 uGHT POP O A Co I GR amp B BALLAD 2 20 SMOOTH FUNK 2 FUNKY 23 ORAPAREGGAE M CHILL_OUT 25 TRIPLET POP 5 POP CHART SD E 9 19 20 22 23 24 25 J AUDYA FACTORY STYLES
17. ALAD IAN the value of the volume set on the MIDI Player CONCERT GR AND Figure 64 More details on MIDI Player MAIN VIEW section of this manual F5 The F5 button does not open any window It m indicates the MAIN VIEW section corresponding MO to the mixer parts of the Arranger In this section the volume values of Drum Bass Chord and Lower Figure 65 are displayed DOCTOR tea MID F TLL Ful MID I LA EN ROCE MID MARCH MID I was um MINDAN CLA MID F6 The F6 button opens the window of VOICES Umane Tr selection for the right hand RIGHT It also shows the value of the volume set for the right hand and the type of VOICE such as PRESET PROGRAM DRAWBARS or INSTRUMENT SUPERSOLO CEEE FE Tr EL c3 Lies b F7 The F7 button opens the window for VOICES selection for the 2ND VOICE It also shows the value of the volume set for the 2ND VOICE and the octave shift set by PROGRAM If you select an instrument from the MAIN VIEW window the octave will be set to the standard 0 value and will appear CON CERT GRAND md voee det STRINGS 1 Oct i 60 GRAND PLANE 5x F8 The F8 button opens the window for VOICES selection for the left hand LEFT VOICE It also shows the value of the volume set for and octave shift F9
18. Bas CHORD LOWER taal ESI MUTE SINGLE Figure 157 SLOW _BALLAD BARREL_HONKY end Strings a PIANC Page Audio Drum chi POPFUNK3_95 41 ran Piana E a Groove Bank BALLAD Grand Piana Tempo 95 Transp Precision Low Diaipad Low z Live ElPiano_Detune 12 FUNE E T ARRANGER YOLUMES Split C3 as B3 B3 B3 DELI BASS CHORD LOWER Bb 3 5 VOICE EFFECT MUTE SINGLE Figure 158 KETRON e AUDYA Style View B Storing the style Once you made all the desired settings press the SAVE button on the front panel and give a name from the keyboard to store the style in the current position Figure 159 In the example of Figure 160 the style name is MY BALLAD The changes can be stored both for styles containing normal parts and Audio Style Modeling The style will be stored in the USER STYLE area in the category previously selected In other words if the style is in the BALLAD category the style will be stored as USER STYLE in the same category B Selecting the style 1 Press the USER STYLE button on the front panel 2 Select the category by using the numeric keypad 3 Select the style by choosing the previously given name Figure 161 4 KETRON AUDYA SLOW BALLAD 63 CONCERT GRAND BALLAD ARRANGER 2nd Stringsl Tempo 6 Transpo PIANO Page 1 Drum Bank Piano Bank SBEATL 1 40 2 BALLAD 3b Groove Ban
19. Heart Empty Foot_Splash Empty Steps Empty Applause Empty Door_Slam Empty Door_Bell Empty Scratch_Fx Empty Empty Conga Slap Empty Conga Hi Empty Conga Low Timbales Hi Timbales Lo Agogo Hi Agogo Low Cabasa Maracas0l WhistleO WhistleO2 GuiroOl 26 Empty 74 Guiro02 27 Stick02 75 ClavesOl 28 CloseOl 76 W_Block_Hi 29 OpenOl 77 W Block Lo 30 RideOl 78 Cuica0l 31 SticksOl 79 Cuica02 32 Click 80 TriangleO 33 8 TriangleO2 34 MetronomeO02 82 ShakerOl 35 Kick41 83 ShakerO2 36 Kick37 84 SticksO2 37 RimshotO 85 Castagnet 38 Snare031 86 Kick40 39 Castagnet 87 Kick39 40 5 4 88 Applause 4 TimpaniOl 89 Empty 42 TimpaniO2 90 Empty 43 Timpani03 9 Empty 44 Timpani04 92 Empty 45 TimpaniO5 93 Empty 46 TimpaniO6 94 Empty KETRON e AUDYA 169 Drum Set 47 295 Empty Studio Program Change 57 48 TimpaniOS8 96 Empty us psu 14 SnareOOl 62 Conga Slap at ul O apy 15 RollOl 63 Conga Hi a 16 Roll02 64 Conga_Low z ee rot 17 Snare002 65 Timbales Hi 18 Snare003 66 Timbales Lo 54 TambourineO 102 Empty 20 Snare005 68 Agogolow 36 Cowbell 104 Empty oT Snare006 69 Cees a Vibeaslap 10 gt 2d 22 Tom FlamOl 70 MaracasOl 50 Crash07 107 Empty 23 Tom Flam02 71 W
20. 70 MaracasOl 23 Tom Flam02 71 WhistleOl 24 CrashlO 72 WhistleO2 25 Snare055 73 GuiroOl 26 FingsnapO3 74 Guiro02 27 Slap 75 ClavesOl 28 SnareO008 76 W Block Hi 29 Scratch Up 77 W Block Lo 30 Scratch Down 78 Cuica0l 3 SticksOl 9 Cuica02 32 Click 80 TriangleOl 33 MetronomeO0 8 TriangleO2 34 Metronome02 82 ShakerOl 35 Kick50 83 ShakerO2 36 Kickll 84 SticksO2 37 Rimshot22 85 Castagnet 38 Snare050 86 TambourineO 39 Clap03 87 Rimshot02 40 Snare090 88 Snare066 4 Tom38 89 Snare067 42 StickO2 90 SnareO88 43 Tom4l 91 MiddleOl 44 Close0l 92 StickO2 45 Tom40 93 Close02 46 94 OpenO2 47 Tom40 95 Reverse 48 Tom39 96 Applause 49 CrashlO 97 Belltree 50 Tom39 98 Empty 5 Ride04 99 Empty 52 Crash02 100 Empty 53 Ridebell03 101 Empty 54 TambourineO 102 Empty 55 CrashlO 103 Empty 56 Cowbell0l 104 Empty 57 CrashlO 105 Empty 58 Vibraslap 106 Empty 59 Ride03 107 Empty 60 Bongo_Hi 108 Empty 61 Bongo Low 109 Empty Custom Program Change 65 14 SnareO0l 62 Conga Slap 15 Rollo 63 Conga Hi 16 Roll02 64 Conga Low 17 SnareO002 65 Timbales Hi 18 Snare003 66 Timbales Lo 19 Snare004 67 Agogo_Hi 20 Snare005 68 Agogo Low 21 Snare006 69 Cabasa 22 Tom 70 MaracasOl 23 Tom Flam02 71 WhistleOl 24 CrashO0l 72 WhistleO2 25 Snare007 73 GuiroOl 26 Fingsnap OI 74 Guiro02 27 Slap 75 Claves02 28 Snare008 76 Wood Hi 172 KETRON AUDYA 29 Scratch Up 77 Wood 30 Scratch Down 78 Cuica0l 3 SticksOl 9 Cui
21. Audya Series KETRON AEE a FPE NM a a ee EN VE ILI z a s cd as Lecta uud p m E NN 3 a 7 su E o ap ble ie REL 8 i k Te J 2 a i A T du Mea ii 111 ti L Ti ee ALRLLZLLAILLLLLLAAA IIIIIIIIIIILIBILAL EIIYIIIXIIIIIIIIILIL ARRERRZALARLALLALALAAX IIIIIIIIIIIIIILI I tm PE amm m fs E a ETEF QUE py he e tey p i mri amp 21 o ARES 2 KETRON AUDYA A This appliance has a serial number located on the rear panel Audya or on the bottom panel Audya 4 5 and 8 Please record the model name and the serial number and retain them for your records Model name Serial number 10 11 12 19 14 IMPORTANT SAFETY PRECAUTIONS CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN A A A Read these instructions Keep these instructions Heed all warnings Follow all instructions Do not use this apparatus near water Clean only with dry cloth Do not block any ventilation openings Install in accordance by using the manufacturer s instructions Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators heat registers stoves or other apparatus including amplifiers that produce heat Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or grounding type plug A polarized plug has two blade
22. C Peres Feel in i phu Ir UTE i a El LEM En m F L w i E I Mellie in Time uM DEF LAF Tig nt Pom ume Fe ome 2 Piri Tate Pia ee Pam vit fum inca ort Ped awe i a ie ih TAO PD 14 T i ER mal rum LE Figure 317 the lyrics values ON OFF F9 Registration Sort sets the sort mode of the Registration list values Numeric Alphab F10 Registration Restore enables disables the RESTORE function which restores the panel to the conditions before the Registration recall values ON OFF B Page 3 By pressing the USER 5 button again you can access a further settings page press USER 4 to return to the previous page as shown on Figure 265 Here you can find the following functions F1 MPS LINE IN TRANSP enables disables ON OFF the transposition of the MP3 file and of the Line In input signal This function if set to OFF allows to play the MP3 file together with the style without affecting the pitch of the MP3 by changing the tempo of the style F2 WAV DJ MIX enables disables ON OFF the DJ MIX function between the WAVE and DJ LOOP Players see procedure below F3 Player amp STYLE MIX values ON OFF activates the Player when a Style is running 4 TUNE TO CHORD values ON OFF see procedure below F5 REG
23. Hamm Fast Gospel Slow Pipe Gospel Fast Shot Musete 3 Diatonic Alpen 5 Brazilian CountryFx MelobarFx StratoFx F ingered co C2 1 JGuit amp Slide Sp 2 4 Ex ME E 9 10 KCN 12 13 i14 15 16 18 19 20 21 25 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 EN 32 3 NO _NOTE 90 frd Perc 91 Click B3 Vibrato Blues Slow Blues Fast Lower 8 4 161 R amp RoIT Medium Guit Sinus usion Funk berbass2 nimlolgo C o f 1 c ze Pedal Bass amp Guit2 Violin Slow G D Q Marcato Tziago Concert A Chamber Stringss Symphonic Stringss Digisting strings2 DarkEnsemble T Humming Chori Cornet B Dixie O O Classic Choir N 8 Bright_Tbone Diie bone Section Fal Brass 2 Brass Trombone 64 Octabrass Ke OD CJ Q 0o 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 EUN 42 43 44 45 46 E 48 49 50 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 Ea 62 63 64 Voices with sign represent Real Voice These voices featuring effect own noises or else in oredr to reproduce original timbre with more realist nuance 103 Stops 104 Whaguitar 105
24. MNINININ Co 0 O do uk NO I ziz3me 2 NO co CD ax Keys N DRUMSET Contemporary Urban Electro Country op Super Kit unk Super Kit ower Super Kit Audio Drum 60 S POP 03 6 6 8 BALLAD 01 6 8 BALLAD 02 6 8 BALLAD 03 70 S POP 03 BEAT1 01 7 8 8BEAT1 02 8 BEAT1 03 BIGBAND 01 ss QIO UJ UJ gt gt Z Z OIN BLUES 01 BLUES 02 BLUES 03 UD G UJ gt 0 O JI ciciciciololiolcdolcolicdol co eioloelolidolcdceiclicdcl lcolcdo c 5 55 5 51 5 ICICI lt I lt I lt NISISISI IFI ri Zelg olololol N gt OlolololbJolNIj BRUSHWALTZ 02 BRUSHWALTZ O3 7 UJ UJ JJ 2J CIC NJN PE J NIN OJO Co N OJO z z lt lt w 09 Lr Ir O 8 9 O Zz lt JJ O A QO N 8 CNTRY_ROCK_02 9 ROCK_03 7 DANCEFLOOR 03 Aoi 2 TI ITI ITI r r r J I ojojo w N 0 DISCODANCE NGL WALTZ 01 NGL WALTZ 02 NGL WALTZ 03 NGL WALTZ 04 NGL WALTZ 05 UROCHACHA 901 OXTROT 01 OXTROT 02 OXTROT 03 OXTROT 04 UNKY 01 USION 02 USION 03 GOSPEL 01 GOSPEL 02 GOSPEL 03
25. a ines Ene Msg 1 SFTERTUOUCH Lo ws 7 eese iS NEED ODS cacy twee eh 41 11 t Lx z ET BALA rS T uz x Pei ares PDA Ae L p moe Nm PLL PARTS H PAM A BIDE FiLTER 1 EF 3 F mmm ini TEDE IL z 65 COMERT Cn AND CONBMENENENENE E JI GEN RETE EE Pe MI farsa Pet al combs armies PAKE DANT WIES FILTER Htc tw a oo amm am eS LETE Loo Farei Miimi Figure 274 0 je Lower He MIL F3 2 F 43 LU Em matr Ce Lone E dm LI li xL hare vi oer J B UTILITY From the first screen of the MIDI menu by pressing the F4 button the UTILITY page will open as shown in Figure 276 Here you can set the following parameters by pressing directly the F1 F10 buttons e F1 SOFT THRU enables the MIDI Thru The MIDI data to MIDI IN port will be transmitted thru the MIDI Out port e F2 MIDI CLOCK IN enables the MIDI clock reception e F3 MIDI CLOCK OUT enables the MIDI clock transmission e FA LOCAL enables the Local On Off function of the keyboard In Local Off you will not hear any sound e F5 MIDI PORT IN KEYB enables the MIDI
26. n MELE tier TER L Figure 42 combination it s enough to press SAVE on the panel Give a new name and confirm again with the button 5 10 Save 8 The playback is obtained by selecting the new MIDI file and starting with Enter The Wave volume may be adjusted separately from MIDI by the slider Wave 9 n order to add other tracks repeat carefully point from 5 to 7 1 No limitations to add same audio track on different points of MIDI file 2 User can assign just one single Wave at a time 3 If a Wave have the parameter Repeat set into Loop mode before the value 1 then all the others Waves associates to the MIDI file having a subsequent Start bar will be ignored KETRON AUDYA 33 MIDI REMIX MIDI Remix SLi Wr BALLAD iJ CLR GRAND On ae Bra ii LE LANI creat Audya features the MIDI REMIX function which allows A to replace original midi file drum track usually on CLOS view track 10 with a Drum part of Audya Style Audio 3 Beer Mau the init YRTC a e Tey Drum or else hans M E ir Oye maid mwe Daisy ned SOM OFE p uL Fever 1 mid Trai al B Here how create your own MIDI DRUM opum Fence Eea g mici REMIX F parth Hi 1 Press MIDI button on Player Section than select your own Midi file
27. the parameters of this function The function allows Bains Genet Pana birea to set automatically a VOCALIZER effect associated aec kg mw to the part played by the Arranger For example you can set a DUET effect for the START a TRIO effect D EDIT Li n LUI ART Up mh doa cai S for the variation A of the Arranger a VOCODER effect T at for the variation B of the Arranger and so on You can KRIE make the choice of the part by using the CURSOR A SANN W buttons while the effect to assign can be selected FLED NEY by using the DATA VALUE wheel or by using the F1 SAVE WUICEINUM PRELETE F5 buttons DUET TRIO QUARTET QUINTET and FIXED INTERV or the DATA VALUE wheel If display Orem AAEE AS m show vocalizer setting remain unchanged Figure 368 Saving a VOCALIZER effect Dm EF CONCERT CHAND 1 Once finished press the SAVE button on the front Peer panel 2 Adialogue will appear to give a name Figure 368 Digit the name by using the keyboard and press the USER 5 button SAVE 3 Once saved you can recall the custom effect from the second page of the VOCALIZER window Figure 369 PEEXET CELE TiC Fee d d a LV um Get Lote Figure 369 KETRON AUDYA 137 Search Search Main View Audya features a useful SEARCH function in order to search files stored in the internal disk or in external USB d
28. O JIGS MARACAS 2T MARACAS s MARAC BOLEROi MARAC BOLERO2 MARAC BOLEROS MARAC BOSSA Manac oHa MARAC CUMBIA MARAC MERENG MARAC SALSA MARAC SALSA2 MERENGUE A MERENGUE B MERENGUE C MERENGUE D MERENGUEE MERENGUEF PANDEROt PANDEROZ PANDERO iT PANDERO 2T PASODOBLE POPFUNKB PORIMZZA POPIAZZ C R amp BLUES B d 150 KETRON AUDYA NO D D UU idu T1 gt a 38 46 a7 RIDE FAST2 48 RIDE MEDIUM 49 RIDE SHUFFLE 50 RIDE SLOW 51 Rocka 5 Rocke 55 SALSAA s4 SALSAB 56 57 58 59 60 61 2 63 39 SHAKER 1 T 65 SHAKER 2 40 SHAKER 2 T 94 66 SHUFFLE A 67 SHUFFLE B 68 SHUFFLE C NO OIII Piri ri gt rir OIII a aaa T7 78 76 79 Bass Bank 2 8BALLAD 01 2 8BALLAD 02 2 8BALLAD 03 2 8BALLAD 04 6BEAT 01 6BEAT 02 6BEAT 03 6BEAT 04 6BEAT 05 6BEAT 06 6BEAT 07 6BEAT 08 6BEAT 09 4PDOBLE 01 8BALLAD_01 OBEAT 01 OBEAT 02 OPOP 01 02 BEAT 01 BEAT 02 BEAT 03 BEAT 04 BEAT 05 08 8BEAT 06 BEAT 07 BEAT 08 EAT 09 EAT 10 BEAT 11 EAT 12 EAT 13 EAT 14 BEAT 15 EAT 16 EAT 17 BEAT 18 1 BBEAT 19 22 8BEAT 20 323 8BEAT 21 24 8BEAT 22 7 AFRO_01 18 AFRO 02 19 AFRO 03 20
29. 18 Am IE T P i g Era ppe _ roc jara m amp kn g gl g k a E i a i LT t qu z So Bi d e i i iJ d i d T INTAC ENDING KEY STAART KEYSTOD The buttons of the ARRANGER CONDUCTOR section allow real time control of the styles when the Arranger mode is selected See the PLAY CONTROL settings to select the desired Arranger mode on page 22 From left to right here are the descriptions for each button INTRO ENDING 1 2 3 When the Arranger is stopped by pressing one of these three buttons you can enable one of the three introductions of the style When the Arranger is playing by pressing one of the three buttons you can enable one of the three endings of the style KEY START KEY STOP If button START is on the Arranger will instantly start when you start playing the keyboard If button STOP is on the Arranger will instantly stop when you release all the buttons ABCD Each button corresponds to a style variation BREAK 1ER HOLD Ifi SLOW FAST FILL IN By pressing this button you can enable one FILL of the selected style and the Arranger will automatically start If the Arranger is already playing by pressing this button you will enable the same FILL BREAK By pressing this button you can enable one of the BREAK of the selected style and the Arranger will a
30. Here Mode Chord Quantize will be available Chord Quantize is really useful to guarantee suitable synchronization for Chord playing on Live Guitar Remix feature Figure 50 2nd method Here you could set your own midi track to assign on Left Part 1 Seton Menu KEYBOARD CONTROL gt UTILITY Page 1 gt Remix Live Guitar Autoplay 2 Onselected Midi File record or locate Chord Part Set on GM PART Chan TX Left Save Song Set up with F3 flag Part amp MIX to On 3 Select your own Style with more suitable Live Guitar pattern built in to assign on current Midi file 4 Insert REMIX function to ON Midi Player page selection Once Midi file will play press SAVE button to store Remix feature recorded 5 Play again Midi file just saved 3rd method How to Record Chord Track 1 Seton Menu KEYBOARD CONTROL gt UTILITY Page 1 gt RemixLiveGuitar Manual 2 Activate Remix feature 3 Press RECORD while midi file playing 4 Play Chord on Left part of keyboard following harmony tune Chord played will be record as is 5 Press Save to store all data 36 KETRON AUDYA 1 FEEL LOWE pem OH ITS 50 G000 TPS 150 GOOD Sei See oT j m iini in m TT 0 6000 IT S 0 TE t4 Ems Figure 49 ERU ppm MERNE IG PORANT IC n gd g Te fil lire Pare Fee H MEUFRLFIMEET E phi la FU Mewer fire m s M i i amika amp padie LYRIC
31. NEET dH awer ars me arten rus i rem ew PT UE ty Epa a1 a EF DEM gar c Poner n CHAD Loe E 1 MI z LE ome 185 CE ih AF oh cm ans l E jam rus ce ea ore TTT 186 MAIA dI NEP WEE LSS eT FEL ET Finest GTa oh Jove oet Ear d PEET qr Lom ees e E DERIT URBE LEE d T eram i EN EF gu B 122i Figure 187 MA SIR fi wR us cw NTHweT 37m x arm rus EM PIE ETT Fran sete EI nce Fesser Lom eem om PURI MNT cage d i1 11 EF E DLE HEM DINGEN E IT gm Figure 188 ILOA TTE ET pnl uP Aa ve us i uke i et franz a fas EH PT rang rd F m um m F DLE Ce Le 2 Figure 189 KETRON e AUDYA 83 Style Mode CHORD MODE Once CHORD MODE is selected you can choose among four operative modes for the automatic chords by using the CURSOR gt buttons or the DATA VALUE wheel Figure 190 Easy 1 Standard functionality with normal chord recognition Some chord can be recognized even if they are played partially For example you obtain a major chord playing only the root By using the root and the minor third you obtain the minor chord By usin
32. NO Groove Drum 2 4 FLAMENCOF z7 asv GUAJRAB 166 eurai 7 eurae a HIMATIO a z HIPHOPt 3 HOUSES o4 Houses o HOUSE7 os Houses 20 HOUSE Kick5B 223 HOUSE Kick7A 7 JJAZZROCK A NIN NINJ 4 NIO O1 gt c CO CO CO CO OO CO CO CO CO OJO gt Oo 4 O gt gt lt a ee O NO RS NO NO O EH NO D KETRON AUDYA 149 Groove Drum 2 Groove Bank Drum 2 C AZZROCK B e c 0 ATINDANCE1 11 NO CO co ce MARACAS 2 T N O 0 CO N MARACAS 5 BOLERO MARAC BOLERO2 17 MARAC BOLEROS3 18 MARAC BOSSA 19 MARAC CHA 20 MARAC CUMBIA 21 MARAC MERENG 22 MARAC SALSA 23 MARAC SALSA 24 MERENGUE A 25 MERENGUE B 26 MERENGUE C 27 MERENGUE D 28 MERENGUE E MERENGUE F PANDERO1 29 PANDERO2 36 PANDERO 1 T 37 PANDERO 2 T 30 PASODOBLE 3 O 1 A Oo O NINJ IOJ gt C2 o B 2 33 34 99 36 37 38 39 4 41 42 POPFUNK B POPJAZZ A Big g POPJAZZ C
33. UZZ Hot British Org Over1 Org Over3 Over User1 and Over User2 Dist User1 Dist User2 and Dist User3 When you activate a Distortion Preset you can set the option Lock On Off as for the previous effects USER DISTORTION When you select one of the five custom Distortion effects you can access the parameters of the corresponding effect by pressing the EDIT button on the front panel The Figure 295 shows the parameters for Over User1 but the parameters are identical for Over User 2 Dist User 2 Dist User 1 and Dist User 3 The only difference is the basic algorithm The parameters are the following F1 User Distortion choose from 1 to 5 F2 GAIN effect level values 0 63 F3 INPUT LEVEL input level values 0 63 F4 FILTER FREQ frequency filter cutoff values 0 63 F5 FILTER RESO filter resonance values 0 63 F OTUPUT LEVEL output volume values 0 63 F8 SUSTAIN sustain amount values 0 63 F9 TYPE algorithm type Tube Grunge Sharp Heavy Punk By pressing the CURSOR lt 4 gt buttons together you set the value to 0 After you set the parameters you can to store the custom Distortion by pressing the USER 5 button SAVE or the SAVE button on the front panel A brief message SAVE DATA TO DISK will appear 114 k ErRoN AUDYA SLOW BALLAD 63 CONCERT_GRAND BALLAD Grand Piana Tempo 76 Transp end Stringsi PIANC Page 1 Distorsioni Overdrive 2 Distorsion Overdrive 3
34. rhe mel Figure 341 E7 COMRAT CHAND T a TEn im 6ingri L HW FLNO Fonda orf i j Mss eet Hn alega 2 Moss UNTER cO exe E ad Etna 1 thes da T am 3 erro Tipi m Tap FITCH B re iE E UA ESTIGA Emm qam 1 eyed nm HH u u u aid Come Lee z ee p Figure 342 DALLA ET CONCERT lane r M A py Zn Steg ped T TTE ME bark Pe Lope te eet EQUALITER Fee VERAT Fi Kay PTICH MESET ECTPONI P PRESET GE iPage witc Wike LA Bh 8 ES F TP RAT Sn Mail Figure 343 PALLAD La DITE ps Pe T RR 11 TAN bee zi Le GE EH MKR MM LIMITER T in vIDPATO TRAM CRM Fifth PREZFT CELE TIN Pee at mic ae rai ai cuc 2 cba Figure 344 KETRON e AUDYA 131 Voicetron LIMITER By selecting the F7 button a LIMITER screen only for MICRO 1 like Figure 345 will appear where you can choose one of the available Limiters by using the CURSOR A YW buttons or the DATA VALUE wheel EQUALIZER By selecting the F8 button an EQUALIZER screen only for MICRO1 like Figure 346 will appear where you can choose one of the equalization Presets by using the USER buttons from 1 to 5 or set the your equalization curve To change the equalization curve choose the ba
35. zig gem mim 3 2 OIO 5 5 5 5 TT ITI ITI ITI TI TY c CO CO CO CO CO CO CO O0 CO CO CO CO NIN ITNININ IN DN ITN IN b O O 0 OG OG OD O1 55 6 5 Oo 4 1 5 ITI Tm 9lgege sr L ooo ooloolg9o o m m rm m yyy 2 2 2 z lI AAA ogglelelolo olololo ER c m Blo p O l G PO O N HOUSE 132 01 HOUSE 132 02 eo Co 09 12 HULLYGULLY 04 13 HULLYGULLY 05 14 HULLYGULLY 06 id I r r ccc CIEI re i G cC Cc rri Audio Drum 15 HULLYGULLY 07 RISHWALTZ 01 RISHWALTZ 02 RISHWALTZ 03 ATINROCK 01 ATINROCK 02 ATINROCK 08 ATINROCK 04 IMBO 01 4 5 6 8 33 35 37 1 44 46 48 53 55 57 _ O NO NO NO NO eo eek eek NINININ NO N B NIN co G G I CO O e B o B h 9 AIRISIBRICI COC G N O 0 I
36. 17 Arranger Conductor buttons 17 Selecting voices 18 Selecting the Style 21 Play CONO esa nanena 22 ITU C E E 24 POVOT EE 25 Enable Number File 32 Wave SYNC c 33 MIDI 34 37 MaS OT ES 39 Main VIewW ciistcceceactiedctcsdndeccaceacsweccuieaneeves 40 Autoswitch Time eee 41 Main View description 42 MIDI Player MAIN VIEW 44 WAVE Player MAIN VIEW 45 MP3 SFX Player MAIN VIEW 46 DJ LOOP Player MAIN VIEW 47 A aaa ceeds ites Pr ocecteeeases 48 POG c 48 T 60 Play US P nt 64 65 Double 66 Style VIEW ae 67 Audio Style Modeling 69 The Audio Style Modeling sections 72 User Audio Drum ern 75 User Live Guitar iiie erba eiee RE es 76 Edit Pattern NE NIE RP RT 77 ecd 81 Style Mode 82 GIVLPSEE exire erue 89 Z KETRON AUDYA emma dUsG UR E EUN RNC 92 Drum
37. AUDYA Edit Pattern Velocity The Velocity feature allows one to modify dynamic values of events recorded within selected tracks This function is applicable to all tracks if the Global parameter is set to ON or on single notes when the Global parameter is set to OFF The user can select the desired NOTE by highlighting the related display box using the data arrow buttons and either by pressing the corresponding notes on the keybed or using the Dial selection Figure 169 Copy The Copy feature can be used for a single part e g Chord 2 or an entire arrangement Arranger B Figure 170 v Selected the Arrangement to Copy from by pressing the F2 button then using the dedicated Arranger buttons A B C D Ending v Selected the Arrangement to Replace Copy to by pressing the F7 button and changing with the Data Value wheel v Use the navigation arrows to select either the whole Arrangement part Global or a single part of the selected Arrangement you want to Copy from the displayed column v Press EXECUTE to actually copy the selected part Clear This feature allows to one to Clear events such s Note s Dynamic Controllers and other parameter of the selected track Press and hold down CLEAR F10 to browse this menu and select the desired part to Clear To delete a single note press and hold down CLEAR F10 and the related note on the keybed you wish to delete This note will be deleted from the entire
38. F9 RATE Chorus rate values 0 63 112 KETRON AUDYA Ls 55 uw ey uer Cho Fangor ee Pena NETT W vtr 1 Lar a i Hi ET EE BETTE im l Cim 1 HE we i ad me ios Li LI m r p i Wd Eml Figure 288 After you set the parameters you can to store the custom Chorus by pressing the USER 5 button SAVE or the SAVE button on the front panel A brief SAVE DATA TO DISK message will appear By pressing the CURSOR buttons together you set the value to 0 ECHO DELAY By pressing the F3 button on the DSP page you can access the ECHO DELAY screen as shown in Figure 289 Here you can make the selection of the ECHO DELAY type to set into the DSP in order to make it available for PROGRAMS from which you can choose an ECHO algorithm Figure 290 10 Echo Presets are available in the first page and 10 in the second by pressing any CURSOR button or the DATA VALUE wheel Press any F1 F10 button to select the corresponding Echo type Mono Echo1 Mono Echo5 Stereo Stereo Echo5 Triple Echo1 Triple Echo5 Stereo User and Stereo User2 Triple User1 and Triple User2 When you activate an Echo Preset you can set the option Lock On Off as for the previous Reverb and Chorus effects and the option Tap Enable Disable Figure 291 The Tap Enable Disable option allows to activate the
39. Figure 333 5 Pressing the USER 5 10 ENTER you are automatically into the WAVE PLAYER 6 Select the wave you want to overwrite not playing it back 7 Press the PAUSE button and then the START button 8 Now pressing the USER 5 10 Start Rec the overdubbing of the previously selected Wave will begin 9 To stop recording and make the mix of the two tracks just press the STOP button MIDI RECORDING e Press MENU and the F9 button MIDI RECORDING in the MENU screen The recording MIDI page will open By using the F1 F10 buttons you can set the following MIDI recording modes F1 keyboard sets the recording mode from the keyboard F2 MIDI PORT IN GM sets the MIDI data 128 KETRON AUDYA CR AN Lir m LEG Figure 335 recording mode from the MIDI IN port Recording a MIDI file using the keyboard 10 Press the MENU button and the F9 button MIDI RECORDING to enter the MIDI recording environment 11 You will be prompted to give a name to the file Digit the name for the MIDI file directly from the keyboard Figure 334 In the example the file is MIDI 01 12 Press the USER 5 button ENTER 13 Press the F1 button KEYBOARD to set the recording mode from keyboard 14 Press the USER 5 button START REC or the ENTER button to start the MIDI recording 15 Play the keyboard and or start the Arranger 16 Press the USER 4 button STOP REC to stop recording 17 Afile in the MID
40. NONE no effect CHORUS Chorus effect CHO Echo effect CHO CHO Echo Chorus effect DIST Distortion effect DIST CHO Distortion Echo effect DIST ECHO CHO Distortion Echo Chorus effect e F4 F9 EFF TYPE for each assigned effect you can set the effect type Figure 100 E g for the CHORUS effect type you can choose Chorus1 Chorus2 Chorus3 Chorus6 remolo1 Tremolo2 Tremolos haser1 Phaser2 Phaser3 langer1 Flanger2 Flanger3 User Cho1 User Cho2 User Cho5 Program SEM LEN S Ee M TI TER De gi E pr ANT oer i m ile ciai T xu tena d ET DIT MO rire ponen DETATCMIA oM T Sais nite cat a Tam i a deri Oen Lows f Li Figure 100 By pressing the CURSOR lt 4 Ww buttons together you set the default effect If you select the DIST Distortion effect for one VOICE you cannot select an effect like CHORUS or ECHO for the remaining VOICES You can select an effect like DIST for the three VOICES or any combination of DIST CHO or DIST ECHO CHO effects KETRON AUDYA 53 Program For the ECHO effect Figure 101 you can choose from the following types Mono Echo1 Mono Echo2 Mono Echo5 tereo Echo1 Stereo Echo2 Stereo Echo5 riple Echo1 Triple Echo2 Triple Echo5 Mono User1 tereo User1 Stereo User2 riple User1 Triple User2 For the DIST effect F
41. 194 kETRON AUDYA 28h F9 29h F10 2ah F11 2bh F12 20 F13 2dh F14 2eh F15 2fh Cursor Up 60h Double 61h Micro 62h Intro End1 63h Intro End2 64h Intro End3 65h Key Start 66h KEy Stop 67h ARRA 68h ARRB 69h ARRC 6ah ARRD 6bh FILL 6ch BREAK 6dh Portamento 6eh Aftertouch 6fh Manual Bass OOh Club1 O1h Studio1 02h Club2 OOh Studio1 01h Studio2 02h Club1 03h Club2 04h Hall 05 Hall2 O6h Theatret 07h Theatre2 08h Stage 09h Stage2 00h 7f h 00h 7f h 38h DJLOOP 3ah MP3 3bh DISK 3ch Registration 3dh Assignable 3eh Finder 3fh Drawbar 70h To Lowest 71h Bassist 72h Pianist 73h Left 74h Drum Mixer 75h Style Mode 76h MP32 78h Start 79h Hold 7ah Record 7obh Pause 7ch Cross Fade 04h Theatre 05h Stage2 06h Church2 O3h Hall Oah Church1 Obh Church2 Och Hangar Odh Galaxy Oeh Space Ofh User Rev1 10h User Rev2 11h User Rev3 12h User Rev4 13h User Rev5 CHORUS Chorus FO 26 7B 01 00 Type F7 Type Chorus Type Right FO 26 7B 11 03 Ch Type F7 Chorus Type left gm FO 26 7B 15 03 Ch Type F7 Ch Type beside MIDI port used will be drive Right or GM Left part Chorus Level FO 26 7B 3b 00 Ch Level F7 Ch Level Chorus Delay FO 26 7B 74 00 Ch Delay F7 Ch Delay Chorus Feed FO 26 7B 75 00 Ch Feed F7 Ch Feed Chorus Rate FO 26 7B 76 00 Ch Rate F7 Ch Rate Chorus Depth FO 26 7B 77 00 Ch Depth F7 Ch Depth ECHO DELAY Echo Delay Type for compatibil
42. 5 oDjDicoO 8 LATIN DANCE OLATNDANCE2 DISCO 3 SD NOCHE MIX SD 9 RUMBA DANCE S PARTY POLKA 1 SCHLAGER OBERWALZ 0 3 7 CO SAMBA 8 GULLY 1 SD Ul Ciloo o lt O m 0 U JJ o O O C m U J 53 54 55 56 57 L O C op m v op U Co NO L O C op m NO ie U g gt JJ x EAE S r DT Q mo x oo co O UJ m gt N DA Oo 4 N FOX_70 Ke C2 op Q O O T gt I gt e D D DIS D S FUP BEAT SD U UJ gt o UO Fun Ho EN O Styles H GULLY 2 SD H GULLY DAN SD 37 E 38 E 39 2 SEMEN 6 BLUES NGHT s SHUFFLE BLUES o ROCKING 01 AIAI HR BRL BR BR RI RY AJD CO OO N gt O KETRON AUDYA 157 Styles AUDYA FACTORY STYLES ed COUNTRY 6 KRAMER BALLAD s ROCKABILY o WALKING FOX 24 BALLAD 12 8 158 KETRON AUDYA 6 GORCHESTRAL SLOW e GFASTBEBOP s oswwG 2a 2 28 29 30 5 3a O 0 11 12 13 4 GUAJIRA R BOLERO 1 BOSSA amp SALSA CUBAN_CHACHA R GMERENGUE 1 R 15 GSAMBA LIGHT 16 ITALBACHATA 17 GSALSA CUBANA R 18 LIVE BOSSA 19 VILLERA SAMBA MOOD CUMBION JLG BACHATA MEDIUM BOSSA REGGAE BAND BAJON DISCO_SAMBA LATIN BALLAD MAMBO HIT
43. As showed on Figure 1 we have select Raindrops Keep Falli mid metronome tempo as 123 BPM 2 Press F9 button to activate REMIX ON feature a 1 pa HIEUFILE gt Figure 49 3 Select your favourite Style with a same more imir niie Keel Fad i CONCERT GRANG or less metronome BPM of midi file previously WEG AREXMIER r Strings select If the BPM tempo will be too different z i Fino between Style and midi file a warning message BICBAND 1 areren rei nd mesmo will inform you to select another style more m Dont nc lar rmt m suitable On Figure 44 we select i e a sea Maz wal SWING 2 style Pisa Ld pase 4 By using STYLE VIEW menu and than F1 button wrr cnck Mech Mendesah ma wi t Magani mmi wzz aaar 2 iode will be possible replace Drum kit with your own Audio Drum As well you can see on Figure 45 we select Audio Drum SWING2 120 120 as 120 Masdere BPM 5 Press USER 5 button START to activate REMIX Feature Figure 44 6 After a while START led button will flash and will be possible play midi file with your new own Audio Raindrol s Ken Fal COMCERT GRAND ENIMS E Gtrings i mpo 114 Tres EIL EET SN Drum track see next Automation paragraph 7 While REMIX playing will be possible select A B C D Variation and also Fill on style as well showed on Figure 46 Moreover
44. Fae MID hepar LU wipe FERDO CHi NT 2 Figure 70 WAVE Player MAIN VIEW From the MAIN VIEW window you can select directly the WAV file on disc B Selecting a WAV file from the MAIN VIEW 1 The default MAIN VIEW window allows the selection of MIDI files For this reason it s necessary to press the WAVE button of the Player The list of the WAV file of the WAVE folder will appear Figure 71 Select a WAV file from the list using the CURSOR A V buttons or the DATA VALUE wheel Our example is Funky Tune wav Press the ENTER button to start playback of the WAV file Press the USER 3 HOME button to activate the MAIN VIEW window as shown by the arrow of Figure 71 The MAIN VIEW window will appear and on the right side the list of WAV files on the disc Figure 72 If the WAV file contains lyric the LYRIC window will appear in place of the list as illustrated in Figure 73 The USER buttons from 1 to 4 in the MAIN VIEW window will have the following functions USER 1 PAUSE CONTINUE USER 2 STOP USER 3 LEAD ON OFF melody mute USER 4 EXIT exit from the Lyric or MAIN VIEW window By pressing the F3 button or F4 a second time while the WAV file with lyric is playing back or paused the MAIN VIEW window is divided into two sections Figure 74 the section LYRIC on the right side the list of the WAV files on the disc on the left side In this way while th
45. IN 1 or 2 port for the General MIDI data reception e F6 USB MIDI OUT enables the MIDI transmission from USB port e F7 GM2 MODE enables the General MIDI 2 mode e F8 GLOBAL GM TX enables the General MIDI transmission e F9 MIDI IN SEND TO enables the data transmission from MIDI IN port to MIDI out 1 or 2 port USB MIDI OUT When you can activate the USB MIDI OUT mode from the UTILITY page if the keyboard is connected to the USB port of a computer it will be recognized as USB SPEAKERS driver for the MIDI data transmission from and to the computer When the keyboard is connected via USB to a computer the green LED of the USB EXIT button will light e he keyboard can be used as external control unit and as sound module for MIDI applications such as Cubase Sonar Reaper and so on for example e Once the MIDI application is open you can select the MIDI In port and the MIDI Out port recognized as USB SPEAKERS e n Figure 277 the arrow indicates the MIDI IN and MIDI OUT ports in a Cubase track e Once the MIDI communication via USB is open you will be able to record MIDI tracks e The material that you record via MIDI into a track of the sequencer can be output directly by using the Audya sound module SLOW BALLAD 6 amp 3 CONCERT GRAND end Stringsl PIAMO Page 1 Saft Thrur uss Midi ce Midi Clock In Mode Ott Midi Clock Out lab Kevb TX On Local On mias In G
46. LOAD MODE loading behaviour of the right voice into the Registration when a style is playing Values Mode1 and Modet1 the right voice is changed immediately by loading the registration Mode2 the right voice is changed by the effective change of the Registration that is at the beginning of the next measure F6 Dry On Stop When the style is stopped enable this option to disable effects on MICRO F7 Voice Select Mode Set this option to mode1 in order to allow the selection of various sounds without changing the sound on the Right This will be changed only by selecting another sound Set to mode for ordinary selection F8 Half Screen Mode This feature will show the player in the Main View with the file list on the left and the lyrics on the right F9 Juke Box When the file is played back this feature allows to select a file to start automatically when the first file ends Press Go To Next to switch immediately to the next file F10 Midi SysExc Mode The function saves MIDI parameters as MIDI events and not as SYS EXC data By pressing the ENTER button you can preload the MIDI file while by using the START button you can start the file without loosing any changes stored in the buffer In GM Part after you finished the changes simply press the USER 5 10 button to update the changes m Page4 F1 Filter Regis VOICETR setting are filtered on Registration whne recalled F2 Block Reg Autostart Is enabled S
47. MAZURKA 3 SD R 5 sa 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 1 sa 63 64 os 87 The symbol before the name of the STYLE means that the style has AUDIO DRUM GROOVES or LIVE GUITAR parts Drum Set Standard 1 Program Change 1 Drum Set 14 SnareOOl 62 Conga Slap 15 RollOl 63 Conga Hi 16 RollO2 64 Conga Low 17 SnareO002 65 Timbales Hi 18 Snare003 66 Timbales Lo 19 Snare004 67 Agogo Hi 20 Snare005 68 Agogo Low 21 Snare006 69 Cabasa 22 Tom 70 MaracasOl 23 Tom Flam02 71 WhistleOl 24 CrashO0l 72 WhistleO2 25 Snare007 73 GuiroOl 26 Fingsnap OI 74 Guiro02 27 Slap 75 ClavesOl 28 Snare008 76 W Block Hi 29 Scratch Up 77 W Block Lo 30 Scratch Down 78 Cuica0l 31 Sticks 01 79 Cuica02 32 Click 80 TriangleOl 33 MetronomeOl 8 TriangleO2 34 MetronomeO2 82 ShakerOl 35 Kickl6 83 ShakerO2 36 KickO7 84 SticksO2 37 RimshotO5 85 Castagnet 38 Snare094 86 TambourineO3 26 Fingsnap OI 74 Guiro02 27 Slap 75 ClavesOl 28 Snare008 76 W Block Hi 29 Scratch Up 77 W Block Lo 30 Scratch Down 78 Cuica0l 31 SticksOl 79 Cuica02 Click TriangleOl MetronomeO TriangleO2 MetronomeO02 ShakerOl Kick03 Shaker02 KickOl Sticks02 Rimshot03 Castagnet Snare031 TambourineO Clap01 Rimshot04
48. N aA Aajziriolioiolio CIR 5 o O ench_Horn rass1 ynbrass1 ynbrass2 UJ Co CD 64 33 60 64 20 Positive i O1 01 01 01 O1 O1 O1 BR I 3 3 3 2 S I1 RTA NI O 01 AIIN O CO Oo H O CO1 B CO IO O cH rancaise ango ountry amp Slide O T W SIE oi3 2 3 ass amp Guit2 recision ynbass3 N 20 38 CD 38 N VOICE 65 O N CO CO CO CO CO OO CO co Oo OCO OCO CO NIN ITNININ Rb Rb 5 5 N A NIO 01 nglish_Horn NS Clarinet Piccolo Classic Flute Recorder Pan Flute Bottle Shakuashi Whistle Ocarina Square Sawtooth Calliope AJO CO NO 3 Sinesweep V UJ m gt zo A Og X o OIO ET 17 O o o oo TUNE F F co m Lead1 Fantasy Warmpad score Space ftpad z D et m e elude weep CD lt N VOICE 39 CD ynbass4 ynbass5 trings2 iolas trings2 ctastring trings1 arcato rings3 ow_Strings rings2 ynstrings3 NIN ITN INI NIN N O O O OG OG OD N CD CD Choir Aah1 Choir Aah2 O rev rm 2 ocal olden Sounds N VOICE 97 lce Rain oundtrack O O gJoloiaioiui ioliole Oo S 5 8 lt o 50 S S V
49. Piano featuring an outstanding natural resonance There are an additional 64 MB RAM for custom sounds that can be quickly loaded in memory from disk while playing Audya also has a brand new DSP section with Rotor Distortion Phaser Flanger CR SSFADE REGISTRATION ELA PLAY LIST Tremolo Chorus Reverb effects and more Audio Style Modeling For the first time ever an arranger keyboard features real audio grooves of drums percussions basses guitars arpeggios and licks all synchronized to MIDI clock A rich audio recordings library played by famous drummers and musicians have been added to the project and the live performances of the musicians have been recorded to match the styles and MIDI file playback with no distortion nor loss of quality Moreover also the live guitar grooves are synchronized perfectly to styles and MIDI files with no pitch shifting when the tempo is changed Player The professional player can play up to five tracks simultaneously that is two WAVE files two MP3 files and one MIDI file with pre listen feature on headphones play list and crossfade functions KETRON AUDYA 5 B Karaoke A wide range of lyric options to display the text within MIDI files or synchronized to effects set to automatically follow the audio files are available Arranger or the MIDI file playback B MACRO RECORDING m User interface Global recording of the performance s events The top panel is designed to
50. Praami Harms Fee ToT Fam TM iras ted x Ar Es M Ban o Inna Lee Mu Figure 58 Lu TORT STARTLE lar cp ten pm uj Demum MN Figure 59 Autoswitch Time Strictly pertaining to the new MAIN VIEW interface the AUTOSWITCH TIME function allows to set the switching time up to 60 seconds before the MAIN VIEW switches from other environments For example after you choose a style or an instrument the display switch automatically to the MAIN VIEW after the AUTOSWITCH TIME set by this parameter B Setting the AUTOSWITCH TIME 1 Press the MENU button on the front panel to open the MENU screen 2 Press the F4 button corresponding to KEYBOARD CONTROL Press the F10 button corresponding to UTILITY Press the USER 5 button NEXT PAGE 5 Press the F7 button to select AUTOSWITCH TIME sec as shown in Figure 60 6 Now you can ulf the DATA VALUE wheel or the CURSOR gt buttons to set the value in seconds from 1 to 60 seconds as shown in Figure 61 7 Please set a time value between 3 and 5 seconds even if you can set a higher value 8 Press the EXIT button to go to the previous window of the MENU 9 Press the MENU button to exit the MENU environment If you set the AUTOSWITCH TIME sec to OFF the AUTOSWITCH function will be switched off In this case if you want to return to the MAIN VIEW from other screens you must press manually the EXIT button on the front panel R Mai
51. Snare021 Snare009 0 Snare010 Stick15 Snare015 Tom02 MiddleO CloseOl Stick01 Tom03 Close02 OpenO02 Tom04 Reverse Tom05 Applause Crash02 Belltree Tom06 RideO03 Crash03 RidebellO1 TambourineOl Crash04 Cowbell0O1 Crash05 Vibraslap 59 RideOl 107 Empty 60 Bongo_Hi 108 Empty 61 Bongo_Low 109 Empty 39 Clap03 87 Rimshot02 40 Snare097 88 SnareOll 41 Tomol 89 SnareOl2 42 Stick12 90 SnareO013 43 Tom02 9 MiddleO 44 Close0l 92 Stick02 45 Tom03 93 Close02 46 Open04 94 OpenO2 47 Tom04 95 Reverse 48 Tom05 96 Applause 49 Crash02 97 Belltree 50 Tom06 98 Empty 5 RideOl 99 Empty 52 Crash03 100 Empty 53 RidebellO 101 Empty 54 TambourineO 102 Empty 55 Crash04 103 Empty 56 Cowbell0l 104 Empty 57 Crash05 105 Empty 58 Vibraslap 106 Empty 59 RideO2 107 Empty 60 Bongo Hi 108 Empty 61 Bongo Low 109 Empty Standard 2 Program Change 2 14 SnareO01 62 Conga Slap 15 RollOl 63 Conga Hi 16 Roll02 64 Conga Low 17 SnareO002 65 Timbales Hi 18 Snare003 66 Timbales Lo 19 Snare004 67 Agogo_Hi 20 Snare005 68 Agogo Low 21 Snare006 69 Cabasa 22 Tom FlamOl 70 MaracasOl 23 Tom Flam02 71 WhistleOl 24 CrashO0l 72 WhistleO2 25 Snare007 73 GuiroOl Room Gm2 Program Change 3 14 Empty 62 Conga Slap 15 Empty 63 Conga Hi 16 Empty
52. This file will be saved into the UserVoice List folder of Audya PRESET GELESTION Page Figure 255 EMEN M B How to assign a User Voice List to Style Midifile Wave Mp3 STYLE Select the Style Press Voice List tab and then select the Voice group EFFECT SFX GOW FALL AD E GRAND PLANO Press Save Related to the F3 button the display will show SAVE UVL to STYLE Pressing again F3 will save the User Voice List on folder USER_VOICE_LIST STYLE If no other name has been written for the User Voice List this will be saved with the same name of Style Any time this Style is recalled Audya will load automatically also it s correspondent User Voice List Wim Figure 256 _sactoRy erante Figure 256 102 KETRON AUDYA MID WAV and MP3 The same concept of the Style is applied to Mid Wav and Mp3 Once file is selected press SAVE On F3 button the display will show SAVE UVL to MIDI or SAVE UVL to WAVE or SAVE UVL to MP3 By pressing F3 the current User Voice List will be saved on the correspondent User Voice List folders USER VOICE LISTMIDI or USER VOICE LISTWAVE or USER VOICE LISTWMP3 When the User Voice List is saved with same name of the files then it will automatically loaded Figure 257 When SAVE button is pressed of F3 must be dis played the file reference information If not pls verify if DISK REGISTRATION PLAYLIST or SFX leds are off at least a Style Midi Wave or Mp3 mus
53. WHA ADSR ADSR 1 CUTOFF ATI 55 GRAM Lert Recreation s nam wo favor ces trum a voten i CNESNNEL TX MD CASAL TX wit Cj hw e a nn Barr HDI FILTER TI rte m Gh LE Fi bati Cec LO LL zi s gn rE Figure 265 Sl OW FAT AN ua MEDI FILTER m Fi E Diu pari ritceh PI a Lal EN 85 CHOED LOWEB r1 AN NETT wr ee Blasio Figure 267 TRANPOSE TX From the first screen of the MIDI menu by pressing the F3 button a window will appear where to set the MIDI transmission of the parts transposition By using the F1 F10 buttons or the CURSOR A V buttons you can select the parts to transpose via MIDI transmission as shown in Figure 268 By using the CURSOR lt 4 gt buttons or the DATA VALUE wheel you can assign 36 semitones transposition value in 1 semitone steps By pressing the CURSOR gt together you set the default value that is no transposition F1 Right F2 Left F3 Bass F4 Lower1 F5 Lower2 F6 Chord1 F7 Chord2 F8 Chord3 F9 Chord4 F10 Chord5 CHANNEL RX same procedure of CHANNEL TX By pressing the F6 button you can access the window where to set the MIDI reception channels for each part Figure 269 Press the F1 button 10 or the CURSOR A W buttons to select
54. allow to access the following parameters PedToRatar rw Uno Figure 239 Figure 238 F1 PERCUSS ON OFF enables disables the organ percussion SLOW BALLAD 63 ORGANI F2 HARMON 2nd 3rd adds even odd MN harmonics to the percussion F3 DECAY decay of the percussion 0 7 PERCUSS _ON IE N F4 VOLUME volume of the percussion HARMON 24 JE 0 63 DECAY 7 JE F5 CLICK click volume 0 63 m a E F6 SUSTAIN Sustain amount 0 16 F7 BS BOOST bass boost 0 63 cek 0 F8 REVERB Reverb amount 0 63 PRESET SELECHON Paas Do split c3 Octave 35 CHORD LOW F9 CHORUS Chorus amount 0 63 Sa 10 Distortion amount 0 to 63 Figure 239 2 Set the DRAWBARS values by moving the 9 SLOW BALLAD 63 ORGANI sliders of the MIXER section independently E Figure D 40 Tempo 76 Transp PIA MO Page 1 3 Press the USER 5 button SAVE to store PERCUSS i the organ DRAWBARS setting The store Harmon 3rd PEE position is the same of the current organ ab DECAY 6 VOLUME 63 CLICK 53 PRESET SELECTION Page 1 Split c3 ENE DRUM BASS CHORD LOWER EE PedToRotor pec Figure 240 In DRAWBARS mode if you press the USER 1 button PedToRotor you can activate the rotor by using the pedal connected to SUSTAIN PEDAL on the rear panel The PedToRotor ON OFF parameter is not stored into the user DRAWBARS so it must be activated
55. once user will enable this function should be saved on Custom Startup in order to get this function on Audya start up The Disable option makes RAM available for other Ins sounds reserved for LiveGuitar when these cannot be loaded into memory User Live Guitar will be loaded simply after select your own file Figure 165 and than press Load GTR or Enter Up to 4 User Live Guitar can be loaded at the same time Once loading procedure will be completed user should be enable User Live Guitar to play set by press F10 button GTR Enable Figure 166 In order to Clear empty User Live Guitar memory user could use Clear All F6 button If user would clear one by one or choose GTR should be use a related button F1 F2 F3 F4 Once User Live Guitar will be completed user can add this feature over any selected style Exit from Disk menu and select User Style to select your own style So now press View button Figure 167 As well other section works user can choose several banks on Ch 5 By press F 10 button user could be choose guitar from User Live Guitar or Ins Live Guitar bank until display will show Live Ins as showed on Figure From this menu User can edit all other style part freely and save it as usual So now with this feature when user will select your own User Live Guitar Audya will load automatically related sample if not present 76 KETRON AUDYA BALLAD ME CONCERT GRAND EL Litt
56. press the F3 button or F4 again 46 KETRON AUDYA EET 145 n HUE wi Em dpa Pree Bap ae igo THEM T fied as aa Call fas Tem Leer oua ced HS Log Form Tn Dx aw xs rapi Figure 75 y LiB Fig ps i ee Fusion Funk STAGE Pape s Amr MY RHHSTRATIOM 4i sur ed Tme we Em Hami i Tae kie EH Tm ie Mp imn GT PR re ges curan Gia Hel I 1 CA ul i Bum Che bee nm TED 3T Fri Figure 77 Fusion Funk STAGE 73 ep wx Tram Dom bira ej red ema amm et Ce r3 jh Fusi n Funk STAGE T3 pmr are une a Eee Gr OF E rint are lit Lee PE T LPT Lie amm TAFTE NME l fie p duri Emi ME rur gm go ud oe Cita is cuim Figure 79 DJ LOOP Player MAIN VIEW From the MAIN VIEW window you can select directly the DJ LOOP files on disc B Selecting a DJ LOOP from MAIN VIEW 1 The default MAIN VIEW window allows the selection of MIDI files For this reason it s necessary to press the DJ LOOP button of the Player A list of DJ LOOP of the folder DJ LOOP will appear Figure 80 Select a DJ
57. qt c3 ett ar EX Ek ER us DCUM HORD LWEN EL 34 Figure 155 STYLE MODELING BARREL HONKY ARRANA JArut Goris Tame ro Tre Pegs ME Liner air Prim Pani 3 LOUNGE _ D0 a aL 188 2 3 Dire TES Fk CTESEM Pic 1 E BHATIA aw CNTRYBEAT Q2 E ia Faves Fork T Dar Fro 4U i a iz 28 E s tec Finn w 24 DE HT VLL C3 ner nF ES ES ES EL PES DE EN LLTEE Figure 156 e The loops are automatically synchronized with the MIDI of the Style e Itis possible to associate a different Wave for each otyle section such as ABCD Fill In Break Intro and Ending See the enclosed documentation for User Audio Drums for further details e Together with the 3 0A is supplied a Demo folder with 4 complete User Audio Drums styles Drum1 Drum Set type selection IMPORTANT e On internal Audio Drum and on User Audio Drums the template scroll may be done only at Style Stop condition e Internal Audio Drum and User Audio Drums are auto excluding same as Drum Bank and original MIDI Drum of the Style F2 with F2 similar to F1 are accessed 3 different Drum ambients Groove Bank Up to 240 Drum Percussion Library with Acoustic and Electric Loops Latin Dance Pop Folk etc Groove compatibility set up section for Drum Loops of old Style Libraries SD1 SD 5 Midjay Drum2
58. value 0 1 10 11 Program Change 1 128 B PROGRAM VOICE Control Change 00 value 9 for old compatibility 20 21 22 Program Change 1 128 B PRESET VOICE Control Change 00 value 30 31 32 33 Program Change 00 B DRAWBARS Control Change 00 value 5 Program Change 1 128 B INSTRUMENTS Control Change 00 value 3 6 Program Change 1 128 B VOICE LIST Control Change 00 value 8 35 36 Program Change 1 128 B GROOVE Control Change 00 value 4 Program Change 1 128 KETRON AUDYA 185 MIDI Implementation Vocalizer Non Registered Parameter Numbers Note All NRPN messages are to be sent through harmony or lead MIDI channels HC or LC B System NRPN NRPN Data MSB Default Parameter MSB LSB value Main volumes mnodesandswitthes volumes modes and switches 1 127 Main voumes modes and NK volume affects the whole system output Vocalizer mode 0 MIDI Mode 5 harmony voices driven by MIDI messages sent through the harmony channel 1 Auto Chord Mode no note on off decoded whatever the midi channel is The vocalizer detects the note sung into the microphone and computes the notes up to 5 to be synthesized automatically according to a harmony table This table indicates the transposition amount of each virtual voice in semitones depending on the detected note 96 preset tables are available and can be simply called by NRPN 96 18 See this NRPN for the list of the presets
59. 00h 10h Shift 10h 70h No Shift 40h KETRON AUDYA 197 LEFT LEVEL FO 26 7B 1c 00 Level F7 Level OOh 7fh MIDIFILE LEVEL FO 26 7B 1d 00 Level F7 Level OOh 7fh GENERAL MIDI VOLUME FO 26 7B 38 00 Level F7 Level OOh 7fh DRAWBAR VOLUMES FO 26 7B 40 00 Drawbar vol F7 Drawbar 40h 48h Drawbar 49h percussion Drawbar 4ah click MICRO Micro Preset FO 26 7B 00 03 Mic Preset F7 Mic Preset Micro1 Level FO 26 7B 01 03 Level F7 Level OOh 7fh Micro1 Pan FO 26 7B 02 03 Pan F7 Pan OOh Left 7fh Right Micro1 Effect Send FO 26 7B 03 O3 Level F7 Level OOh 7fh Micro2 Level FO 26 7B 04 O3 Level F7 Level OOh 7fh Micro2 Pan FO 26 7B 05 03 Pan F7 Pan OOh Left 7fh Right Micro2 Effect Send FO 26 7B 06 O3 Level F7 Level OOh 7fh Micro1 2 rev Type FO 26 7B 07 03 Rev Type F7 Rev Type Micro1 2 echo type FO 26 7B 08 03 Ech Type F7 Ech Type 198 KETRON AUDYA vol OOh 7fh 00h Dry 01h Reverb Small 02h Reverb Medium O3h Reverb Large 04h Reverb Gated 05h Boost O6h Echo Reverb 07h Echo Reverb Tap 08 Correction O9h Bear 40h No Pan 40h No Pan Off 01h Short Room 02h Room 03h Small Hall 04h Large Hall 05h Short Plate O6h Vocal Plate OOh Off 01h Mono 02h Stereo 03h Mono 3 4 Oah Girl Obh Baby Och Vibrato Odh Phone Oeh Angel Of h MICROO1 10h MICROO2 11h MICROOS3 12h MICROO4 13h MICROO5 07h Church 08h Cathedral 09h Gated Rever
60. 04 7 01 BACHATA 02 BACHATA 03 BALLAD BALLAD 02 IIo UJ rm gt U O R UJ gt m m Z gt NO L ee NO 8 9 Q Co e O Co Coll Coe Reon Took Reed Keck Reon Reon CO CO ee ee 9 O COINI D O R O P O Co U UJ UJ UJ UJ o oloo 69 69 69 C2 amp NO RO O Co O0 O UJ s NO NO co NO co CO o PO PO o 1 BALLAD 03 BALLENATO 01 91 BALLENATO 03 6 BEGUINE 03 97 BEGUINE 04 98 BEGUINE 05 EGUINE 06 GUINE 07 INE 09 ND 01 NO O QU Q c z m 5 5 5 45 5 55 5 55 5 55 1 5 65 60 OIUININININJ amp 5 65 1 Slole Q N UJ m Q c Z m Oo N UINE UINE UINE 99 BEGUINE 06 00 BEGUINE UINE ES 01 ES 02 ES 03 UJ ITI Q c Z m o Co 0 02 BEGUINE O9 Co BIGB UJ Q UJ gt Z U O X E E G A UES Ww O ZU O z JJ UJ sls C I Ojo D BOLERO_02 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 UJ O Q QO N O 1 BOSSA 06 22 3 BOSSA 08 CALYPSO 02 CH
61. 142 KETRON AUDYA za LEET FALE ALI Lik ul e Le 2 n wide 4 BM oF i LIST Ei npe Eee NM Di PTZTEM o EHR aure pee Figure 384 ud Coe a MET ENT CIE Di 751 ay DEL FOLDER oer I HEP WT ao 1 t UN wg Hi aun T EAE h KER EDE ria per MEHA A P i IP CT AT i Mi um FII T zr D EALTTT dh piepje D Css Poner X E Oo EU Pets sonum he E EL E I LiT Figure 386 11 cory 15 mw rip a rm cert ENEFA rep ad ake Iz ra DN H Imc Liz WM LEY 1 Fun rel Figure 387 B Disk format 1 To format the disk press F10 A pop up will appear where you can choose whether to go on with formatting USER KEY 5 0 or cancel the operation USER KEY 4 9 Please remember that formatting will erase all data on disk USB drive Search USB drive In addition to the internal disk you can also BALLAD 6 CONCERT GRAND manage external drive such as pen drives hard BALLAD irene Eene ond disks CD players etc connected to any of the Tempo 100 Transp PIANO Page 1 two USB connectors on the front
62. 26H 7CH Code tab Status F7H Code tab 00H 7FH Tab code see list Status 7FH Tab pressed Status OOH Tab released Code tab list Not Used OOh Piano 10h Drawbar 01h ElPiano 11h Drumset 02h Chrom 12h 05 Organ 13h Voicetron 04h Accordion 14h 05h Guitar 15h RamSound O6h Bass 16h 07h String 17h 08 Choir 18h Program 09 Brass 19h GM Voice Oah Sax 1ah Obh Flute 1bh Ballroom Och Pad 1ch Fade Odh Synth 1dh Intro End1 Oeh Ethnic 1eh Intro End2 Ofh Effect 1fh Intro End3 40h Bass to lowest 41h Manual Bass 46h 48h Portamento 49h Harmony 4ah Pause Count Restart 4bh Tempo 4ch Tempo 4dh Start Stop 4eh TABS Audya 50h Key Start 51h Key Stop 52h 53h 2nd Voice 59h Transpose 5ah Transpose 5bh Rotor On Off 5 5dh Split 5eh Aftertouch 5fh Exit 22h Drum Mixer 23h Rewind 2ch Arr A 2dh Arr B 2eh Arr C 2fh Arr D 60h Number 0 Unplugged 61h Number 1 Pop 62h Number 2 Dance 63h Number 3 Ballad 64h Number 4 Swing 65h Number 5 Folk 66h Number 6 Country 67h Number 7 R amp Roll 68h Number 8 Latin 69h Number 9 Ballroom 6ah Save 6bh Value 6ch Value 6dh Page 6eh Page 6fh Hold FO 26H 7CH 03H Code tab Status Code tab 00H 7FH Tab code see list Status 7FH Tab pressed Status OOH Tab released Code tab list Not Used 00h Piano 1
63. 332 KETRON AUDYA 127 Avoiding the MIDI file recording mixed to the source When you make a MIDI SYNC RECORDING by selecting a Main or Keyboard source also the MIDI file playing will be recorded into the audio file To avoid this you can follow two procedures Manual procedure 1 Select MENU gt Out Assign gt Out1 amp 2 and set MIDI1 to 1 amp 2 stereo 2 While recording the keyboard will be output to MAIN OUT and will be recorded The MIDI will be present on 1 and 2 outputs without being recorded Automatic procedure 3 Select MENU gt Keyboard Control gt Utility and set the Headph to out3 amp 4 item to ON 4 Now making the recording the MIDI will be output automatically to the headphones and will not be recorded on the audio track 5 Remember that when the Headph to out3 amp 4 item is set to ON also WAV MP3 will be present on the headphones that is all the sources set to out 3 amp 4 You can control the output volume by the PFL slider Overdubbing a WAV file 1 Press the MENU button and the F8 button AUDIO RECORDING to enter the audio recording environment 2 Select F5 SELECT SOURCE and choose the desired source Microphone or Keyboard and press EXIT Note that when you select Keyboard the Wave output is routed to 3 and 4 3 Press F6 WAVE RECORDING Press ENTER and type you own audio file name by using letters and or number i e MIX 4 Press F4 MIXDOWN to set the record dubbing
64. 36 Kickl3 84 SticksO2 37 RimshotO06 85 Castagnet 38 Snare023 86 TambourineOl 39 Snare024 87 RimshotO05 40 Snare025 88 Snare026 41 Toml3 89 Snare027 42 Stick02 90 Snare043 43 4 9 Close06 44 Close0l 92 Stick02 45 Toml5 93 Close02 46 Openol 94 OpenO2 47 Toml6 95 Reverse 7 Applause Crash02 Belltree Toml8 Empty Ride03 Empty Crash03 Empty RidebellO1 Empty TambourineO Empty Crash04 Empty CowbellO1 Empty 57 Crash05 105 Empty 58 Vibraslap 106 Empty 59 Ride04 107 Empty 60 Bongo Hi 108 Empty 61 Bongo Low 109 Empty 39 ClapOl 87 Rimshot04 40 SnareOll 88 Snare022 41 0 89 Snare009 42 StickO2 90 Snare010 43 Tom0O2 91 MiddleO4 44 Close0l 92 StickO2 45 Tom03 93 Close02 46 OpenO2 94 OpenOl 168 KETRON AUDYA Brush Gm2 Program Change 42 14 Empty 62 Conga Slap 15 Empty 63 Conga_Hi 16 Empty 64 Conga_Low 17 Empty 65 Timbales Hi 18 Empty 66 Timbales Lo 19 Empty 67 Agogo_Hi 20 Empty 68 Agogo Low 21 Empty 69 Cabasa 22 Empty 70 MaracasOl 23 Empty 71 WhistleO 24 Empty 72 WhistleO2 25 Empty 73 GuiroOl 26 Empty 74 Guiro02 27 Fingsnap 75 ClavesOl 28 Slap 76 W Block Hi 29 Scratch Up 77 W Block Lo 30 Scratch Down 78 Cuica0l 3 SticksOl 79 Cuica02 32 Click 80 TriangleO 33 MetronomeO0 8 TriangleO
65. 65 Timbales Hi 18 Snare003 66 Timbales Lo 19 Snare004 67 Agogo HI 20 Snare005 68 Agogo Low 21 Snare006 69 Cabasa 22 Tom 70 MaracasOl 23 Tom Flam02 71 WhistleOl 24 CrashO0l 72 Whistle02 25 Snare007 73 GuiroOl 26 Fingsnap OI 74 Guiro02 27 Slap 75 ClavesOl 28 Snare008 76 W Block Hi 29 Scratch Up 77 W Block Lo 30 Scratch Down 78 Cuica0l 3 SticksOl 79 Cuica02 32 Click 80 TriangleOl 33 MetronomeO 8 TriangleO2 34 MetronomeO2 82 ShakerOl 35 KicklO 83 ShakerO2 36 84 SticksO2 37 Rimshot09 85 Castagnet 38 SnareO21 86 TambourineOl 55 Crash04 103 Empty 56 CowbellO 1 104 Empty 57 Crash05 105 Empty 58 Vibraslap 106 Empty 59 RideO2 107 Empty 60 Bongo Hi 108 Empty 61 Bongo Low 109 Empty Acoustic 2 Program Change 15 14 SnareO001 62 Conga Slap 15 63 Conga Hi 16 Roll02 64 Conga Low 17 Snare002 65 Timbales Hi 18 Snare003 66 Timbales Lo 19 Snare004 67 Agogo_Hi 20 Snare005 68 Agogo Low 21 Snare006 69 Cabasa 22 Tom 70 MaracasOl 23 Tom Flam02 71 Whistle0l 24 CrashOl 72 Whistle02 25 Snare007 73 GuiroOl 26 Fingsnap 01 74 Guiro02 27 Slap 75 ClavesOl 28 Snare008 76 W Block Hi 29 Scratch Up 77 W Block Lo 30 Scratch Down 78 Cuica0l 31 Sticks0Ol 79 Cuica02 32 Click 80 TriangleOl 33 Metronome 0
66. 7B 0a 03 Status F7 Status gt 1 On Status O0 off Wave Equalizer type FO 26 7B Ob 03 Type F7 Type 00h 04h Wave Equalizer active disactive FO 26 7B Oc 03 Status F7 Status gt 1 On Status 0 off LEAD MUTE FO 26 7B Od 03 Status F7 Status gt 1 On Status 0 off SONG NUMBER FO 26 7B OB 00 Numc Numd F7 KEYB ONLY TRANSPOSER FO 26 7B 19 03 Val F7 Val 0 Val 0 200 KETRON AUDYA Numc 0 9 Numd 0 99 Es song number 1 Numc 0 Numd 1 Es song number 50 Numc 0 Numd 50 Es song number 120 Numc 1 Numd 20 Es song number 9999 Numc 99 Numd 99 keyb only transp off keyb only transp on Odh User 4 Oeh User 5 Ofh User 6 10h User 7 11h User 8 12h User 9 13h MidiMode max Technical data KEYBOARD DISPLAY HARD DISK HD Recording MSP USB MASS STORAGE DEVICES SOUND GENERATION POLYPHONY VOICE LIST ORGAN DRAWBARS PROGRAMS RAM INS PROFESSIONAL MULTIPLAYER MIDIFILE PLAYER Specifications Audya 76 semi weighed buttons 8 dynamic curves Pitch modulation aftertouch and portamento controls Operating system updatable via USB port 17 volume slider controls with 1 assignable 10 assignable user tab functions Audya 5 61 semi weighed keys 8 dynamic curves Pitch amp Modulation Joystick Aftertouch Portamento 17 Volume slider controls 1 assignable Operating system updatable via USB port 10 display User Tab Audya 4 Professional Arranger and Midi Sound mo
67. 8 TriangleO2 34 Metronome 02 82 ShakerOl 35 KickO8 83 Shaker02 36 Kick09 84 SticksO2 37 Rimshot05 85 Castagnet 38 Snare019 86 TambourineOl 39 ClapOl 87 Rimshot02 40 Snare020 88 SnareOll 4 0 89 SnareO0l2 42 Stick04 90 SnareO013 43 Tom02 9 MiddleOl 44 Close02 92 Stick04 45 Tom03 93 Close02 46 Open02 94 OpenO2 47 Tom04 95 Reverse Tom05 Applause Crash02 Belltree Tom06 Empty RideOl Empty Crash03 Empty RidebellO1 Empty TambourineO Empty Crash04 Empty CowbellO1 Empty 57 Crash05 105 Empty 58 Vibraslap 106 Empty 59 Ride02 107 Empty 60 Bongo Hi 108 Empty 61 Bongo Low 109 Empty 39 ClapOl 87 Rimshot03 40 Snare016 88 Snare022 41 0 89 SnareO10 42 StickO2 90 SnareO015 43 02 91 Close06 44 Close0l 92 StickOl 45 TomO03 93 Close02 46 OpenO2 94 OpenOl KETRON AUDYA 165 Drum Set Rock Program Change 17 14 Snare001 62 Conga Slap 15 63 Conga Hi 16 Roll02 64 Conga Low 17 Snare002 65 Timbales Hi 18 SnareO003 66 Timbales Lo 19 Snare004 67 Agogo_Hi 20 Snare005 68 Agogo Low 2 Snare006 69 Cabasa 22 Tom FlamOl 70 MaracasOl 23 Tom Flam02 71 WhistleOl 24 CrashOl 72 Whistle02 25 Snare007 75 GuiroOl 26 Fingsnap Ol 74 Guiro02 27 Slap 75 ClavesOl 28 Snare008 76 W_Block_Hi 29 Scratch Up 77 W_Block_Lo 30 Scratch Down 78 Cuica0l 31 Sticks0Ol 79 Cuica02 32 Click 80
68. 88 Empty 4 Tom26 89 Empty 42 Stick29 90 Empty 43 Tom27 9 Empty KETRON AUDYA 163 Drum Set Acoustic 1 Program Change 10 14 SnareOOl 62 Conga Slap 15 RollOl 63 Conga Hi 16 Roll02 64 Conga Low 17 Snare002 65 Timbales Hi 18 Snare003 66 Timbales Lo 19 Snare004 67 Agogo_Hi 20 Snare005 68 Agogo_Low 21 Snare006 69 Cabasa 22 Tom 70 MaracasOl 23 Tom Flam02 71 WhistleO1 Folk Program Change 9 14 SnareO0l 62 Conga Slap 15 RollOl 63 Conga Hi 16 Roll02 64 Conga Low 17 Snare002 65 Timbales Hi 18 Snare003 66 Timbales Lo 19 Snare004 67 Agogo_Hi 20 Snare005 68 Agogo Low 21 Snare006 69 Cabasa 22 Tom Flam0Ol 70 MaracasOl 23 Tom Flam02 71 WhistleO1 24 Crash0l 72 Whistle02 25 Snare007 73 GuiroOl 26 Fingsnap OI 74 Guiro02 27 Slap 75 ClavesOl 28 Snare008 76 W Block Hi 29 Scratch Up 77 W Block Lo 30 Scratch Down 78 Cuica0l 3 SticksOl 79 Cuica02 32 Click 80 TriangleO 33 MetronomeO0 8 TriangleO2 34 MetronomeO02 82 ShakerOl 35 Kick04 83 ShakerO2 36 Kick02 84 SticksO2 37 RimshotO05 85 Castagnet 38 Snare012 86 TambourineOl 39 ClapOl 87 Rimshot03 40 Snare013 88 SnareOll 41 Tomol 89 Snare009 42 Stick02 90 SnareO10 43 Tom02 9 Stickl2 44 CloseOl 92 S
69. 9 7 5 9 v 2 v 2 2 e S e o 177 178 MNINININ NINININ N Oo do O NO NO IN NO NO d 8 co Co CO A co O1 O c N 0 0 02 0 04 0 06 0 0 1 1 1 2 21 2 23 2 225 ROCK amp ROLL 03 ROCKBLD 01 ROCKBLD 02 ROCKBLD 03 O POTN Kop kce CO NO NO Co NO NO N RAP 85 RAP 85 02 RAVE 125 01 MNINININININ NO NO ho JA N JF A X Q Qo Qo gt gt alo r r OJ O NEL 9 148 KETRON AUDYA NO 29 ROCKBLD 04 30 ROCKSHUFF 01 31 ROCKSHUFF 02 B NO 32 ROCKSHUFF 03 33 ROCKSHUFF 04 34 SAMBAJAZZ 01 3 AMBAJAZZ 02 S 36 SAMBAJAZZ 03 37 SAMBA 38 SAMBA02 39 SAMBA O3 40 SAMBA O4 41 SLOWALTZ 01 2 SLOWALTZ 02 3 SLOWALTZ O3 LOWALTZ 04 MPM PPM TM DP N Ox O01 AJOIN NO Co MNININININ NIS 4 4 4 4 LOWROCK_01 S 5 E S S DO RO PO o gt KOLE E LOWROCK 02 49 TANGO 02 50 TANGO 03 51 TARANTELLA O 52 TARANTELLA O2 53 TARANTELLA 03 54 lWALZER 01 55 lWALZER 02 NO N NO D NO NO O NO AJOJN The RX after the file name of the AUDIO DRUM stands for remixed that is the remixed version of the same file with the same name while FX stands fo
70. Block Lo 30 Scratch Down 78 Cuica0l 3 SticksOl 79 Cuica02 32 Click 80 TriangleO 33 MetronomeO0 8 TriangleO2 34 Metronome02 82 ShakerOl 35 KickO6 83 ShakerO2 36 Kick13 84 SticksO2 37 85 Castagnet 38 Snare009 86 Kick40 39 ClapOl 87 Kick39 40 Snare010 88 Empty 41 0 89 Empty 42 Stick0Ol 90 Empty 43 Tom02 9 Empty 44 CloseO0l 92 Empty 45 3 93 Empty 46 Openol 94 Empty 47 Tom04 95 Empty 48 0 5 96 Empty 49 Crash02 97 Empty 50 Tom06 98 Empty 5 RideOl 99 Empty 52 Crash03 100 Empty 53 RidebellOl 101 Empty 54 TambourineO 102 Empty 55 Crash04 103 Empty 56 Cowbell 104 Empty 57 Crash05 105 Empty 58 Vibraslap 106 Empty 59 Ride02 107 Empty 60 Bongo Hi 108 Empty 61 Bongo Low 109 Empty Analog Gm2 Program Change 7 14 Empty 62 Conga Slap 15 Empty 63 Conga Hi 16 Empty 64 Conga Low 17 Empty 65 Timbales Hi 18 Empty 66 Timbales Lo 19 Empty 67 Agogo_Hi 20 Empty 68 Agogo_Low 21 Empty 69 Cabasa 22 Empty 70 Maracas02 23 Empty 71 Whistle0l 24 Empty 72 WhistleO2 25 Empty 73 Guiro0l 26 Empty 74 Guiro02 27 Fingsnap OI 75 Claves02 28 Slap 76 W Block Hi 29 Scratch Up 77 W Block Lo 30 Scratch Down 78 Cuica0l 3 SticksOl 79 Cuica02 32 Click 80 TriangleO 33 MetronomeO0 8 TriangleO2 34 Metronome02 82 ShakerOl 35 Kickl6 83 ShakerO2 36 Kick24 84 SticksO2 37 Rimshotl2 85 Castagnet 38 Snare087 86 Kick40 39 ClapOl 87 Kick39 40 SnareO10
71. By pressing the USER 5 button you can access the next settings page press USER 4 to return to the previous page as shown on Figure 264 Here you can find the following functions F1 Cross Fade Mode selects the Cross Fade mode Fade 1 Fade 2 Fade 3 F2 Cross Fade Velocity sets the Cross Fade speed Normal Fast 1 Fast 2 Slow 1 Slow 2 F3 Fade Time sets the Fade time of the Master values 1 20 F4 Player Autoload enables disables the automatic loading of the TXT file together with WAV MIDI MP3 see Text scrolling function on page 117 and of the file WAV associated to the MIDI FILE MIDI SYNC RECORDING page 99 TEXT ALL NO F5 Enabled Number Files enables disables the the file numbering values ON OFF F6 Main View enables disables the MAIN VIEW mode values ON OFF F7 Autoswitch Time sec sets the automatic time to switch to the MAIN VIEW from other screens values OFF 0 60 F8 Lyric Txt Small Font sets the small font display of 122 KETRON AUDYA LT mE 1 A DI COENE LENT Or cer DEP ms wr Dus on LM m neris Fat tog ON fomno on Hw a oig er ee did L 41 m LEES 1 Figure 315 ELEA i A i 4 4 Cre fae Fine race i det e DN m de Fics gri P M CHF Poe lee a himera Eiai Part tinte eren et Lumag Fae
72. Distorsions Tube 1 Hyper Dist Tube 2 Grunge Split C3 Octave Cyerdrive 1 53 53 DRUM BASS CHORO LOWER LockOff CE S Figure 293 SLOW BALLAD 53 MY PROGRAM BALLAD Grand Piana Tempo 76 Transp end Strings 1 EDIT PR GR WOICES Concert L Concert F OFF REV TYPE Hall EFF ASSIGN BST EFF TYPE Cho Charusl EchacMona Echol Dist Overdrive 1 ROTOR Ott SUST PEDAL TO ROTOR Off Split C3 Octave Bass CHORO LOWER d Proar Edit 2nd voice Eff Mode Eff Send Control 1 Figure 294 SLOW BALLAD 563 MY PROGRAM end StringsL PIANC Page 1 Over Leer GAIN Bl OUTPUT LEVEL 0 INPUT LEVEL SUSTAIN 33 FILTER FREQ 60 TYPE Heavy FILTER RESO Split C3 Octave BALLAD Grand Piana Tempo 76 Transp 55 DRIM Bass CHORO LOWER Figure 295 ROTOR By pressing the F5 button on the DSP page you can access the window ROTOR as shown in Figure 296 Here you can select the speed of the rotor F1 SLOW F2 FAST The same function is available by using the two SLOW and FAST buttons of the ROTOR section on the front panel DRAWBAR OVERDRIVE By pressing the F6 button on the DSP page you can access the DRAWBAR OVERDRIVE screen as shown in Figure 297 Here you can select the DRAWBAR OVERDRIVE type to set into the DSP to make it available for DRAWBAR 5 Drawba
73. Down ead 5th Down Lead 5th Up 3rd Major Up Trio Female Male Sextet Female Male VOCODER By pressing the F6 button the list of VOCODER effects similar to Figure 359 will appear from which you can edit the parameters of the vocoder effect Select a parameter with the CURSOR A V buttons and change the value by using the DATA VALUE wheel ASSIGN values Right Left OCTAVE values 2 1 0 1 2 auto MIDI MODE values ON OFF in this mode the VOCODER is active for the MIDI melody track VOICES EDIT By pressing the F7 button the list of VOICES EDIT parameters similar to Figure 360 will appear Here you can edit the harmonization parameters up to 5 voices Select a vertiacal parameter by using the CURSOR A buttons and the horizontal parameter by using the CURSOR lt 4 buttons Modify the value of each selected parameter of the 5 voices VOICES from 1 to 5 by using the DATA VALUE wheel VOLUME values 0 63 PAN values 64R 63L FORMANT values 0 63 DETUNE values 0 63 CUTOFF values 0 38 RESONANCE values 0 7 Voicetron IF JaMENS 44 48 BALA rnm Fw T 11 43 F iae maid Pe T Maj BALLAL 27 i Litt nni qr ILLI T rana AE RN E Dort Dew TRIO Tre Lorna H ett Ferree Made OQuTET eth Dawn Eu 18 Sth Lx
74. EDIT Ti DOPA DH T ial ATIS ETW That De3 UL TE Voca Mute wins wa uus haa vi Paci rem Im Beg Band 1 fue wr Poa Firre s Chgt Prez Jg Le reg Citer ame Li FY Preces a roce Was Fir i n T ati T r Ej I a EEI toma End 224240 Bo tod Vani raf tirai 1 an Ti my PLE Piece EM XITT vocaiMute wie Tye one mn ee Ex EBD hse wary imn Fond 7 ners Fite J N Out etr F al h ue TE E Hi utr dt Poo bance LU Ti ar Fiegro Et EEI fmm Figure 248 KETRON AUDYA 99 MSP function B Saving and loading an MSP 1 When you finish editing save the MSP by using the USER 5 button SAVE Digit a name on the dialogue box by inputting characters directly from the keyboard and press SAVE again Figure 249 2 Select an MSP from disc to load it into memory By pressing the ENTER button a progress bar will appear When the file is loaded you can select it by pressing the INS EFFECT SFX It will be treated as an INS voice Program or MIDI insertion etc The MSP files created by Audya will be stores in a single file containing all the information data to work unlike the previous versions of KETRON files which need to have the WAV files in the
75. Empty 49 CrashlO 97 Empty 50 Tom39 98 Empty 5 Ride04 99 Empty 52 Crash02 100 Empty 53 Ridebell03 101 Empty 54 Middle09 102 Empty 55 CrashlO 103 Empty 56 Middle0O2 104 Empty 57 CrashlO 105 Empty 58 OpenO07 106 Empty 59 Ride03 107 Empty 60 MaracasOl 108 Empty 61 Maracas02 109 Empty Power S Kit Program Change 93 14 Empty 62 WhistleOl 15 Empty 63 WhistleO2 16 Empty 64 GuiroOl 17 Empty 65 Guiro02 18 Empty 66 OpenO07 19 Empty 67 ClavesOl 20 Empty 68 OpenO07 21 Empty 69 TambourineOl 22 Empty 70 Close07 23 Empty 7 Clap04 24 Empty 72 Clap02 25 Empty 73 Clap03 26 Snare052 74 ClapOl 36 Kick47 SticksO2 37 Rimshot23 Castagnet 27 SnareO05 75 FingsnapO2 38 Snare049 TambourineO3 39 ClapOl Rimshot24 40 Snare049 88 Snare047 41 Tomol 89 Snare047 42 Stick15 90 Snare048 43 Tom02 9 MiddleOl 44 CloseOl 92 Stick02 45 Tom03 93 Close02 46 Close08 94 OpenO2 47 Tom04 95 Reverse 48 TomO5 96 Applause 49 Crash02 97 Belltree 50 Tom06 98 Empty 5 Ride02 99 Empty 52 Crash05 100 Empty 53 Ride06 101 Empty 54 TambourineO2 102 Empty 55 Crash04 103 Empty 56 Cowbell04 104 Empty 57 Crash03 105 Empty 58 Vibraslap 106 Empty 59 Ride05 107 Empty 60 Bongo Hi 108 Empty 61 Bongo Low 109 Empty 28 Kick52 76 29 Roll03 77 Tambora0l 30 Kick53 78 T
76. Empty 67 ClavesOl 20 Empty 68 OpenO07 21 Empty 69 TambourineOl 22 Empty 70 Close07 23 Empty 71 Clap04 24 Empty 72 Clap0d2 25 Empty 73 Clap03 26 Empty 74 ClapOol 27 Empty 75 FingsnapO2 28 Kick54 76 FingsnapOl 29 Roll03 77 30 Kick53 78 Tambora02 3 Roll04 79 Empty 180 KETRON AUDYA Stick14 Empty Drum Set 54 Middle09 102 Empty 55 Crashl0 103 Empty 56 Middle0O2 104 Empty 57 CrashlO 105 Empty 58 OpenO07 106 Empty 59 Ride03 107 Empty 60 Maracas0l 108 Empty 61 Maracas02 109 Empty Ms 100 Set Program Change 13 14 SnareOOl 15 RollO 62 Congaslap Conga Hi 16 Roll02 Conga Low 17 Snare002 Timbales Hi 18 Snare003 Timbales Lo 19 Snare004 Agogo Hi 20 SnareO005 Agogo Low 2 SnareOO06 Cabasa 22 T MaracasOl 23 T FlamO02 WhistleO1 24 Crash0l WhistleO2 25 Snare007 GuiroO 26 F SnapOl Guiro02 27 Slap ClavesOl 28 SnareO08 W_Block_Hi 29 Scratch_Up W_Block_Lo 30 Scratch Down 3 SticksOl CuicaO0l Cuica02 32 Click TriangleOl 33 MetronomeOl TriangleO2 34 MetronomeO2 ShakerOl 35 Kick50 Shaker05 43 Tom4l 91 Empty 44 Stick03 92 Empty 45 Tom40 93 Empty 46 OpenO7 94 Empty 47 Tom40 95 Empty 48 Tom39 96
77. General Preset Master1 Master Keyboard Preset Master2 Second Master Keyboard Preset Accord1 MIDI accordion Preset Accord2 Second MIDI accordion Preset The Figure 264 shows the Master2 page USER 2 button The following explanation refers to the General Preset The procedure for the Master1 Master2 Accord1 and Accord2 Presets are identical Saving the MIDI settings To store the MIDI settings press the SAVE button on the front panel A brief SAVE MIDI Setting message will appear If you do not save the MIDI settings the previous settings will return at next keyboard start up FILTER PROG CHANGE TX From the first screen of the MIDI menu by pressing the F2 button a window will appear where to set the Program Change transmission filter Figure 265 By using the buttons F1 10 you can select the parts to filter F1 Right F2 Left F3 Bass F4 Drums F5 ALL PARTS F6 Global global channel of the keyboard F7 Registration F8 Voicetron F9 ARRANGER CHORDS opens another window F10 VOICE DRAWBAR opens another window Select the MIDI transmission filter options by using the CURSOR A V buttons or the DATA VALUE wheel Press the CURSOR lt 4 gt buttons to set the FILTERED value to activate the filter or the value to deactivate the filter The filter options are the following Figure 266 267 267 FTER 106 KETRON AUDYA EXPRESSION Sust Soft Sost PORTAMENTO WHA Mono Poly
78. Hawaian 106 Mandolin 107 Bright Acoustic ClassicFx Pedalsteel Vintage Reed Silent M98 Fe 114 Polisynth 115 Sci Fi 108 109 110 19 65 O O 2 5 2 5 5 ze 9 6 ase EI 2 x 3 mooth 855 Section mooth Horns iccolo op Flute an Flute Voice Flute hakuashi histle lassic Flute Pulset Synbrass3 ead Square Mili 5 g r o 2 O T riangle1 riangle2 Synth8 8 Synh oftpad Saw amp Pulse Warmpad antasy agic Co z ojele eiz3 cO CO CO CcO cO Co Oo O0 OO O0 CO NIN IN INI NINININ INT N N CO N 0 01 AJOIN U Digipa gem olg SJN vS D 1 Sounds 117 118 ID Cyde 119 Synthio 120 Syntha 121 Hit amp Crash 122 Clackson 123 Pfif amp Jew Harp 124 Huu 125 Alarm Laser 126 Door_ 127 1Shot_ 126 116 Synthat S S Door Bell1 Shot Jazz Airhorn N jVOICE 97 Atmosphere Bowed Pad Digipad 2 3 Qo oO D D O oO x U Q 100 Fantasy 102 Halo 3 Ensemble P 8 L O e 104 Digisting Tres 106 Hackbrett Tres 108 Cajun Pan Flute Ac Folki Jungle Uku
79. LOOP from the list by using the CURSOR A V buttons or the DATA VALUE wheel Our example is ArtOfSun djl Press the ENTER button for load the DJ LOOP into memory and the START button to start playback of the DJ LOOP Press the USER 3 HOME button to activate the MAIN VIEW window as shown by the arrow of Figure 80 By pressing the F3 button or F4 the MAIN VIEW window will appear and on the right side the list of DJ LOOP Figure 81 In this way while the current file is playing back you can select a file from the list using the CURSOR A V buttons or the DATA VALUE wheel and start with the ENTER button Select Arranger conductor section buttons to manage different pattern in your own ways The USER buttons from 1 to 4 in the MAIN VIEW window will have the following functions USER 1 PAUSE CONTINUE Not Used USER 2 STOP USER 3 LEAD ON OFF Not Used USER 4 EXIT exit from the Lyric or MAIN VIEW window Sun djl Pop L S a m mem cmm m eg 151 Trans KADILLDOPLCHILL LEAD DN Cun il Era dfi PIC DA Love amp koa Sinn Ocean s di Bl di ZOOM OFF fight Bit ail Rook Isisnd di Main View Figure 80 x 120 Split Oct OP 0 Right PANO Fusion_Funk STAGE 73 LL TE PRESET Registration CDU LOGFILE UT 1 AE TOF A MY REGISTRA TION ERADIL ss LOVE amp KO
80. Lead Sth ren Lead Lip i SR EE Sj ei p i SELES Poe 1 tpa C Dem EX 11 as n E i nam HEEE LITRO 1 Maj Figure 358 RN ET CRANC m dr rm ETT TIN p Nnm ER 3 a HENN Bii OCTAVE nic MIDI MODE fi GOEN MOD Po eres rine iEn VOCAL TO ARR RELLLTION irae 1 LE ma femp ae fee Loree 18 WET mcn 1 5 vor sn so xol Hit Ace an n QUARTET emo 32 32 32 32 33 Eque OPER I wee laaro NET uns pe pal ta gad as rmomm emo 2 3 9 3 1 To ses PESE VELECTIUM Pics 1 m EY 81 1 CRS 3 Oct LB mij Figure 360 KETRON AUDYA 135 Voicetron EQUALIZER By pressing the F8 button the list of EQUALIZER effects similar to Figure 361 will appear from which you can choose one of the 10 bands graphical equalizer preset by using the USER buttons from 1 to 5 or edit the parameters to set the custom equalization Select one of the 10 EQ bands by using the CURSOR lt 4 buttons Modify the value of the selected band by using the CURSOR A buttons or the DATA VALUE wheel values from 14 dB to14 dB The USER buttons from 1 to 5 allow to choose one of the following Preset Flat no equalization e LowCut equalization with bass frequencies cut HighCut equalization
81. Player s volume Fader is set to O If different from O the output signal is routed to MAIN The headphones volume is adjusted by the PFL Fader from the USER panel It doesn t work with MIDI FILES e F9 LEAD 4 selects the channel of the melody from 1 to 16 in case of MIDI file The default value is MIDI channel 4 26 KETRON AUDYA On Wave Player menu a new WAVE EDIT feature located on 9 button In order to operate with this new function firstly select the wave to edit than select WAVE EDIT button Figure 20 Once Wave Edit button is pressed a pop up menu will show on display the Import progress activity When this procedure will be completed the waveform will be displayed on Audya screen Related at this new waveform screen Audya will show a tools palette to operate on this imported file Figure 21 Stereo file will be shown on Audya display as a single waveform however the editing and storing functions will maintain the properties of the current file Beside the new imported waveform Audya will show three markable lines See on Figure with arrows to indicate a Start Point Blue Fade Start Point Grey End Point Black Here is on detail e Zoom allows to magnify or reduce waveform displayed e Start Set the Start Point of waveform e End Set the End Point of waveform e Norm Apply Normalize or amplify function on waveform range 0 200 e Fade Set the Fade Out time showed on ms related of
82. R CALIENTE R MERENGUE_ 2 R CUMBIA R BACHATA CHA CHA 1 MAMBO CHA CHA 2 R BALLENATO BOSSA_ LOUNGE SON_ANTIGUO LATIN JAZZ RUMBA FLAMENCA LOUNGE BOSSA 2 SAMBA_ROCK TROPICAL SOKA R ANTILLES SD BACHATA SD BALADA SD BATUCADA SD BEGUINE 1 MS BEGUINE 2 MS BEGUINE 3 SD BOSSAMIX SD BOSSANOVA 1 SD BOSSANOVA 2 SD 8 MDNI 3 4 KA 12 EN 2 15 16 18 19 AUDYA FACTORY STYLES 60 LATIN JAZZ s0 66 MERENGUE SD 6 NDOMBOLO SD 69 MPiDOSD SAMBA SD 8 VALLENATO SD 9 ZOUK SD R 77 SAMBASD 78 VALLENATO SD JIVE SLOW ROCK 1 SLOW ROCK 2 ROCKER SHADOW PARTY R amp ROLL RETRO ROCK SHUFFLE R amp ROLL STAGE_R amp ROLL SURF HIP_SLOW_ ROCK RETRO S ROCK SLOW 12 8 15 SLOW BLUES 16 GTERZINATO 17 VINTAGE_S ROCK 18 GBLUESMAN 19 TWIST 3 4 C1 esaet o I 58 SHUFFLE_ BOOGIE T 6 8 SLOW BLD O 5 EH R amp ROLL_1 SLOW ROCK 605 POP SD BOOGIE WOOGIE SD 20 21 22 23 24 6 2 JJ Qo J O NO a i UNPLUGGED 17 i BOOGIE POP ROCK WIST R Ke NI 26 1 C1 Styles 6 GPASO DOBE 8 GSEVLLANA S GRUMBA NAPOLETA KETRON AUDYA 159 Styles AUDYA FACTORY STYLES e TARANTELLA e oFOXTRO o MODERATO 32 55 36 38 39 40 2 160 KETRON AUDYA
83. RECORD Switch Co amp VOLUME STYLE NO LOOP SAVE Figure 171 B How to EDIT MODIFY an existing Style In order to modify an existing style simply select it after you have pressed the USER STYLE button to display the user styles then press EDIT to access the Pattern Editor as shown in Figure 172 By using the navigation arrows highlight the Voice of the arrangement part to be modified for our example we re using the Bass line Use the Dial to change the voice for this track You can use any of the Voice Group buttons Piano El Piano Chrom etc to select the group from which you want to access a voice with the Data Value wheel Figure 173 To switch to a different Bank highlight the part e g Bass and turn the Data Value wheel to access a different bank e g Bass Bank then move back to the voice column and use the wheel to select a voice within the new bank Press RECORD F8 to enter the recording mode For our convenience we ve switched from SOLO to ALL by using User 1 6 button just so we can hear all the other style parts chord1 chord 2 etc while recording Figure 174 The voice assigned by default is whatever sound the current style used for this part By pressing the START button Audya will count in with an extra measure not recorded before recording starts to give you time to have a feel for the tempo before you start recording anything at the next measure Please
84. SPLIT you can set the right split note for the second voice e F10 CONTROLS opens a further control page for the 2ND VOICE Figure 96 where to switch the following parameters ON OFF BALLAD iM obec Ab F1 PORTAMENTO ON OFF enable disable the Baia trend Pans Portamento control F2 AFTERTOUCH ON OFF enable disable the Aftertouch control F3 PITCH BEND ON OFF enable disable the Pitch Bend control F4 MODULATION ON OFF enable disable the Modulation Wheel control F5 EXPRESSION ON OFF enable disable the Expression control Stra Figure 96 52 KETRON AUDYA The USER 3 button opens a screen like Figure 97 where all the parameters for EFF MODE will appear that is the effects mode of the PROGRAM Use the F1 F10 buttons to modify the parameters of the effects mode Once you select a parameter you can modify the value by using the DATA VALUE wheel or the CURSOR lt 4 gt buttons e F1 F6 VOICES you can assign up to three VOICES to the same PROGRAM as already seen in the first screen of PROGRAM EDIT page e F2 F7 REV TYPE you can choose a reverb type Figure 98 For example tudio1 heatre1 heatre2 tage1 tage2 Church1 Church2 Hangar Galaxy pace ser Revi user reverb 1 ser Rev2 user reverb 2 ser Rev3 user reverb 3 ser Rev4 user reverb 4 ser Rev5 user reverb 5 F3 F8 EFF ASSIGN you can assign an effect to each VOICE Figure 99 as shown below
85. Scratch Down 78 Cuica0l 3 SticksOl 9 Cuica02 32 Click 80 TriangleOl 33 8 TriangleO2 34 Metronome02 82 ShakerOl 35 Kick42 83 ShakerO2 36 Kickl5 84 SticksO2 Rimshot05 Clap04 Snare029 Tambourinel Clap10 Rimshot12 SnareO077 Snare036 Tom20 Snare037 Stick20 Kick42 Tom21 Kick15 Middle07 Kick17 Tom22 Stick08 Middle05 Middle06 Tom23 Reverse Tom24 Applause Crash02 Belltree Tom25 Empty RideOl Empty Crash03 Empty RidebellO1 Empty TambourineOl Empty Crash04 Empty CowbellO1 Empty Crash05 Empty Vibraslap Empty Ride02 Empty Bongo Hi Empty Bongo Low Empty Techno SnareO01 Conga Slap RollO1 Conga_Hi Roll02 Conga_Low Snare002 Timbales Hi Snare003 Timbales Lo Snare004 Agogo Hi Snare005 Agogo Low Snare006 Cabasa Tom Flam01 MaracasOl Tom Flam02 WhistleO1 CrashOl Whistle02 Snare007 GuiroO 26 Fingsnap OI 74 Guiro02 27 Slap 75 ClavesOl 28 Snare008 76 W Block Hi 29 ScratchO5 77 W Block Lo 30 Scratch Down 78 Cuica0l 3 SticksOl 79 Cuica02 32 Click 80 TriangleO 33 MetronomeO0 8 TriangleO2 34 Metronome02 82 ShakerOl 35 Kickl15 83 ShakerO2 36 Kickl7 84 SticksO2 37 Rimshotl3 85 Clap04 38 Snare034 86 Tambourinel 39 Clap03 87 Rimshotl2 40 Snare033 88 Snare038 41 Tom26 89 SnareO077 42 Close04 90 Snare028 43 Tom27 91 Kick28 44 Stick09 92 Kick29 45 Tom28 93 StickO8 46 MiddleO05 94 MiddleO6 Drum Set Program Change 29
86. Set eeeeeeeeeeeennnn nennen nin 95 97 RAM Ins Supersolo 98 5 99 VOICE 18 101 User Voice List eeeeeeennm 102 104 el 21 i lt 0 9 ne ne are 130 Search Main 138 ets a NEU ae 139 User Assignable 140 Text scrolling aoasudessmaies 05s ciun ic 141 DISK a A 142 eee en ner es Pee ene 143 Technical Tables 5 across 144 GM VOICES RTT 144 146 Audio DAUM 147 Groove Bank Drum 2 149 Bass Bank ccccccceceeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaees 151 PAO Foi muU DUANE 153 Live RR 155 AUDYA FACTORY 5 5 156 DUNI SEaren n 161 6 182 MIDI Implementation 184 Control 185 Non Registered Parameter Numbers 186 5 5 201 Thank you for purchasing Ketron Audya Advanced Music Station In this User Manual you can find the de
87. Set Press F2 GROUP if you want change the percussion group Figure 233 by using the CURSOR gt buttons or the DATA VALUE wheel KICK SNARE HI HAT CYMBAL TOM RIMSHOT LATIN1 LATIN2 LATINS3 CLAP FX Press F3 INSTR to select an instrument within the percussion group by using the CURSOR lt q gt buttons or the DATA VALUE wheel In our example is kick18 Figure 234 By pressing the CURSOR gt buttons together you set empty that is no instrument Press F6 TUNE to set the fine tune of the percussive instrument by using the CURSOR buttons or the DATA VALUE wheel The values are from 0 to 128 0 100 cents Press F7 SHIFT to set the pitch by 32 semitones in one semitone step of the percussive instrument by using the CURSOR buttons or the DATA VALUE wheel In Figure 235 the pitch is 16 semitones Press the USER 5 button SAVE to store the user DRUM SET give a name directly from the keyboard and choose the position where to store In Figure 236 the name given to the user DRUM SET is MY DRUM Setting a USER DRUM SET in a style 1 2 3 After you have selected a style press the STYLE VIEW button on the front panel Press the F1 button to select the drum part of the style If Audio Drum is displayed press F1 again to select Drum1 By using the CURSOR gt buttons or the DATA VALUE wheel select one of the DRUM SET created by the user In Figure 2
88. Snare009 41 TomO7 89 SnareOl2 42 StickO2 90 Snare028 43 0 9 GCuiraOl 44 Close0l 92 Guira02 45 Tom09 93 TamboraO0l 46 Open0Ol 94 Tambora02 Drum Set 60 Bongo_Hi 108 Empty 61 Bongo_Low 109 Empty Street Program Change 74 14 Snare001 62 Conga Slap 15 Rollo 63 Conga Hi 16 Roll02 64 Conga Low 17 SnareO002 65 Timbales Hi 18 Snare003 66 Timbales Lo 19 Snare004 67 Agogo_Hi 20 Snare005 68 Agogo Low 21 Snare006 69 Cabasa 22 Tom FlamO 70 MaracasOl 23 Tom Flam02 71 WhistleO1 24 Crash0Ol 72 WhistleO2 25 Snare007 73 Guiro0Ol 26 Fingsnap OI 74 Guiro02 27 Slap 75 ClavesOl 28 Snare008 76 W_Block_Hi 29 Scratch Up 77 W Block Lo 30 Scratch Down 78 Cuica0l 31 SticksOl 9 Cuica02 32 Click 80 TriangleOl 33 MetronomeO 8 TriangleO2 34 MetronomeO02 82 ShakerOl 35 Kick24 83 ShakerO2 36 Kick25 84 SticksO2 37 Rimshotl4 85 Clap04 38 SnareO4 l 86 Tambourinel 39 ClapO05 87 Rimshotl2 40 Snare042 88 Snare039 41 TomO7 89 Snare030 42 Closell 90 Kick42 43 Tom08 amp 9 Kickl7 44 CloselO 92 Kickl8 45 Tom09 93 Stick25 46 Open0d8 94 Middle03 47 Tomio 95 Reverse 48 Tomll 96 Applause 49 Crash02 97 Be
89. The NRPN value is formatted as follows Value LEE 12 Table number Root Table number ranges from 0 to 9 and Root from C 0 to B 11 For instance if you have uploaded the following harmonies in the preset tables Major Minor Major 7th Minor 7th you can then get a D minor harmony by sending a NRPN value of 12 Minor D 12 1 2 14 To get an Am7 chord you will have to send 12 Minor 7th A 12 3 9 45 Note if you ve downloaded a custom harmony table using a Sysex 0 calling this NRPN will overwrite it 3 Vocalizer output 0 Main 1 Aux KETRON AUDYA 187 Data Default Parameter MSB LSB MSB value Pitch to MIDI conversion 11 0 Pitch to MIDI switch enables pitch to midi conversion Refer to Pitch 1 127 output section for more information about this feature 12 4 2 Note trigger sensitivity this parameter affects the responsiveness of the algorithm for triggering a new MIDI note Lower values makes the algorithm require a more stable pitch before sending a Note On message Higher values makes the algorithm respond faster on note onsets lower perceived latency but increases the likeliness of artifacts You can also use NRPN 96 14 to mitigate potential artifacts while keeping the latency low enough 13 0 4 2 Pitch transition tolerance affects the way the algorithm handles pitch transitions between notes i e when the pitch glides from a note to anot
90. TriangleO 33 Metronome 01 8 TriangleO2 34 Metronome 02 82 ShakerOl 35 KickO5 83 ShakerO2 36 6 84 SticksO2 37 Rimshot21 85 ClapO2 38 SnareO092 86 TambourineOl 39 Clap15 87 Rimshotll 40 Snare093 88 Snare086 41 0 89 Snare084 42 Stick19 90 Snare028 43 Tom02 9 MiddleO 44 Close09 92 MiddleO4 45 Tom03 93 Close02 46 OpenO03 94 OpenOl 47 Tom04 95 Reverse 48 Tom05 96 Applause 49 Crash02 97 Belltree 50 Tom06 98 Empty 5 Ride03 99 Empty 52 Crash03 100 Empty 53 RidebellO1 101 Empty 54 TambourineO 102 Empty 55 Crash04 103 Empty 56 Cowbell0l 104 Empty 57 Crash05 105 Empty 58 Vibraslap 106 Empty 59 RideOl 107 Empty 60 Bongo HIi 108 Empty 61 Bongo Low 109 Empty House Program Change 25 14 SnareO001 62 Conga Slap 15 Rollo 63 Conga Hi 16 Roll02 64 Conga Low 17 SnareO002 65 Timbales Hi 18 Snare003 66 Timbales Lo 19 Snare004 67 Agogo_Hi 20 Snare005 68 Agogo Low 21 Snare006 69 Cabasa 22 Tom 70 MaracasOl 23 Tom Flam02 71 WhistleOl 24 CrashOl 72 Whistle02 25 Snare007 73 GuiroOl 26 Fingsnap OI 74 Guiro02 27 Slap 75 ClavesOl 28 SnareO008 76 W Block Hi 166 KETRON AUDYA 29 Scratch Up 77 W Block Lo 30
91. Ut Troe VOES3 OCEANS DREAMON ArtOf sS un d jl fe Bt DA RIGHT BIT DOL m m 6a T 129 TD T 43 Drum Bass Chord Lover STO LEADON EXIT Style Start Figure 81 KETRON AUDYA 4 Program Program For each button of the VOICES section you can create and store a PROGRAM sound You can modify a PROGRAM by pressing the EDIT button and a button of the VOICES section B Creating a PROGRAM 1 Press the PROGRAM button 2 Press a button of the VOICES section for example PIANO The current PROGRAM will appear Figure 82 3 Press the EDIT button The parameters of the current PROGRAM will be displayed Figure 83 4 The F1 F10 buttons allow the selection of the parameters of the PROGRAM as explained later F1 F6 VOICES By pressing the F1 or F6 buttons you will highlight repeatedly one of three voices that you can assign to the same PROGRAM In the example the first voice selected is CLAVINET while the reamaining two voices are inactive OFF Once you have highlighted one of three VOICES of the PROGRAM you can rotate the DATA VALUE wheel or press the CURSOR buttons to select an instrument available from the GM banks Figure 64 For example you can choose an instrument for each VOICE from the PIANO bank as follows e Grand Piano e Concert L e Concert Grand e Concert R e Pop Piano e Grand L e Honky e Grand e Jingle e Open concert e Harpsichord e Harps W
92. When finished press the USER 5 button SAVE 9 Give a name to the PLAY LIST and press SAVE again mb By pressing the A PLAY ON OFF button USER 5 you can enable disable the automatic playback of the songs currently in the Play List 64 KETRON AUDYA G Dr 6_POP_ ROCK 67 CLASSIC FLUTE rack nno end Stings l ETENI L5 FLUTE Page 1 E A E Se DEO ce c e LN ENG a 5 E T E LI LEM ry we J 16 T vx l5 ET CLASSIC FLUTE Ls Soret oo FLUTE Pee 1 WAVE anteey Like Fusion taiii Cool Pop wav Dance wav Elektro ket wav Figel Hom amp Muted was Faik inte Guitar win Funk Baer way Furky Tune wav Harp Interea was H Hat Super Kit wav Like Fusion ws Key Tunes By pressing the KEY TUNES button in the VOICE section you can assign a song to each key of the keyboard You can freely assign any song of the WAVE folder to any key of the keyboard W Creating a KEY TUNE 1 Press the KEY TUNES button A screen showing KEY TUNE DEMO will appear Figure 139 that is a demonstration file to understand KEY TUNES features 2 Press the USER 3 button CREATE in order to create a new KEY TUNE 3 Select a song from the WAVE folder by using the DATA VALUE wheel or the CURSOR A V 4 Press the ENTER button to select the song The song will be autom
93. When such a NRPN is sent the preset table overwrites the current one In addition to these presets you can program your own table and download it into the vocalizer with a System Exclusive message See the Sysex part for additional information Lead voice switch 0 off muted 1 127 on Lead channel processing switch 0 off Pitch correction and Voice transform blocks see synoptic are bypassed NRPNs 97 02 to 97 11 have no effect 1 127 on full lead channel processing mode Harmony switch 0 off muted 1 127 on 9696 0 10 MIDI track transpose 2 1 1 2 data MSB 0 to 4 octaves or automatic data MSB 5 Allow the MIDI notes messages to be transposed in octave increments This parameter is set correctly if the vocalizer synthesizes the same note as the singer in Melody mode and with harmony part muted In auto mode the vocalizer dynamically transposes the MIDI notes to the closest octave to the input signal C1 Harmony MIDI channel harmony MIDI channel HC After you use this command the harmony MIDI channel will change so you ll need to send all the following MIDI messages into the new channel Harmony and melody MIDI channels must be different if you try set the harmony channel at the current melody channel value the command will be ignored You must move the melody to another channel before O Lead MIDI channel lead voice MIDI channel LC After you use this c
94. airy Ti ca 4 iiia Vm icd V Tm Fu Pern METESSERN Figure 208 s OW SALILAI THEAT i i uma L i i nt V graui lege 1 Fara rtg Flufewh Jiris Poem Fripe ini EN 81 ot e 79 ao we c n 11 ee wh Ji La em klirr BUM DA LEN Fh KEIEZHITAIOHETETOB eu PIE Figure 209 AMEI Oe Oe ima Pmb w s e sepu es ef uw iur om sS s sa s 35 a Mute me Nr dp 13 Lt T TH LITRE ANM TIT f i Figure 21 OW 8SALLAIT ie E RET 4 hr rra Aaa Piisi iringi heres Jira Piem yi w 514 c a un a a n Mute am s Nt Figure 211 UTILITY USER 5 By pressing UTILITY you can access the MIDI utility window Figure 212 Here you can set the following parameters by pressing directly the F1 F10 buttons F1 SOFT THRU enables the MIDI Thru F2 MIDI CLOCK IN enables the MIDI clock reception F3 MIDI CLOCK OUT enables the MIDI clock transmission F4 LOCAL enables the Local On Off function of the keyboard F5 MIDI PORT IN GM enables the MIDI IN 1 or 2 port for the General MIDI data reception F6 USB MIDI OUT enables the MIDI transmission on the USB port F GM2 MODE enables the General MIDI 2 mode F8 GLOBAL GM TX enables the General MIDI global transmission F9 MIDI IN
95. allows the selection of MIDI files For this reason it s necessary to press the MP3 button or SFX button of the Player A list of MP3 files of the MP3 folder Figure 75 or SFX files of the SFX folder will appear Figure 76 Select an MP3 file or SFX from the list by using the CURSOR A V buttons or the DATA VALUE wheel Press the ENTER button to start playback of the MP3 file or SFX file Press the USER 3 HOME button to activate the MAIN VIEW window as shown by the arrow of Figure 75 and Figure 76 The MAIN VIEW window will appear and on the right side the list of MP3 files Figure 77 or SFX files Figure 78 on the disc If an MP3 SFX file contains lyric the LYRIC window will appear in place of the list as illustrated in Figure 78 The USER from 1 to 4 buttons in the MAIN VIEW window will have the following functions USER 1 PAUSE CONTINUE USER 2 STOP USER 3 LEAD ON OFF melody mute USER 4 EXIT exit from the Lyric or MAIN VIEW window By pressing the F3 button or F4 a second time while an MP3 SFX file with lyric is playing back or paused the MAIN VIEW window is divided into two sections Figure 79 the section LYRIC on the right side the list of the MP3 SFX files on the disc on the left side In this way while the current file is playing back you can select a file from the list by using the CURSOR A buttons or the DATA VALUE wheel and start with button ENTER To return to the ordinary window
96. and DRUM2 and or Audio Drum and Groove Bank Style View FAHT imr A MATOT A PERTTULA MEE SR acr A COLLAR A ARAT Paes LH mr Ci irr 433 al 53 ri GF Lae Figure 144 airl rere penn eee Ee a IBN wit ch FE T i est eee ete Hal GRAAN M Nac Figure 147 mALI AXI Ae BAI FE 1 Eg LUPO 8 Tee Wi erum METAM Pee Crei me irena u i ima oer Beret a a a imrmm joe mimm n vada m lage T Ei ETTECI Figure 148 KETRON AUDYA 6 7 Style View For any other part you can set the routing of the effects up to four effects Figure 149 By using the F1 button you can select the routing of the effects for the parts Please note that you select the part on the previous VOICE page USER 1 By using the F2 F3 F4 F5 buttons you select the effect type REVERB TYPE CHORUS TYPE ECHO TYPE DIST TYPE By rotating the DATA VALUE wheel or the CURSOR lt 4 gt buttons you can set the effect types for each part By pressing the CURSOR lt 4 buttons together you set the first default effect By using the buttons from F7 F8 F9 and F10 you set the amount of the effect for the selected part By pressing the CURSOR lt 4 button
97. arranger variations will be recordable and playable automatically see in detail Automation Issue 8 Press Save to store your own REMIX file while midi file and Remix are running lw 9 Digit a name for your own file than press Save Annn 412 9 cwmc rove 45 again For further information please refer from RRHRHNGER VOLUMCS gut Saving Section Select REMIX file from disk list by Di SAX T using Alpha Dial or cursor button Wait until RMX file will be loaded than press USER 5 START When led button will flashing press REMIX button i Kann Fa F A n LH ammm t Enare BIGRAMD p 4 Cini ri mi uz wuz Dart F Henn Doll f mii nd BiG ad Never Fan in nid rast sene Ls We En Bose mid 7 oani d ne iren sua Weitere SWING MITZTFILE par ror I tS Figure 46 34 KETRON AUDYA B Functions of the Style and MIDI buttons User Style Disk Area Figure 47 These buttons enable or disable style on REMIX while REMIX is running Moreover REMIX function can be linked with a midi file while is playing Firstly select your own midi file than activate REMIX function and add your favourite style User could change your styles while REMIX play easily Thus will be useful to catch the suitable style for your own midi file without stop playing For further info please see Tips amp Tricks on page 36 B Autom
98. at s no cnet Sof toed Terex 105 E TE ren Vcacetron Presets set 3 83 rat E3 DJH BAIS CHORD LOWER pty m GP LEHL c Figure 53 Master The Master fader is located at right of the Voicetron section and adjusts the global volume of the instrument It features a FADE function which enables an automatic fade out during playback that is a gradual smooth volume reduction to zero B FADE By pressing the FADE button the LED flashes and the volume will be reduced gradually accordingly to the CROSSFADE settings Please see MENU gt KEYBOARD CONTROL gt UTILITY gt NEXT PAGE gt Fade Time Figure 54 Once the fade out is over the LED of the FADE button turns off Note that the fade out does not apply to the microphone output In this way you will be able to talk sing during the fade out Master SLOW BALLAD 63 CONCERT_GRAND BALLAD Grand Piana Tempo 7G Transp end Strings PIANC Page 1 Cross Fade Mode Fade 1 Main View ON Crass Fade Velocity Autoswitch Time sec Off Fade Time B Lyricy Tt Small Font Off Player Autoload rexteuMt Registration Sort Numeric Enabled Numb Files Off Registration Restore Off Split F2 Octave ee min 11 559 BASS CHORD LOWER Prev Paae Figure 54 The FADE function works both as FADE Out and FADE In Just press the FADE button while the Arranger or the Player are
99. be available on F10 button to listen the MIDI file This function is also replicated by the Start button on Main layout Figure 40 Now add your own Wave on MIDI file Use panel arrows to navigate on desiderated Waves and then press ADD LOOP F8 button to assign Figure 41 Once Wave Loop will be assigned Audya s display will show info and properties related to this file F1 Wav This value show the Wave s progressive number F2 Name name of selected Wave F3 Bom Beat per minute of selected Wave in case on a Drum Loop This basically info will be used to sync your Audio file onto the MIDI clock Correct BPM information is essential to define the best synchronization between Audio and MIDI The BPM value can be modified also when Audio and MIDI are playing F4 Start Start information for the Wave file User can define just only Audio Start bar as the Stop bar will be defined automatically according to Length and Repeat parameters F5 Length Length on bars for the Wave This value will define the right length for the Wave performance Pay attention when set this parameter to obtain the correct playing and stop point for your audio track F6 Repeat This function select the number of repetitions for the Wave When set to the Loop value before the number 1 the Audio track will be repeated from it s initial Start bar until the end of the MIDI file F7 Remove Wav allows to remove the selected Wave F8 A
100. filter Pit LFO changes pitch and LFO amount Preset Edit allows to modify and save on Program see Preset Edit B Preset Edit You can edit presets and save again the Program without altering the original presets By using F1 F10 you can select the preset and hold the button for about 1 sec Then edit the sound name choose the destination and SAVE the Program You can activate wha wha effect as User Assignable control Program ipa BALLAD MY PROGRAM pas Strings EDIT PROGR BALLAD Gray PESO Tem Li Tras Piteh Pitch i BEND Piteh Pitch Pieri Figure 121 ICE BALLAD MY PROGRAM BAL DAG Arp gr s erat Strings poe 111 Trei EDIT PROGR Sat CI Figure 122 KETRON AUDYA 59 Registration Registration feature mean saving of complete panel setting Audya allow two different Registration feature SINGLE and BLOCK By Registration button user can modify registration content B Creating a SINGLE REGISTRATION 1 After set on layout style tempo volumes and all parameters related of own performance press SAVE and F1 REGISTRATION button Registration name is required 2 From this view will be allowed enable disable of sections available on Registration see Picture 124 By press USER 1 Section off view pages screen related will be allowed Section available on first page Section page 7 1 are F1 AUTOPLAY enables disables the autoplay funct
101. help musicians under Menu Recording starts with Start Rec and especially during their live performances stops by pressing the Record button The file is Seventeen sliders one slider is User memorized under the MIDI folder with the Msr assignable allow powerful and efficient extension Macro Song Recording To start the control over volumes and effects There are playback just select the file and press Enter page also numberus buttons with a built in LED 129 showing their on off status A large colourful USER AUDIO DRUMS LCD display with TFT technology 320x240 singer You can also edit the parameters to your needs for example to set the Vocalizer New function that allows to replace the internal Audio Drum with custom Loops Wave of the user located into a new Audya folder called User Audio Drum The Wave Loops must be 44 KHz 16 bit and their name must include the 2 symbol followed by the precise BPM information For example HOUSE2 127 wav The Loops are automatically synchronized with MIDI and may be associated to each Style part such as 4 Arranger Variations Fill In Break Intros Endings Provided under Style Mode gt Drum2 2 an option to skip the initial automatic loading for the User Audio Drum resources MIDI and Audio Recording pixels and a multi page system based on function buttons around the display allow an easy navigation in the menus and the settings pages Key Tunes You can assign a song to e
102. i d Fl DECRE 1 Se Lic L tal Figure 363 ie w SLEW ds 4 NETT e TH inm DIESEN TOF 41 I GRAY i F T iren he TE Lam Ti aa POET DD yee m n ma Figure 365 Hr I DUI i a ms fs Voicetron EFFECTS SLOVW BALLAD By selecting the F9 button the list of EFFECTS similar Raids to Figure 366 will appear from which you can edit the one parameters of the REVERB and ECHO effects Select tert het aw the parameter by using the CURSOR A YW buttons 0 COM Moree EDIT and edit the value of the 3 parameters by using the m Min DATA VALUE wheel The three parameters are quer EFFECTS SEND values 0 63 QUINTET REVERB PRESET see the list at left FLIED INTER ECHO PRESET see the list at right PERE SELECTION Pre d EF 11 5 El pE T MERC ipit C3 Debgow tereo 3 4 tereo 4 4 xz TARBT pes ono Triplet wE STOP Ue 1 VOCODER RE BTO COW ERT CERAND PAi nE ree Pee i Ted Sie a e TEES rm ikri Tete Doem Stereo Triplet User3 Ami Ch F LR remp main CiM D UTACEUN MU VOCAL TO ARR Figure 367 By selecting the F10 button the VOCAL TO ARR screen like Figure 367 will appear where you can edit SLOW BALLAD ei i
103. kN H Slow Balad CONCERT GRAND Figure 374 138 KETRON AUDYA Search Audya features a useful SEARCH function in order to search files stored in the internal disk or in external USB devices B Searching a file 1 Press the SEARCH button 2 The last accessed directory of the internal disk will open Figure 375 3 Usethe CURSOR A V orthe DATA VALUE wheel and the ENTER button to locate a folder and to search inside 4 Digit the full name file or a part of it by inputting letter and numbers directly from the keyboard In the example Figure 376 the input name to search is LIKE 5 Press the USER 5 button GLOB SEARCH to start searching 6 After a while a screen by using the search results will appear In the example Figure 377 all the files containing the text LIKE have been found 7 Thefiles are immediately available to start playback directly from the search screen Search SLOVW_BALLAD CONCERT_GRAND end StringsL PIAMO Page 1 BALLAD Grand Piana Tempo 76 Transp C LEAD ON s DJ LoOP LO INSTRUMENTS LYRIC E MIDIFILE MPS s MSP Z DM OFF Ci PLAYLIST Transp E O REGISTRATION MARKER s SFX MINER Li STREAM LIST 7 SYSTEM MY FOLDERS USER AUDIO DRUMS NEXT gt gt SEARCH Search string to Search Figure 375 SLOW BALLAD CONCERT_GRAND end StringsL PIANC Page 1 BALLAD Grand Piana Tempo 76 Transp LEAD BJ Li STREA
104. keep in mind Recording mode at this point works by adding inserting events not replacing within the existing track data If during recording unwanted notes are played the user can delete it them by pressing the Record button while the arrangement runs to temporally de activate recording and then by pressing the Clear button so now while the arrangement part runs delete unwanted single notes by pressing the corresponding key from the keybed Figure 1755 Once this procedure is complete press SAVE U5 10 to store your work Edit Pattern IW CONCERT CHAIR E L ET Te my od a RR i Lar m LCONCERT CH AND PATTURN PECORE Figure 175 KETRON AUDYA 7 9 Edit Pattern B How to Create your own Style Here is how to Create your own style from scratch First select any existing Style from the User Style selection then press the EDIT button and NEW STYLE U3 8 Figure 176 Pl a oe com ERT GRAND re POTT PATTERN pecten BP i ROM CERT GRAND one for Er aioe Figure 176 Name the new style using the keybed and press SAVE U5 10 Upon completion the Parameter menu will be displayed automatically In this menu you can set the Tempo BPM Time Signature Arrangement Measures and metronome level for your new style using the data cursor buttons to navigate and changing the value with the Data V
105. manually KETRON e AUDYA 97 RAM Ins Supersolo RAM Ins Supersolo By pressing the RAM INS SUPERSOLO button in the VOICE section you can access the screen where to select the SUPERSOLO voices described on page 19 Creating and editing an INS block By pressing the EDIT button you can access the edit screen of the RAM INS SUPERSOLO voices Figure 241 By using the F1 F10 buttons you can execute the following functions e F1 CLEAR amp LOAD clears the current memory and loads the selected INS voice s e F2 CLEAR SELECT clears the memory only for the currently selected INS voice s e F6 CLEAR ALL clears the memory of all the INS voices e F7 SAVE SELECT stores the currently selected voices in one file Figure 242 Give a name by using the keyboard and press the USER 5 button SAVE to store the INS block In the example the file is MY_SUPERSOLO e F8 AUTO LOAD enables disables the automatic loading into memory of an INS block To choose the autoload function of an RBK file just move to the RBK file and switch the Auto Load parameter from OFF to ON Loading an INS block After storing the INS block it will be on the internal disc 1 Press the RAM INS SUPERSOLO button from the front panel 2 Scroll the files by using the CURSOR A V buttons or the DATA VALUE wheel and localize the file MY SUPERSOLO RBK previously stored on disc Figure 243 3 Press ENTER on the front pan
106. nex Ci lara in send rr i Figure 212 CONCERT GRAND end Stringsl Lead Chan PIANO Page 1 Right Para C MIDIFILE Arab Scale Anonimo Veneziana mid t Besame Mucho mid Mixer Cabaret mid Drm Mixer Doctor zivaao mid Glob Transp RaindroPs_KeeP_Fal 63 BALLAD Grand Piana Tempo 123 Transp Hello Dollv rid Part MI b Mewer Fall In mid t La Vie En Rose mid Song Param 4 March IMendelssahn mid 4 March Waaner mid Midnight c id DE Fal 67 COMTET CRANN i Lt irme rne eral Sorel qun La C UMITITETLE Arab tope P eee e o Leal Chan J iui iral Hever I Cert mid Laat ae oe l Dale med rut ni I Pu Mever Fn ln 2 mad Trani MN P Le rid paranl ai ee EE a ETE Us Te I Hegh Waner mid a om Keyi Irae Figure 214 MIDI file parts transposition Volume Reverb and Chorus of each part Right hand instrument Single drum instruments settings of the drum e g muting some of them into the MIDI file Before storing the MIDI file you can choose the GLOBAL or INITIAL option by using the USER 1 button and the REMOVE option by using the USER 3 button KETRON AUDYA 91 Drum Mixer Drum Mixer By pressing the DRUM MIXER button on the PLAY CONTROL section you can access the 10 percussive pa
107. note 2 gc loco lm 184 KETRON AUDYA Control Change B Modulation wheel Status Byte 2 Byte 3 BnH 01H mmH n LC 1 or HC 1 lead or harmony MIDI channel mm modulation amount OOH 7FH B Portamento time Status Byte 2 Byte 3 BnH 05H ttH n LC 1 or HC 1 lead or harmony MIDI channel tt portamento time OOH 7FH default OOH B Volume Status Byte 2 Byte 3 BnH 07H vvH n LC 1 or HC 1 lead or harmony MIDI channel vv volume OOH 7FH default 64H 100 B Pan Status Byte 2 Byte 3 BnH OAH ppH n LC 1 or HC 1 lead or harmony MIDI channel pp pan OOH 7FH default 40H 64 O full left 64 center 127 full right B Expression Status Byte 2 Byte 3 BnH OBH eeH n LC 1 or HC 1 lead or harmony MIDI channel ee expression OOH 7FH default 7FH B Portamento On Off Status Byte 2 Byte 3 BnH 41H ppH n LC 1 or HC 1 lead or harmony MIDI channel pp switch OOH off 01H 7FH on default OOH B Reverb Echo Send Level Status Byte 2 Byte 3 BnH 5BH rrH n LC 1 or HC 1 lead or harmony MIDI channel rr reverb echo send level OOH 7FH default 64H B Pitch Bend Change Status Byte 2 Byte 3 EnH IIH mmH n LC 1 or HC 1 lead or harmony MIDI channel value LSB OOH 7FH default OOH mm value MSB OOH 7FH default 40H MSB LSB 00 00H 1 octave 40 00H no pitch bend 7F 7FH 1 octave B GM VOICE Control Change 00
108. or from the ordinary MIDI parts For example F1 Audio Drum audio only F2 Groove Bank audio MIDI F3 Bass Bank MIDI F6 Piano Bank F7 Guitar Bank 1 F8 Guitar Bank2 If the style uses some audio parts e g Audio Drum or Live Guitar a symbol appears in front of the style name For this reason when you store a style with audio parts inside it s useful to keep the character in front of the name Figure 152 In this way the symbol will appear in front of the style name and you will be able to distinguish between the MIDI styles and the styles containing audio parts Style View F9 Arp amp Lick MIDI F10 Live Guitar audio MIDI e Forall the sections you can scroll by using the DATA VALUE wheel or choosing directly the Program Change number by using the 0 9 numeric keypad e You can find the Program Change numbers and all the Libraries reference at the the end of this manual SLOW_BALLAD 63 CONCERT_GRAND end StringsL PIANC Page 1 audio Drum chi 16 BEATL 76 41 E 3b Drumz chz STAMDARD1 2 Eme 3t Bass chs Precision 40 Piano at Low i Arpe amp Lick Diaipad 12 30 scurT_03 3j Low Live Guikar ElPiano_Detune 12 soe FUNK 0 BALLAD Grand Piana Tempo 7G Transp SAWE STYLE Save 35 o sese Figure 152 KETRON AUDYA 69 Style View The 4 BANK for sections Drum Piano Guitar1 and Guitar 2 together with the enhancement of previous exis
109. panel A brief message SAVE DATA TO DISK will appear SLOW BALLAD 63 CONCERT_GRAND BALLAD arand Piana znd Stringsi Tempo 76 Transp PIANO Fage 1 Factory Loudness Warm Boost Flat Split C3 Octave 53 DRUM B 55 CHORD LOWER Lock Off SENSO DENNIS CENE Figure 301 SLOW BALLAD 63 CONCERT_GRAND BALLAD arand Piana znd Stringsi Tempo 76 Transp PIANO Fage 1 Factory BASS FREQ VOICE ADJUST 10 TREBLE FREQ i nenHe BASS GAIN dB TREBLE GAIN 0 dB Split C3 Octave a E 2c E DELI BASS CHORD LOWER C Ma DEFAULT voice ON IM Figure 302 Retro Slow 63 CONCERT_GRAND end StringsL PIAMO Page 1 CW a LEAD MUTE iv Pop Super Kitway J Power Super Kit wawv LYRIC OFF yy Retro Slow wav AS Rack Live Guitar wav AJ Salsa wav ZUM OFF s Shuffle Rack wav Transp U AS Smooth Ballad waw MARKER K Solo Trombone way AS Soul Funk wav MY FOLDERS Stage Band wav BALLAD Grand Piana Tempo O Transp J Stereo Grand Piano wav WAVEL play bar 90 04 CINTERNAL PTS PAUSE Figure 303 KETRON e AUDYA 117 B KEYBOARD CONTROL LOW BALLADS 1 CONCERT At From the first MENU screen by pressing the F4 E ELLE 1 button you can access the KEYBOARD CONTROL Frauen oe CAT EG page where to make the keyboard settings Figure errans ees mo ww 304 By using the F1 F10 butto
110. prie me Jeu ru 22 paa 3 LOI es 11 nd Tn am xui ial EE Lime Eryii un 15 Figure C KETRON AUDYA 15 Display and function buttons Display The heart of Audya is the display The F1 F5 function buttons to the left the F6 F10 function buttons to the right and the five User buttons below the display allow you to select the items displayed in the various screens QD F1 F5 function buttons Press the five function buttons from 1 to F5 to select one voice VOICE or one STYLE or a menu displayed on the display for example 2 F6 F10 function buttons The same as above 3 User buttons In Arranger mode the five User buttons below the display will select five FILLS or five BREAKS In the other operative modes they will select various functions menus and user functions F1 F2 F3 F9 and F10 function buttons The F1 F2 F3 9 and F10 function buttons allow you to access the AUDIO STYLE MODELING when they are used in STYLE VIEW mode in the PLAY CONTROL section see details on page 67 Press the STYLE VIEW button and one of the following F1 Audio Drum see groove list on page 147 Press F1 to set the AUDIO DRUM part F2 Groove Bank see groove list on page 149 Press F2 to set the GROOVE BANK part F3 Bass Bank see groove list on page 151 Press F3 to set the BASS BANK part F9 Arp amp Lick see groove list on page 153 Press F9 t
111. same folder Ot means that if you want to use a previous version of MSP file you should put all the linked WAV files in the same folder of the MSP file 100 AUDYA SLOW BALLAD BALLAD Grand Piana CONCERT_GRAND end Stringsl PIANC Page 1 CW AVE Attack K Oi TooSwingfvocalMute way slope 1 Ar Dz Age of Rack vacal wawv Decay yy Alto Sax Offset 4 P Tempo 0 Transp Big Band 1 Take the wav sustain 0 w Big Band 2 way AS Chill Out wav Release 3 K Clean Live Guitar wav AY Cool Pop wav Dance wav J Elektro Kit wav SAVE MSP Figure 249 Voice List By pressing the VOICE LIST button in the VOICE section the screen of the custom voices will appear For each of the 16 VOICES the first two rows you can access the VOICE LIST button As mj lo 7 T M Voice List ei OA ET co Ae Le ed with 20 memory locations each In this way you can customize your favourite voice lists to be used for each voice family B Storing a VOICE LIST 1 e 3 Select a group family sound by press a VOICE button i e EL PIANO A screen like Figure 250 will appear showing the first ten memory locations Press the CURSOR to jump to the second page and see the next ten EMPTY VOICE locations By using the F1 F10 buttons select an empty memory location Figure 251 If you want you can replace the voice in that locat
112. second function is available accordingly to the selected operative mode Pitch This wheel changes the pitch of the sound currently selected for the right hand The default value is 2 semitones modifiable from MENU Modulation This wheel changes the modulation of the sound currently selected for the right hand The default value of sensitivity is 14 modifiable from MENU Play Control Section for the main controls on sound Transposer Octave Rotor etc see on page 22 User Arranger Voices Mixer section for the Arranger parts the right left hand the Style etc In DRAWBARS mode you can control the Drawbars parameters see on page 20 Function buttons F1 F5 The function buttons at left of the display allow the selection of voices styles controls parameters etc that are shown on the left side of the display accordingly to the different operative modes By pressing a function button the name on the display is highlighted in blue colour Function buttons F6 F10 As above Function buttons at right of the display Display Co
113. softer the guitar plays rhythmic chords PIANIST BASSIST Once selected by using the F3 button you can choose between 4 operative modes by using the CURSOR a gt buttons or the DATA VALUE wheel for the PIANIST and BASSIST modes Figure 184 STANDARD this mode lets you freeze the recognized chord by using the Sustain Pedal so you can play the keyboard without altering the tonality of the Arranger 82 KETRON AUDYA ro ii i Pig Py i PORE LIED Go E mE OFF ar umma am arme rui or crm Pianist eusti o jawesmae ee iones o PRESET CELECTION Peye l ic E an z Hay DEA ites Tom BLA 1 AT i Lad RET VOCE LIGT 15 C THEE PANT Bart a stand Fin to OFF N Mone Ener NEL TTE TA CDOMCFET GRAND Feed RET Grn Pen pret sings LIST to 3T eUT TLL ENTERIV T 1 TER err FILE tu BARES oer ese ER T cx PRESET CFLECTION Page a 53 eo s DEUM Lotus Lower 5 My I P fr a i saan Cv PIANT GETAN ono Mop Ens SELELTIEDM Pam i i amp E 1 3t Loara 5 B m Figure 1 184 AUTO this mode lets you play 3 or more notes for chord recognit
114. starts playback and its LED flashes Press the MP3 button Select an MP3 file from the list Figure 34 Press the ENTER button The CROSSFADE button flashes while crossfading the two tracks accordingly to the CROSSFADE settings see MENU KEYBOARD CONTROL gt UTILITY gt NEXT PAGE Figure 35 9 The volume of the WAVE track decreases while P S EA the MP3 track volume increases up to the level Figure 36 set by its fader Both LEDs of the tracks will flash during the CROSSFADE When the CROSSFADE inde Sami CONGR AME is finished the LED of the WAVE track lights wm 8 steadily while the LED of the MP3 track flashes pe um vEw 10 Note that you can apply the same procedure to a dina several wm EE any other tracks mor Redon ma Enabled Numb Files Function waem em Lee astm itt By setting the Enabled Numb Files parameter to ON TET Eon wr s on the MENU gt Keyboard Control gt Utility gt Next Page as illustrated in Figure 36 all the files in the a ENENC a NEM Player are numbered When they are numbered Fig Figure 37 ure 39 they can be recalled in to numerical way as for Registrations using the numeric keypad When mtv iA ie an m this Function is active by pressing twice the F10 but di VA Fus ton 3 NEXT you can access to window similar to Fig MISI ai ae ure 39 where adjust the following parameters z TE amp pe f
115. stopped KETRON AUDYA 39 Main View Main View The new MAIN VIEW interface allows to display all the items of the main screen in a more easy to operate way B Activating the MAIN VIEW 1 2 3 Press the MENU button on the front panel to open the screen MENU as shown in Figure 55 Press the F4 button corresponding to KEYBOARD CONTROL as shown by the arrow in Figure 55 Press the F10 button corresponding to UTILITY as shown in Figure 56 Press the USER button 5 NEXT PAGE as shown in Figure 57 Press the F6 button to select MAIN VIEW as shown in Figure 58 Now you can ulf the DATA VALUE wheel or the CURSOR to select the value OFF or ON as shown in Figure 58 Press the EXIT button to go to the previous window of the MENU Press the MENU button to exit the MENU environment B Storing MAIN VIEW at start up Once out of the MENU environment you may want to store the new MAIN VIEW at start up of the keyboard Press the SAVE button on the front panel A screen like Figure 59 will appear Press the F6 button corresponding to CUSTOM STARTUP At start up the display will be set to the new MAIN VIEW 4 KETRON AUDYA ur FR T GAAHI t Li a Ta et ONTP BUT en 43 11 ut ee Low Pal Figure 56 ee a m HEELS Fur 1 4 dr C3 rhs 43 3 r sini DERI AIT m lt
116. the VOICE of the PROGRAM will appear By using the 1 to F10 buttons you can select a parameter and modify the value using the DATA VALUE wheel or the CURSOR lt 4 buttons Press the CURSOR lt 4 buttons together to set the default value 32 e modifies the attack time of the envelope Values from 0 to 63 default 32 Figure 91 e F2 DECAY modifies the decay time of the envelope Values from 0 to 63 default 32 e F3 SUSTAIN modifies the sustain time of the envelope Values from 0 to 63 default 32 e F4 RELEASE modifies the release time of the envelope Values from 0 to 63 default 32 F5 LEVEL modifies the envelope level Values from 26 to 63 default 32 e F6 RESONANCE modifies the resonance level Values from 0 to 63 default 32 e F7 CUTOFF modifies the cutoff frequency Values from 0 to 63 default 32 e F8 DCA OFFSET modifies the OFFSET of the DCA Digital Controlled Amplifier envelope In other words it raises lowers the influence on the amplifier Values from 0 to 63 default 32 e F9 DCF OFFSET modifies the OFFSET of the DCF Digital Controlled Filter envelope In other words it raises lowers the influence on the filter Values from 0 to 63 default 32 e F10 LFO The F10 button opens a further edit page to modify LFO parameters Figure 92 that is the parameters of the Low Frequency Oscillator D KETRON AUDYA NICE BALLAD EL ee
117. the MSP function press the WAVE button choose a file from the list in the WAVE folder and press the EDIT button B Creating an MSP 1 Select a WAV format file from the WAVE folder and press ENTER to load the file into memory Figure 245 By using the F1 F10 buttons you can access the following functions F1 START sets the start of the note range on the keyboard Press a button on the keyboard for the automatic assignment Figure 246 or use the DATA VALUE wheel or the CURSOR lt 4 gt F2 END sets the end of the note range Figure 247 as described above F3 KEY sets the basic pitch Press a button on the keyboard for the automatic assignment F4 PITCH it can be TRACKING that is tuned for each button of the keyboard or FIXED that is with fixed pitch for any keys of the keyboard F5 FINE fine tuning of the sound up to 99 cents of a semitone F6 VOL sets the output volume F7 CUTOFF sets the cutoff frequency low cut filter F8 EP END POINT sets where the sound ends F9 LP LOOP POINT sets where the sound loops By using the USER 1 button PAGE you can jump to a further screen to edit the parameters of the sample Figure 248 By using the F1 F10 buttons you can access the following functions F1 ATTACK sets the attack time of the envelope F2 DECAY sets the decay time of the envelope F3 SUSTAIN sets the sustain level of the envelope F4 RELEASE sets the re
118. the drum by using the F1 F10 buttons and the DATA VALUE wheel or by using the CURSOR lt 4 gt buttons O2 KETRON AUDYA HL CFV LAG Sel Stren E r Jd ur E J TRUE CN zx on jama on TET Latin eti eu LaTi en 59 foe on TRUM MITRE STYLI wirkt Gel bite alt LI tpe Hg Dun idi E N j jJ 7 Figure 215 mur wrap rii PALM cu ejua e we Jae nm E T d gt i LE Lb S Fn BALL AD BE n O i 3 aere 1 DEC MITES FE al EJ i haii c Lr TR X CHA TOM i DE MIYXER CTULE RE YERS 46 MIXER STE SE TE it c Tie hinds e e T MEL Dua bati creded Lone PR TE E 1 sai yg a Figure 218 The available values are from 64L to and to 63 that is totally to the left in the centre and totally to the right Figure 219 By pressing the CURSOR lt 4 buttons together you set the PAN value in the centre B DRUM REMAP USER 4 By pressing DRUM REMAP you can access the window where to set a custom map for the percussive parts of the drum By using the F1 F10 buttons you can select the percussion and then assign the instrument directly to one note of the keyboard
119. the original waveform End Max 8 s Once you ll select a new Start F2 End F3 o Fade U1 6 point the Blue transport bar colour will be changed on red just to inform on new operating status point All values are editable by alpha Dial step by step or by cursor quickly edit Arrows cursor pressed Left amp Right at the same time will restore default value of Start End point and will clear any previous Fade setting Using up or down arrows will be useful to catch Zero crossing function automatically As showed on Figure 22 when a new parameter will be selected a Preview Restore e Save tab will appear on bottom of display Player Wave Etit 42 ROMAHTIC GRAND end Dark Ensemble PIAMO Page 1 BALLAD ARRANGER A Tempo Transp Vw AVE LEAD DE ample GLOBE VIEW giTaoswinaivacallute txt Lcon O1TooswinglvocalMute way 0 0z Age af Rack vacal txt O02 Age of Rock Vvocal way ZU0M OFF Alto Sax exercise wav Transp J Baroque wav MARKER Big Band 1 Take the way W AWE EDIT f Big Band 2wa A Chill Gutar MY FOLDERS ay clean Live Guitar wav MERT gt gt CINTERNAL is Figure 20 ume I 42 ROMANTIC GRAND BALLAD ARRANGER Tempo Transp end Dark Ensemble PIAMO Page 1 tx ix zoom ix Age of Rock YocalMute by Munrmy wav Start E 2422584 2422504 ee NORM Time 00 55 eee eee Fadesooms
120. the part and assign the MIDI channel from 1 to 16 by using the CURSOR lt 4 gt buttons or the DATA VALUE wheel F1 Right F2 Left F3 Bass F4 Drum1 F5 Drum2 F6 Global global channel of the keyboard F7 Registration F8 Voicetron F9 ARRANGER CHORDS opens another window F10 VOICE DRAWBAR opens another window ARRANGER CHORDS By pressing the F9 button a window will appear where to assign the MIDI reception channels Figure 270 Assign the MIDI channel from 1 to 16 by using the CURSOR a gt buttons or the DATA VALUE wheel F1 Chord1 F2 Chord2 F3 Chord3 F4 Chord4 F5 Chord5 F6 Lower1 F7 Lower2 F8 Live Chord L Mono F9 Live Chord R VOICE DRAWBAR Press the F10 button to open a window like Figure 271 By pressing the F1 F10 buttons or the CURSOR LT CT 4 ABE ai LE Wk 13 Dem Figure 270 m amp OW pnt oR TET CRAIE bral Vien is ee Mea Jake ind ar I Fenizmm E iret ara 1 pii ie En u iut E ga 7 A V buttons you select the parts to which assign the MIDI reception channel from 1 to 16 by using the CURSOR lt 4 gt buttons or the DATA VALUE wheel F1 Voice1 F2 Voice2 F3 Voice3 F4 2ndVoice1 F5 2ndVoice2 F6 GM RAM Voices F7 Drawbar F8 Click F9 Percussion KETRON e AUDYA 107 FILTER PROG CHANGE RX From the first screen of the MIDI menu by pressing the F7 button a win
121. value 0 127 or Style linked value related Style Parameter 86 KETRON AUDYA BALLAD 3 SWEET_AARK ix bal Tn Pare Fe iml m i Transp EL Page 1 La Poir E Enc Bus a OFF eh fo al BASS ALTERNATE OFF PHLEL SLLLCTIUM Fee 1 ipM c3 bow s 5 3 3 LOWEN SLOW PALAD 43 Fas LAD Aber wil Pics Stet eased i Transp EL PIR Page 1 ae Bees E BASS ALTERNATE OFF E SELECTION P 1 3 T i ipM oa ibam 43 5 j 3 LUND Lowth E Figure 198 SLOW BALLAD 63 CONCERT_GRAND end Stringsl PIAMO Page 1 BASS TO ROOT OFF sustar OFF RETRIGGER OFF PEDAL TQ CHORD OFF PEDALBOARD OFF PEDAL DYNAMIC Mormal MoMo POLY Poly Prauier BASIC BASS OFF OCTAVE BASS ALTERNATE OFF PRESET SELECTION Page 1 Split C3 Octave E CN DRUM BOSS CHORD LOWER MODES 1f2 DRUM 1 2 ETSSSEREEME CHORD 1 2 LOWER Figure 199 BALLAD Grand Piana Tempo 76 Transp SLOW BALLAD 63 SWEET MARK BALLAD Grand Piana 2nd Diaipad Tempo 76 Transp EL PIANO Page 1 BASS TO ROOT OFF susTaIN OFF RETRIGGER OFF PEDAL CHORD OFF PEDALBOARD OFF PEDAL DYNAMIC a MONO POLY Poly PraNIST BASIC BASS OFF OCTAVE gil Bass ALTERMATE OFF PRESET SELECTION Page 1 Split C3 ctawe 53 53 55 D
122. with high frequencies cut Loudness bass and high frequencies boost User equalization set by the user LowCut By pressing the USER 2 button you can set a low cut equalization that is a high pass filter on sound Useful when you must cancel booming frequencies or to eliminate pop noises from the voice Figure 362 HighCut By pressing the USER 3 button you set a high cut equalization that is a low pass filter on sound Useful when you must cancel hissing frequencies or to eliminate feedback effects on the microphone Figure 363 Loudness By pressing the button USER 4 you set an equalization with bass and high frequencies boost Useful when in must enhance the frequencies in too absorbing rooms at too low volume Figure 364 In other words the natural loss at quite volumes of low and high frequencies by the human ear is compensated User By pressing the USER 5 button you set an equalization made by the user Useful when you must recall a particular equalization for different gigs Figure 365 The User Preset is stored together the Voicetron Preset as explained on the next page 136 KETRON AUDYA i fe n 1 n 7 Fay fs ee Vocis adi un POLIT Z7 WI p Sage EO Dm a Da 5 a EF m GHENT Len Figure 362 TUA d Ad ds 4 EET E a nu LN m se TIN aw mola voca Ti aim tete mS PEEEIT AF
123. without being in drum mode will result in muting the shifter no beat is detected when not in drum mode so no sound will be output 188 kETRON AUDYA B Lead voice NRPN NRPN NRPN Data MSB Default value Parameter MSB LSB 97 Jo Q 127 127 Lead level input voice output level 7 64 127 64 Lead pan same as control 10 on lead MIDI channel LC Voice transform parameters 40 64 88 Transpose 24 0 24 semitones 0 64 127 Formant formant control Tone frequency low pass filter resonance frequency 2 4 5 o Jen 6a Tone resonance low pass filer resonance intensity ibrato delay 0 3 seconds B Harmony voices NRPN NRPN NRPN Data MSB Default value Parameter MSB LSB 0 127 Harmony global level harmony parts global level same as Control 7 on channel HC Acts on all the harmony voices as a global volume control without overwriting the independent harmony part levels NRPN 99 06 to 99 10 Harmony voice N volume is Harmony Global level Harmony voice N volume overwrite this setting overwrite this setting overwrite this setting overwrite this setting overwrite this setting 07 i hi 0 64 27 0 64 127 e Voedfomam oo Voedfomam 16 0 38 38 Voice 1 tone frequency harmony voice low pass filter cutoff frequency Voice 2 tone frequency KETRON AUDYA 189 ss pe 038 388 voice Bone frequency se he 0 38 38 Voice4to
124. 0 8 TriangleO2 34 MetronomeO02 82 ShakerOl 35 Kick27 83 ShakerO2 36 Kickl5 84 Sticks02 37 Rimshotll 85 ClapO2 38 Snare076 86 Tambourinel 39 ClapOl 87 Rimshot20 40 Snare077 88 Snare087 41 TomO07 89 Snare045 42 Stick06 90 SnareO061 43 Tom08 amp 9 Kick22 44 Stickl8 92 Kick02 45 TomO9 93 Stick10 46 MiddleOl 94 Stick18 TomlO Reverse Toml1 Applause Crash02 Belltree Toml2 Empty RideOl Empty Crash13 Empty RidebellO1 Empty TambourineO Empty Crash04 Empty 56 CowbellO 104 Empty 57 Crash05 105 Empty 58 Vibraslap 106 Empty 59 Ride03 107 Empty 60 Bongo Hi 108 Empty 61 Bongo Low 109 Empty 29 Scratch Up 77 W Block Lo 30 Scratch Down 78 Cuica0l 31 SticksOl 79 Cuica02 32 Click 80 TriangleOl 33 Metronome0Ol 8 TriangleO2 34 MetronomeO02 82 ShakerOl 35 Kick36 83 Shaker0O2 36 Kick02 84 SticksO2 37 Rimshotl2 85 ClapOl 38 Snare078 86 Tambourinel 39 Clap03 87 Rimshot02 40 Snare091 88 SnareOll 41 TomO07 89 SnareOl2 42 Stick12 90 SnareO013 43 Tom08 9 Stick02 44 Close09 92 OpenO04 45 TomO09 93 OpenO2 46 Open03 94 Close02 47 Tomio 95 Reverse 48 Tomll 96 Applause 49 Crash02 97 Belltree 50 Toml2 98 Empty 5 RideOl 99 Empty 52 Crash03 100 Empty 53 RidebellOl 101 Empty 54 TambourineO 102 Empty 55 Crash04 103 Empty 56 Cowbell0l 104 Empty 57 Crash05 105 Empty 58 Vibraslap 106 Empty 59 RideO2 107 Empty 60 Bongo Hi 108 Empty 61 Bongo Low 109 Empty Rap Program Change 59 14 SnareO001 62 Conga S
125. 0 BRASS SWG O8 71 BRASS SWG O09 72 BRASS SWG 10 61 BRAS SAMB 62 BRAS_SAMB_02 17 FISABEGUIN 18 FISABEGUIN 02 19 FISABEGUIN 03 20 FISAFOX 01 21 FISAFOX 02 22 FISAFOX 03 23 FISAFOX 04 24 FISAMAZURK 01 us I gt O p G e NO h I NININIJIN NI OO O11 amp I gt O p C N N Co NO UO D gt o O p 0 Co 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 N Ko E UD I gt Co O p C e Co e O NO CO D gt CD p G o 82 BSYNT 30 84 8SYNT_32 86 BSYNT 34 88 BSYNT 36 1 J8SYNTT OD H Co o 3 sa 2 o o 2 zZ o NO UJ JJ 2 OD ie gt UJ O N Co Co o H o TI 8 Co o NO ce TI NO EF cH Co N NO NO T O NO Co NO cH 154 KETRON AUDYA Live Guitar 6B ELECT 1 6B ELECT 2 6B FOLK 1 6B FOLK 2 6 SMOOTH STEPS TH MUTE TH SHUFFLE 8MARCH 1 8MARCH 2 B ELECT B FOLK 1 27 BB FOLK 4 ALLAD 1 e a 35 3 O Co Co Ke Eid d d OPE E mim B olcicicoio r rir OITA S m gt gt P zz Zz o o SI fof dz jS Co Co Co N N O JJ x Co PIEIEIEIEIE o o 9e E I 23 x zx S S
126. 002 65 Timbales Hi 18 Snare003 66 Timbales Lo 19 Snare004 67 Agogo_Hi 20 Snare005 68 Agogo Low 2 Snare006 69 Cabasa 22 Tom 70 MaracasOl 23 Tom Flam02 71 WhistleOl 24 CrashOl 72 WhistleO2 25 Snare007 73 Guiro0l 26 Fingsnap OI 74 Guiro02 27 Slap 75 ClavesOl 28 Snare008 76 W_Block_Hi 29 Scratch Up 77 W_Block_Lo 30 Scratch Down 78 Cuica0l 31 SticksOl 79 Cuica02 32 Click 80 TriangleOl 33 MetronomeOl 8 TriangleO2 34 Metronome02 82 ShakerOl 35 Kickl8 83 ShakerO2 36 84 SticksO2 37 Rimshotl7 85 Castagnet 38 Snare019 86 TambourineOl 39 ClapOl 87 Rimshot02 40 Snare020 88 SnareOll 41 0 89 SnareO012 42 Stick08 90 Snare013 43 Tom02 91 MiddleO 44 Stick10 92 Stick02 45 Tom03 93 Close02 Drum Set 59 Ride02 107 Empty 60 Bongo Hi 108 Empty 61 Bongo Low 109 Empty Melorap Program Change 84 14 SnareO0l 62 Conga Slap 15 RollOl 63 Conga Hi 16 Roll02 64 Conga Low 17 SnareO002 65 Timbales Hi 18 Snare003 66 Timbales Lo 19 Snare004 67 Agogo_Hi 20 Snare005 68 Agogo Low 21 Snare006 69 Cabasa 22 Tom FlamO 70 MaracasOl 23 Tom Flam02 71 WhistleOl 24 Crash0Ol 72 WhistleO2 25 Snare007 73 Guiro0l 26 Fingsnap OI 74 Guiro02 27 Slap 75 ClavesOl 28 Snare008 76 W Block Hi 29 Scratch Up 77 W Block Lo 30 Scratch Down 78 CuicaO0l 3 Sticks
127. 02 71 WhistleOl 24 Crash0l 72 Whistle0O2 25 SnareO007 73 GuiroO 26 Fingsnap 0 74 Guiro02 27 Slap 75 ClavesOl 28 Snare008 76 W Block Hi 29 Scratch Up 77 W Block Lo 30 Scratch Down 8 Cuica0l 31 Stick21 79 Cuica02 32 Click 80 TriangleOl 178 KETRON AUDYA 33 MetronomeO0 8 TriangleO2 34 MetronomeO2 82 ShakerOl 35 Kick21 83 ShakerO2 36 KIck22 84 Stick21 37 Rimshotl6 85 Clap09 38 Snare087 86 Tambourinel 39 ClapOl 87 RimshotO05 Snare033 Snare039 0 Snare040 Stick27 Snare04 Tom02 Kick17 Closel4 Kick15 Tom03 MiddleO8 OpenO5 Stick13 Tom04 Reverse Tom05 Applause 49 Crash02 97 Belltree 50 Tom06 98 Empty 5 RideOl 99 Empty 52 Crash03 100 Empty 53 RidebellOl 101 Empty 54 TambourineO 102 Empty 55 Crash04 103 Empty 56 Cowbell 104 Empty 57 Crash05 105 Empty 58 Vibraslap 106 Empty 59 Ride03 107 Empty 60 Bongo_Hi 108 Empty 61 Bongo_Low 109 Empty Urban Program Change 87 SnareOOl Conga Slap RollO1 Conga_Hi Roll02 Conga Low Snare002 Timbales Hi Snare003 Timbales Lo Snare004 Agogo Hi SnareO005 Agogo Low Snare006 Cabasa Tom Flam01 MaracasOl Tom Flam02 Whistle01 CrashOl Whistle02 Snare007 GuiroO Fingsnap 01 Guiro02 Slap ClavesOl Snare008 W_Block_Hi Scratch Up W_Block_Lo Scratch Down Cuica0l SticksO1 Cuica02 Click TriangleOl Metronome0Ol Triangle02 Metronome02 ShakerOl Kick14 Shaker02 Kick45 Sticks02 Rimshot06 Castagnet Snare039 TambourineOl ClapOl Rimshot12 Snare030 Snar
128. 09 93 StickO7 46 OpenO4 94 MiddleO6 47 Tomio 95 Reverse 48 Tomll 96 Applause 49 Crash02 97 Belltree 50 Toml2 98 Empty 5 RideOl 99 Empty 52 Crash03 100 Empty 53 RidebellO 101 Empty 54 TambourineO 102 Empty 55 Crash04 103 Empty 56 CowbellO 104 Empty 57 Crash05 105 Empty 58 Vibraslap 106 Empty 59 Ride02 107 Empty 60 Bongo Hi 108 Empty 61 Bongo Low 109 Empty Smooth Program Change 77 14 SnareO0l 62 Conga Slap 15 RollOl 63 Conga Hi 16 Roll02 64 Conga Low 17 Snare002 65 Timbales Hi 18 Snare003 66 Timbales Lo 19 Snare004 67 Agogo_Hi 20 Snare005 68 Agogo Low 21 Snare006 69 Cabasa 22 Tom Flam0l 70 MaracasOl 23 Tom Flam02 71 WhistleOl 24 Crash0Ol 72 WhistleO2 25 Snare007 73 Guiro0l 26 Fingsnap OI 4 Guiro02 27 Slap 75 ClavesOl 28 Snare008 76 W Block Hi 29 Scratch Up 77 W Block Lo 30 Scratch Down 78 Cuica0l 31 SticksOl 79 Cuica02 32 Click 80 TriangleOl 33 MetronomeOl 8 TriangleO2 34 MetronomeO02 82 ShakerOl 35 Kick35 83 ShakerO2 36 Kick32 84 SticksO2 37 Rimshotl6 85 Clap02 38 Snare083 86 TambourineOl 39 Clap06 87 Rimshotl2 40 Snare081 88 Snare077 4 TomO7 89 Snare060 42 Stick13 90 SnareO61 Drum Set
129. 0h User 01h ElPiano 11h Program 02h Chrom 12h Touch O3h Organ 13h Preset 33h Page Up 04h Accordion 14h Style 05h Guitar 15h Ramsound 06 Bass 16h Sec voice 07h String 17h Transpose Down 20h F1 21h F2 22h F3 23h F4 24h F5 25h F6 26h F7 27h F8 38h Fill In 39h Fill2 3ah Fill3 3bh Break 30h Cursor Down 31h Value Down 32h Value Up 34h Page Down 35h SPlit 36h MIDIFfile 37h WAVE KETRON e AUDYA 193 08 Choir O9h Brass Oah Sax Obh Flute Och Pad Odh Synt Oeh Ethnic Ofh Effect 40h NuO Folk 41h Nu1 Ballad 42h Nu2 Pop 43h Nu3 Dance 44h Nu4 Party 45h Nu5 RockSoul 46h Nu6 Country 47h Nu7 SwingJazz 48h Nu8 Latin 49h Nu9 RockRoll 4ah Unplagged 4bh Ballroom 4ch Octave Down 4dh Octave Up 4eh GM Part 4fh Style View REVERB 18h Transpose Up 19h Stream List 1ah Harmony 1bh Menu 1ch Save 1dh Edit 1eh Enter 1fh Exit 50h TempoSlow 51h TempoFast 52h GM Voice 53h Dial Up 54h Dial Down 55h Fade 56h FREE2 57h Voicetron 58h Rot OnOff 59h Rot SlowFast 5ah DrumSet 5bh Pattern 5ch Playlist 5dh Rewind 5eh Forward 5fh Line In Reverb Type for compatibility SD series FO 26 7B 00 00 Type F7 Reverb Type right Type FO 26 7B 10 03 Rev Type F7 Reverb Type left gm FO 26 7B 14 03 Rev Type F7 Reverb Type style FO 26 7B 1f 00 Rev Type F7 Rev Type Reverb Level FO 26 7B 02 00 Rev Level F7 Rev Level Reverb Level style FO 26 7B 20 OO Rev Level F7 Rev Level
130. 1 PAGE2 F8 TRILL The types of HARMONY marked by an asterisk on the table above are special effects of trill repetition and echo You can access the speed parameter SPEED for these special effects by pressing repeatedly the USER 2 button below the display The available SPEED values are 6 8 12 and 24 In the example shown in Figure 143 if you select the TRILL effect you will hear the trill effect produced by the note played at right or left of the starting note You can modify the speed of the trill by using the SPEED parameter corresponding to the USER 2 button 66 KETRON AUDYA SLOW _BALLAD 63 CONCERT_GRAND end StringsL PIANC Page 1 us FULL FOLK JAZZ TRILL JAZZ REPEAT 2 HANDS ECHO PRESET SELECTION Page 1 Split C3 Hetaa lt a BALLAD Grand Piana Tempo 76 Transp ORUP Bass CHORD LOWER C Ma Speed 4 Next Page Figure 142 63 CONCERT_GRAND 2nd Stringsl PIAMO Page 1 FULLI FULL FOLK m JAZZ REPEAT 2 HANDS ECHO PRESET SELECTION Page 1 Split C3 BALLAD Grand Piana Tempo 76 Transp UM RA Babs CHORD LOWER d SCENE et Page Figure 143 Style View From the STYLE section on the front panel you can select a style by using the numeric keypad If the style uses an Audio Style Modeling please note that a symbol appears before the style name other
131. 1 0 BLA 1 T RE T 63 FM PIANLO ROTOR E PRO 1 OPERATUR E FIABCL PAD DELAY E PLANO PESE PELLET OF Fras ipit C3 58 a1 Lr 41 co Figure 252 _ BALLAD ihi IET a i T T BEI EU UP zd EMPTY VOKE EMPTY VORE EMPTY VORCE Figure 253 KETRON e AUDYA 101 User Voice List B What is a User Voice List The new User Voice List is controlled from the Voice group Effect SFX can be edited independently from the others User Voices and can be associated to Style Midi Mp3 and Wave for an automatic recall User Voice List files with extension UVL are located per default on folder C USER VOICE LIST into 4 subfolders Midi Mp3 Style Wave In alternative they can be set automatically on Menu KEYBOARD CONTROL gt UTILITY gt PAGE 2 4 gt Player Autoload and Text UVL or UVL Figure 254 PIE L4 ae B How to save your User Voice List Edit menu is the same used for standard Voice List Seer vM aT T Make your modifications on the 20 Voices of the List mi ra c RR s des provided on EFFECT SFX group You can Save it in 2 ways 1 Save together with the entire Voice List on folder C SYSTEM INIT VOICELIST TOU by pressing USER 5 10 SAVE 2 Save just the individual User Voice List by pressing USER 4 9 SAVE UVL
132. 1 button MICRO1 you can choose one of the following options F3 REVERB F4 ECHO F5 TRANSFORM F6 COMPRESSOR F7 LIMITER F8 EQUALIZER F9 VIBRATO F10 PITCH MICRO2 By selecting the F2 button MICRO2 you can choose one of the following options F3 REVERB F4 ECHO REVERB By selecting the F3 button a REVERB screen like Figure 341 will appear where you can choose one of the available reverbs by using the CURSOR A V buttons or the DATA VALUE wheel ECHO By selecting the F4 button a ECHO screen like Figure 342 will appear where you can choose one of the available Echo effects by using the CURSOR A W buttons or the DATA VALUE wheel Stereo Triplet TRANSFORM By selecting the F5 button a TRANSFORM screen only for MICRO1 like Figure 343 will appear where you can choose one of the available Transform effects by using the CURSOR A V buttons or the DATA VALUE wheel COMPRESSOR By selecting the F6 button a COMPRESSOR screen only for MICRO1 like Figure 344 will appear where you can choose one of the available compressors by using the CURSOR A YW buttons or the DATA VALUE wheel Voicetron _ RN pug s darn TM rect draw T Tiri el I CONCERT GIEAND OT e Dart oom ER E sare una Hall Leng fed i twt Pats ENUIE Yren Pits i ie a TANFOR Pit P 1 E 1 TIC Phu 1 sert C3 lobe FF 1 L _ Ne ous CERES J
133. 2 Thin Strato 62 Ac Nyloni 63 64 a 3 ES NN 6 BR 9 10 EUN 13 ETE 15 16 17 19 20 EN 22 23 ES 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 NO C Drum Set N DRUMSET tandard1 tandard2 oom Gm2 ower Gm2 ectro Gim2 azz Gm2 nalog Gm2 tandard Gim2 olk coustic1 azzDry Vintage 15 Acoustic2 17 Rock 25 House O 01 0 00 A S AIOIOOINININ c co oOo 4 Io Co O CO CO NO NO O 146 KETRON AUDYA N jVOICE Co olk Deep inger Slap etro nbass9 nbass10 nbass11 nbass12 ynbass13 ass amp Guit3 ingerpick taccato wing Tpt ean Detune ountry Slide tin Tenor atin Bariton Ise2 m Lead2 ynth23 nth6 ynth7 ariachi N lt lt DIT TOIU lt lt 2 c 5 TIA x cH i CD e TI U r CD lt CD ide Horns nth9 lughorn 2 nth12 ana ynth13 NO Alo mioiz wize lili 0p D ct O 2 CD N DRUMSET i rush Gm2 rchestra Gm2 rchestra tudio 8 ightPop SE Kit Orchestra Gm2 Orchestra Studio LightPop Rap Hip Box Modern 6 CD lt ad oo Church Detune HealBrass Bass amp Piano1 Bass amp Piano2 Parisienne Jazz Slide Country_
134. 2 7 rop FUNK LOR Split C3 Octave BALLAD Grand Piana Tempo 76 Transp 53 53 CMa DRUM BASS CHORD LOWER Ma VOICE EFFECT PAM MUTE SINGLE Figure 150 SLOVW_BALLAD 63 CONCERT_GRAND end StringsL BALLAD Grand Piana Tempo 6 Transp PIANO Page 1 audio Drum chi 16 76 41 e Piano 36 Drumz chz STAMDARD1 25 pane 3t Bass chs Precision 40 Pianon 24 Low ArpaLick Diaipad 12 30 scuIT_03 36 Low Live Guikar ElPiano_Detune 12 Top FUNK 0 Split C3 Octave B3 B3 B3 DELI BASS CHORD LOWER CMaj oOo Ma VOICE EFFECT MUTE METE Figure 151 Audio Style Modeling The Audio Style Modeling is the powerful system of Audya sound engine The place where you can model the style is the Style View section e By entering the Style View section you can see all the sections of the style on the display Normally if you select a section you can change the Program Change by using the DATA VALUE wheel or choosing directly the sound You can control the volume with the CURSOR buttons e On some sections by pressing twice the button you can access directly to a specific Library of that section The tables of the Library can work in place of the MIDI parts usually programmed for the Style e By pressing twice the F1 F2 F3 F6 F7 F8 F9 and F10 buttons you can select from the Audio Style Modeling Libraries
135. 2 34 Metronome02 82 ShakerOl 35 Kick03 83 ShakerO2 36 Kick13 84 SticksO2 37 85 Castagnet 38 Snare023 86 Kick40 39 Snare024 87 Kick39 40 Snare025 88 Empty 4 0 89 Empty 42 StickOl 90 Empty 43 Tom02 9 Empty 44 Close0l 92 Empty 45 03 93 Empty 46 OpenOl 94 Empty 47 Tom04 95 Empty 48 0 96 Empty 49 Crash02 97 Empty 50 Tom06 98 Empty 5 RideOl 99 Empty 52 Crash03 100 Empty 53 RidebellO 101 Empty 54 TambourineO 102 Empty 55 Crash04 103 Empty 56 CowbellO1 104 Empty 57 Crash05 105 Empty 58 Vibraslap 106 Empty 59 RideO2 107 Empty 60 Bongo HIi 108 Empty 61 Bongo Low 109 Empty Sfx Kit Program Change 47 14 Empty 62 Belltree 15 Empty 63 Engine 16 Empty 64 Car Stop 17 Empty 65 Car Pass 18 Empty 66 Car Crash 19 Empty 67 Sirene 20 Empty 68 Train 21 Empty 69 Jet 22 Empty 70 Helicopter 23 Empty 7 Starship 24 Empty 72 Gunshot 25 Empty 73 Machine Gun 26 Empty 4 Laser 27 Empty 75 Explosion 28 Empty 76 Dog Drum Set 29 Empty 77 Horse Gallop 30 Empty 78 Bird 3 Empty 79 Rain 32 Empty 80 Thunder 33 Empty 81 Wind Seashore River Bubble SnareO08 Scratch Up Scratch Down SticksOl Click MetronomeO MetronomeO02 Empty Fret Noise Empty Empty Empty Empty Empty Empty Empty Pfif amp Jew Empty Laughing Empty Screaming Empty Punch Empty
136. 2 Snare007 GuiroO Fingsnap 01 Guiro02 Slap ClavesOl Snare008 W Block Hi ScratchOl W_Block_Lo Scratch02 Cuica0Ol Sticks0O1 Cuica02 Click TriangleOl Metronome0Ol TriangleO2 MetronomeO02 ShakerO01 Kick34 Shaker02 Kick51 Sticks02 Rimshotl2 Clap03 Snare037 Tambourinel Clap13 Rimshot12 Snare076 Snare041 Snare033 Snare042 Kick20 Kick23 Stick23 OpenO Reverse Applause Belltree Tom31 RideOl Crash03 RidebellO1 El Percussion Crash04 Cowbell01 Crash05 Vibraslap 59 Ride02 107 Empty 60 Bongo_Hi 108 Empty 61 Bongo_Low 109 Empty 39 Clapl2 87 Rimshot0Ol 40 SnareO61l 88 Snare039 41 Tom20 89 Snare040 42 Stick21 90 Snare070 43 2 9 Kick45 44 CloselO 92 Kickl5 45 Tom22 93 MiddleO5 46 OpenO5 94 MiddleOl 47 Tom23 95 Reverse 48 Tom24 96 Applause 49 Crash02 97 Belltree 50 Tom25 98 Empty 5 RideOl 99 Empty 52 Crash03 100 Empty 53 RidebellO 101 Empty 54 TambourineO 102 Empty 55 Crash04 103 Empty 56 Cowbell0l 104 Empty 57 Crash05 105 Empty 58 Vibraslap 106 Empty 59 Ride03 107 Empty 60 Bongo HIi 108 Empty 61 Bongo Low 109 Empty SnareO01 Conga Slap RollO1 Conga_Hi Roll02 Conga Low Snare002 Timbales Hi Snare003 Timbales Lo Snare004 Agogo Hi SnareO005 Agogo Low Snare006 Cabasa Tom Flam0O MaracasOl Tom Flam02 WhistleO1 24 CrashO0l 72 WhistleO2 25 Snare007 73 GuiroOl 26 Fingsnap OI 74 Guiro02 27 Slap 75 Cla
137. 30 Scratch Down 8 Cuica0l 9 SticksOl 79 Cuica02 32 Click 80 TriangleOl 33 MetronomeO 8 TriangleO2 34 Metronome02 82 ShakerOl 35 Kick15 83 ShakerO2 36 Kickl7 84 SticksO2 37 Rimshotl9 85 Clap04 38 Snare074 86 Tambourinel 39 Clap03 87 Rimshot0Ol 40 Snare076 88 Snare016 4 Tom38 89 Snare034 42 StickO7 90 Snare036 43 Tom4l 9 Stick08 44 Stick08 92 Stickl11 45 Tom40 93 MiddleOI 46 MiddleO8 94 StickO06 47 Tom40 95 MiddleO6 48 Tom39 96 Applause 49 Crash02 97 Belltree 50 Tom39 98 Empty 5 Ride03 99 Empty 52 Crash03 100 Empty 53 RidebellO1 101 Empty 54 TambourineO 102 Empty 55 Crash04 103 Empty 56 Cowbell0l 104 Empty 57 Crash05 105 Empty 58 Vibraslap 106 Empty 59 RideOl 107 Empty 60 Bongo Hi 108 Empty 61 Bongo Low 109 Empty Empty TambourineO Pop Super Kit Program Change 91 Empty Close07 Empty Clap04 Empty Clap02 Empty Clap03 Empty Clap0Ol Empty Fingsnap02 Kick54 FingsnapOl 3 Tambora0Ol Kick53 Tambora03 4 Empty Snare075 Empty Roll05 Empty Snare073 Empty Kick52 Empty Kick53 Empty Rimshot21 Empty Snare072 Empty SnareO068 Empty Snare064 Empty Tom38 Empty 14 Empty 62 WhistleOl 15 Empty 63 WhistleO2 16 Empty 64 GuiroOl 17 Empty 65 Guiro02 18 Empty 66 Open07 19
138. 37 the selected USER DRUM SET is MY DRUM NOTE Please see all the DRUM SET lists and the percussive instruments included into the drum sets in the Sounds section of this manual O6 KETRON AUDYA Pea RECTION Er er 7 Figure 233 Gm TEH x aoe aa PSST HE od Tu EF ge pem o Hund oo Ix Figure 234 ETT IE ui FR T GAAHI w bam n coget CT LST Pee wi tala 11 d 17 L Oar Figure 235 Or Dee ira uM ENIM aT 4 Lem an Fags Ti a a iam d Figure 237 Drawbars By pressing the DRAWBARS button on the VOICE section you switch the DRAWBARS mode on For the selection of the different organ types please see Selecting the organ DRAWBARS on page 20 Creating a new organ DRAWBARS To create a new type of organ Drawbars select one of the 20 organs available from the two DRAWBARS pages Figure 238 Drawhars ORGANI end Stringsl PIAMMO Page 1 SLOW BALLAD 63 BALLAD Grand Piana Tempo 756 Transp FLILLI F7 Lr1 ET L1 ET RES PRESET SELECTIOM Page 1 1 Press the EDIT button on the front panel to Gd CS access the edit window The F1 F10 buttons AUR o m
139. 45 Kick40 Clap01 Snare046 Kick39 Tom43 Stick28 Tom44 CloselO Tom45 OpenO5 Tom46 Tom47 Crash02 Tom48 Reverse Crash03 RidebellO1 TambourineO Crash04 Cowbell01 Crash05 Vibraslap Empty RideO2 Empty Bongo Hi Empty Bongo Low Empty 40 Snare010 88 Empty 41 TomO07 89 Empty 42 StickOl 90 Empty 43 Tom08 9 Empty 44 CloseOl 92 Empty 45 TomO09 93 Empty 46 OpenOl 94 Empty 47 Tomio 95 Empty 48 Tomll 96 Empty 49 Crash02 97 Empty 50 Toml2 98 Empty 5 RideOl 99 Empty 52 Crash03 100 Empty 53 RidebellO 101 Empty 54 TambourineO 102 Empty 55 Crash04 103 Empty 56 Cowbell0l 104 Empty 57 Crash05 105 Empty 58 Vibraslap 106 Empty 59 RideO2 107 Empty 60 Bongo Hi 108 Empty 61 Bongo Low 109 Empty Power Gm2 Program Change 4 14 Empty 62 Conga Slap 15 Empty 63 Conga Hi 16 Empty 64 Conga Low 17 Empty 65 Timbales Hi 18 Empty 66 Timbales Lo 19 Empty 67 Agogo_Hi 20 Empty 68 Agogo Low 21 Empty 69 Cabasa 22 Empty 70 MaracasOl 23 Empty 71 WhistleO 24 Empty 72 WhistleO2 25 Empty 73 GuiroOl 26 Empty 74 Guiro02 27 Fingsnap OI 75 ClavesOl 28 Slap 76 W Block Hi 29 Scratch Up 77 W Block Lo 30 Scratch Down 78 Cuica0l 31 SticksOl 79 Cuica02 32 Click 80
140. 6 Use Registration UP DOWN command on footswitch to browse on REGISTRATION BLOCK Registration mi wn 3 e F FL Eid MM Dic L Sarit Ballad CONCERT GRAND Slow ered Taraj OL L 61 STRINGS lat Wx Uber 3 GR PIANU ws d j L u IDE Nw Slow_Babad CONCERT_GRAND P nd vey i r x S TRINOSI HEUS cun Left ume d GRAND PLAHO Ls IN EE Mazurca KR Accordion MIT HUS FX uu T T T T iniu Arum wa I i LE ILI MMADUCW GE s Erum ama ee d Figure 136 KETRON AUDYA 63 Play List Play List By pressing the PLAY LIST button you can access the Play Lists stored on the hard disk In order to create a Play List follow the procedure below W Creating a PLAY LIST 1 Press the PLAY LIST button A screen like Figure 137 will appear showing a PLAY LIST demo 2 Select PLAY LIST DEMO by pressing CURSOR W and press the EDIT button Press the CREATE button User 1 Press one of the F1 F10 buttons For example F1 5 Press the WAVE button or MP3 SFX MIDI to select a song or a MIDI file and press ENTER The selected song MIDI file will be assigned to the F1 button 6 Press the F2 button and select another song MIDI file and press ENTER The song will be assigned to the F2 button 7 Dothe same for any other F1 F10 button Figure 138 8
141. 64 Conga Low 17 Empty 65 Timbales Hi 18 Empty 66 Timbales Lo 19 Empty 67 Agogo Hi 20 Empty 68 Agogo Low 21 Empty 69 Cabasa 22 Empty 70 MaracasOl 23 Empty 71 WhistleO 24 Empty 72 WhistleO2 25 Empty 73 GuiroOl 26 Empty 74 Guiro02 27 Fingsnap OI 75 ClavesOl 28 Slap 76 W Block Hi 29 Scratch Up 77 W Block Lo 30 Scratch Down 78 Cuica0l 31 SticksOl 79 Cuica02 32 Click 80 TriangleOl 33 Metronome0Ol 8 TriangleO2 34 Metronome02 82 ShakerOl 35 KickO4 83 ShakerO2 36 Kick02 84 Sticks02 37 RimshotO 85 Castagnet 38 Snare009 86 Kick40 39 ClapOl 87 Kick39 KETRON AUDYA 161 Drum Set 58 Vibraslap 106 Empty 59 RideO2 107 Empty 60 Bongo Hi 108 Empty 61 Bongo Low 109 Empty Electro Gm2 Program Change 5 14 Empty 62 Conga Slap 15 Empty 63 Conga Hi 16 Empty 64 Conga Low 17 Empty 65 Timbales Hi 18 Empty 66 Timbales Lo 19 Empty 67 Agogo Hi 20 Empty 68 Agogo Low 21 Empty 69 Cabasa Empty MaracasOl Empty Whistle0O1 Empty Whistle02 Empty GuiroO Clap11 Guiro02 Fingsnap 01 ClavesO1 Slap W_Block_Hi Scratch Up W_Block_Lo Scratch Down SticksOl CuicaOl Cuica02 Click TriangleOl MetronomeOl TriangleO2 MetronomeO02 ShakerOl Kick21 ShakerO02 KIck20 SticksO2 RimshotO 1 Castagnet Snare0
142. 6STRINGS 08 25 16STRINGS_09 26 1 T 27 1 T 02 8 16STRINGS T O3 Onorjjor Or O1j O01 01 3 43 42 43 43 43 3 o OIJ AJOIN Odo j Oo M O O1 AIIN O CO L e L e D DL a D L ook Oo 4 ek ek 60 62 1 NINJ ce NO NO A N A e OIN O a N NINININININ O O O1 G PO O BJ e B B 6SYNT 12 6SYNT 19 6SYNT 20 6SYNT 21 6SYNT 22 6SYNT 23 6SYNT 24 6SYNT 25 1 1 9 2 98 16SYNT_28 99 6SYNT 20 00 16SYNT_30 01 M6SYNT S1 02 168YNT 32 03 M68YNT 33 04 M6SYNT 34 6SYNT 36 6SYNT 37 6SYNT 38 6SYNT 39 6SYNT 40 6SYNT 41 6SYNT 42 15 16SYNT_45 16 16SYNT_46 43 3 AHARPSL 44 8 AHARPSL O2 4STRINGS 05 4STRINGS 06 4STRINGS 07 4STRINGS 08 4STRINGS 09 4STRINGS 10 2 3 4STRINGS 11 03 3 4STRINGS 12 04 3 4STRINGS 13 D Ke Co OO NININIJIN N JNJ O COIN O wee co h LA L L IL L IL I NO e CO h e I O PVI PV N N N N N N N N h LL Ac m ojldv o 1 o o
143. 7 QCONMCERT GRAND BALLAD arand Piana znd Stringsi Tempo 76 Transp PIANO Fage 1 Right 1 Global Left 5 Registration 16 Bass 5 oicetron us Crum 10 ARRANGER CHORDS Crum a YOICE DRAW BAR Split C3 Octave DRUM Bass CHORD LOWER Master Accordi Accord General Masterl Figure 261 SLOW _BALLAD 63 CONCERT_GRAND end StringsL PIANC Page 1 Chord 5 Lower 1 3 Chord B Lower 2 4 Chords B Live Chord LiManay Chord 11 Live Chord R se Chords 12 MIDI ARR CHORDS CHAN Split C3 s us DRUM Bass CHORD LOWER Master2 Accordi Accord General Masterl Figure 262 BALLAD Grand Piana Tempo 76 Transp SLOW_BALLAD 63 CONCERT_GRAND end StringsL PIANC Page 1 vnicel aM Ram Voice Voces Drawbar Voices CLiCE end voice Percussion BALLAD Grand Piana Tempo 76 Transp end Voice MIDI YOICE DRAW CHAM TX Split C3 itam us 53 53 63 53 Masterz Accordi Accord Figure 263 Bass CHORO LOWER General Masteri To return to the previous MENU page press the EXIT button on the front panel To exit the MENU window without saving changes press the MENU button KETRON AUDYA 105 General Master1 Master2 Accord1 Accord2 You can save the MIDI settings in five Preset assigned to the USER buttons from 1 to 5 General
144. 9 98 Empty 5 RideOl 99 Empty 52 Crash03 100 Empty 53 RidebellO 101 Empty 54 TambourineO 102 Empty 55 Crash04 103 Empty 56 Cowbell0l 104 Empty 57 Crash05 105 Empty 58 Vibraslap 106 Empty 59 Ride03 107 Empty 60 Bongo Hi 108 Empty 61 Bongo Low 109 Empty Kick amp Snare Program Change 79 14 Empty 62 Kick42 15 Empty 63 Kick22 16 Empty 64 Kick34 17 Empty 65 Kick38 18 Empty 66 Kick27 19 Empty 67 Kick43 20 Empty 68 Snare009 21 Empty 69 Snare010 22 Empty 70 SnareOl4 23 Empty 71 SnareO12 24 Empty 72 Snare013 25 Empty 73 SnareOl6 26 Empty 74 Snare017 27 Empty 75 Snare077 28 Empty 76 Snare034 29 Empty 77 Snare033 30 Empty 78 Snare056 31 Empty 79 Snare023 32 Empty 80 Snare024 33 Empty 8 Snare032 34 Empty 82 Snare029 35 Empty 83 Snare030 36 Empty 84 Snare070 37 KickO2 85 SnareO07 1 38 Kick03 86 Snare035 39 Kick04 87 Snare058 40 KickO05 88 Snare031 41 KickO6 89 Snare021 42 KickO7 90 Snare060 43 Kickl9 9 Snare074 44 Kick12 92 Snare037 45 Kick13 93 Snare36 46 Kick08 94 Snare38 47 Kickl4 95 Snare022 48 Kick15 96 SnareOll 49 Kickl7 97 Snare039 50 Kick29 98 Snare040 5 Kick28 99 Snare059 52 Kick30 100 Snare061 53 Kick31 101 Snare076 54 Kick35 102 Snare019 55 Kickl6 103 Snare041 56 Kick32 104 Snare020 57 KickOl 105 Snare042 58 Kick25 106 Snare045 59 Kick09 107 Snare069 60 Kick51 108 Empty 61 Kick36 109 Empty Jazz Brush Program Change 80 14 SnareO0l 62 Conga Slap 15 RollO1 63 Conga Hi 16 Roll02 64 Conga Low 17
145. AND D TNAPIANC HONKY TONK HARPSICHORD LATIN PLANO CLAVI EI split F2 Octave B3 53 B3 B3 DRUM GASS CHORD LOWER B 11 5 7 Figure 17 DAUM MIXER ih FART MODE VIEW USER ASSIGNABLE KETRON AUDYA 23 Mixer Mixer When the DRAWBARS mode is on the nine faders of the Mixer will adjust the footage of the organ For details see on page 20 and on page 97 The Mixer section features nine vertical faders The first fader at left allows to control the USER functions see User Assignable The remaining 5 faders control the volumes of the ARRANGER parts and 3 faders the volumes of the VOICES parts ARRANGER VOICES BASS OFCHESTAA LEAD BASS CHORD LOWER B USER This first fader at left allows to control the USER ASSIGNABLE functions described on page 140 The default value is the volume control for AUX 3 4 output B ARRANGER These five faders adjust the volumes of the When a MIDI file is playing on the Player see the details on page 25 the DRUM BASS CHORD and LOWER faders marked by MIDIMIX in blue letters adjust the volumes of the DRUM BASS ORCHESTRA and LEAD tracks respectively in the following way Arranger parts of the style Respectively STYLE MASTER main volume of the style DRUM drum part volume BASS bass part volume CHORD volume of the chords part DRUM adjusts the volume of the drum track BASS adjusts the volume of the bas
146. ANO Page 1 Time Left hi m41 525 Mame AUDIO OI Grand Piana Tempo 76 Transp NORMAL MIXON RECORD FILE MAME ERE IEEE Figure 327 Marne SLOW BALLAD 63 BALLAD ARRANGER D Tempo 76 Transp STRING_ENSEMBLE end Violin STRING Page 1 Time Left hi midi 5 28 Mame AUDIO NORMAL MEX DOWN IEEE lz c 81 11 1 1 1 1 1 PRESS 5 START OR ENTER TO BEGIN RECORDING emcees STOP REC L H Figure 328 Recording an MP3 file 1 Press the MENU button and the F8 button AUDIO RECORDING to enter the audio recording environment Press the F1 button MP3 RECORDING to choose MP3 recording Follow the same procedure for WAV file recording The recorded MP3 file will be created in the MP3 folder of the disk To browse and listen to the recorded MP3 file press the MP3 button in the Player section MIDI SYNC RECORDING file audio recording synchronized with a MIDI file 1 10 Press the MENU button and the F8 button AUDIO RECORDING to open the audio recording environment Press the F2 button MIDI SYNC RECORDING to show the list of MIDI files within the MIDIFILE folder on the disk Figure 329 Select a MIDI file from the list In the example the file is Cabaret MID Press the ENTER button to start simultaneously the audio recording of the MIDI file Figure 330 Play the keyboard and or sing on your microphone connec
147. ARLESTON CNTRYDIX NO NO SSA 01 SSA 02 BOSSA 06 OSSA 07 SSA 08 G NO o o Oo 4 CO n I gt I gt e 2 A A LUES 0 LUES 0 0 0 I I 2 2 295 295 2 515 DIDS SlLSiqgin S 9 m gl9 1 02 5 I IzIir zizizizzizizizizi23il J rmm mm oljolololiolololololizio si isa en erus Z J gt Z O m o 62 63 64 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 224 225 NO 26 27 DANCE 13 28 DANCE 14 29 DANCE 15 87 DISCO 01 5 DISCO 02 DISCO 03 7 DISCO 04 84 DISCO 05 5 DISCO 06 86 DISCO 07 DISCO 08 DISCO 09 DISCO 10 NO N mmm g amp l amp l amp e de mo uuum o Z o oo50o lol0o0Q09090Q020 4 1 Im Diop toto an a 1 5 5 RO OIOIO OINI NO c lio Inr CO CO Oo O11 amp O 0 amp c N c Co L CO NO NO NO NO oo NO LAMENCO 01 LAMENCO 02 LAMENCO 03 LIPBEAT 01 OLKSINGER 01 OLKSINGER 02 OLKSINGER 03 OLKSINGER 04 OX 01 OX 02 OX 03 UNKY UNKY 02 UNKY 03 84 FUNKY 04 85 FUNKY O5
148. B OCTAVE The and buttons allow the pitch of the RIGHT part to be shifted up or down by one P3 Octave Up octave The display shows the current value of ROTOR G Ma The SLOW and FAST buttons allow to change Figure 14 the speed of Rotary Speaker when you select DRAWBARS in the VOICE section and for the voices for which the ROTARY SPEAKER setting is set to ON SLOW 63 CONCERT GRAND PORTAMENTO BALLAD Grand_Piano 2nd Stringsl Tempo 76 Transp DRUMSET Page 1 Turns the PORTAMENTO on and off only the voices for which the portamento has been STANDARD JAZZDRY programmed For example the SYNTH family STANDARD VINTAGE B AFTER TOUCH Turns the AFTER TOUCH on and off only Fok u the voices for which the after touch has been ACOUSTIC J4 amp 27BRUSH programmed GUITAR SYNTH etc B DRUM SET PRESET SELECTION Page 1 iets duh Selects one of the 53 built in DRUM SETS to play 2 a Maj directly from the keyboard Figure 15 For more DROM Basa AORE CUWER 3 details see DRUM SET section Figure 15 2 2 KETRON AUDYA BASS The MANUAL TO LOWEST and BASSIST buttons set the following modes respectively MANUAL sets the manual bass for the left hand TO LOWEST sets the lowest note of the chord to the root For example when you want to play a bass pedal within a chord progression BASSIST allows to play free bass notes on a chord played by using the right
149. BALLAD 63 CONCERT_GRAND BALLAD Grand Piana Tempo 76 Transp end Stringsi PIANC Page 1 Chord Close Chordl Retr Chord Close chorda Morrmal Chords Close Chords Retr Chord Close chara Morrmal Chord Close Live Guitar Retr PRESET SELECTION Page 1 Split C3 Octave 53 55 8 DRUM BASS CHORD LOWER CHORD 1 2 Ee MODES Lf DRUM Lf Figure 201 SLOW BALLAD 63 CONCERT_GRAND end StringsL PIANC Page 1 INVERSION la Dm ng Ld d LLL PRESET SELECTION Page 1 B5 BS BS B3 Bass CHORD LOWER BALLAD Grand Piana Tempo YG Transp MODES Lf DRUM 1 7 Figure 202 KETRON e AUDYA 87 Style Mode LOWER The USER 5 button LOWER opens the edit window for the left hand Figure 209 F1 LOWER 1 HOLD enables the hold control Hold on the first Lower section The setting is valid for all the Styles F2 LOWER 2 HOLD enables the hold control Hold on the second Lower section The setting is valid for all the styles F3 OFF STOP when is ON it exclude the the Lowers during the Stop condition F4 MUTE global mute of the two Lowers The setting is valid for all the Styles F5 MODE sets various modes for the Lower sections By using the CURSOR a gt buttons or the DATA VALUE wheel you can set the following values Normal standard mode with the Lower always active Bas Lower only w
150. By using the DATA VALUE wheel or the CURSOR lt 4 gt buttons you can select the available drum sound Figure 220 Please note that when the assigned instrument changes an asterisk appears after the name of the instrument The USER 5 button enables disables the MANUAL DRUM function that is the manual playing of the drum directly from the keyboard Drum Mixer ey a Figure 219 ae aye ree ARENE ANTAA ae ger gt mee co pud mp sra Ies ene a fia um jum er eee Lene POT RESI M SINGLE GLOBAL USER 5 eem n mem Allow to save modification on single arrangement or whole style E gt 3 peser Den ic ELTI Figure 220 Drum Remap example The Drum Remap function has effect only on the MIDI drum So for the following example select a MIDI zs ir style A WAR O A sm xx E 1 Select the Soul Pop style from Rock user style A Aho A ROCK i category Figure 221 A BREUI A 2 Press DRUM MIXER and press the USER 4 button A GALi A memi noon Drum Remap as shown by the arrow on Figure coi 222 Start the style to listen immediately to the DELE Into Far cyt E a a changes you make o 8 c niai a uar DIM 3 Select the Variation A of the Arranger cm Wc 4 If you to remap the kick of the drum press F1 to Figure 221 select the fir
151. CH algorithm matches the tempo change of the sample altering the audio content The available range is 30 up to 38 F3 BASS FREQ EQ adjusts the EQ low frequency of the audio drum from 50 Hz to 990 Hz FA TREBLE FREQ EQ adjusts the EQ high frequency of the drum from 1030 Hz to 16130 Hz F8 BASS GAIN EQ adjusts the EQ low frequency gain by 12 dB F9 TREBLE GAIN EQ adjusts the EQ high frequency gain by 12 dB oe the DRUM parameters The parameters of LIVE DRUM Stretch and Pitch and the 2 bands parametric EQ for the audio drum can be saved as USER STYLE with any frequency FREQ and gain GAIN values Press the SAVE button on the front panel and give a name by using the keyboard or use the same style name as shown in Figure 195 by pressing the USER 5 button SAVE m DRUM 2 By pressing the USER 2 button twice you can access the AUTOCRASH parameters that is the automatic hit on the cymbals CRASH F1 AUTOCRASH INTRO the Autocrash function can be enabled disabled after the Intro of the style F2 AUTOCRASH FILL B the Autocrash function can be enabled disabled after the Fill In and the Break of the style The AUTOCRASH works only if present within the style If the Autocrash is not programmed into the style its two options have no effect Style Mode DigiPad end Grand Piano PAD Page 1 LIVE DRUM Stretch SS O S d BASS FREQ EQ 1 BASS GAIN EG LU dB TREBLE FREQ EQ 34 70Hz
152. CHANNEL RX reception channels setting F FILTER PROG CHANGE RX Program Change reception filter setting F8 TRANSPOSE part transpose reception 104 kETRON AUDYA Eu NEU TE Wr dur AAD LL Lar i E WELF pg reese ET 1 B Pits Pee LAUALE METROMCME CLICK s VIDEO HODE O De A reco KkrBOARD CONTAC MIDI RECORDING OUTPUT ASSIGN MACRO RECORDING pes e i tti ute Lora i a m Figure 258 Sl re ALLAD NS ANT Bai ep Coran Pme Mr Lie ME zT Un Dire E3 FIO 5 uia Lorna Figure 259 Only the languages really present in the keyboard will appear Further languages will be updated by adding an ordinary text file loaded into the internal disc ERI ALLAD NS AMET BALED Urania sF red Lei LI aos Channel Tx mean Fate Prog Enay Tx Peng Orange Trenance Tx Transpoce fs Wumv o0 jJ EBORE Eum Uum Fi E FF ig CHSL LOWE me ge Mater E Figure 260 By pressing the cursor 4 buttons together you set the default value that is no MIDI channel It means that the part is not transmitted via MIDI CHANNEL TX By pressing the F1 button a window like Figure 261 will appear Here you can set all the MIDI transmission channels for each part of the keyboard by using the F1 F10 buttons Pre
153. CO CO CO 00 CO N amp o1 Co SYNT T 03 25 SYNT T 04 2 SYNT T 05 2 SYNT T 06 2 SYNT T 07 29 SYNT T 08 30 31 9 3 SYNT T 11 33 3 SYNT T 13 35 3 SYNT T 15 37 SYNT T 16 38 FISATANGO 01 SYNT T 17 3 ISATANGO 02 HARPSI 01 4 HARPSI 02 41 49 BRASS CHA 5 5 4 5 06 ISAMAZURK 02 PIANO T 07 STRINGS STRINGS 02 STRINGS 03 STRINGS 04 STRINGS 05 STRINGS 06 STRINGS 07 STRINGS T 01 STRINGS T 02 YNT 01 YNT 02 8SYNT 03 YNT 04 YNT 05 YNT 06 YNT 07 YNT 08 YNT 09 YNT 10 ISAMAZURK 03 F F FISAMAZURK 04 E E F Co a lnlinm O MNINININ 00 N O ISAPARTY 01 NO ISAPARTY 02 O O0 CO CO CO O Ko 8 ISAPARTY 03 NO Co Co NO CO Co NO NO A DA Co A CO O Co NO A A O1 Co H CO A Co NO D 16 Co Ke NO Co NO N Co o ce Co Co NO O Co CoD CO B Co NO Cc ea PO PO Po GD O1 O1 O1 CO Co m oj dcj o o OD OD ISATANGO_03 Op DA Co ISATARANT 01 F F F FISATARANT 02 F F F MNINININ O o OD UJ NO DA NO ISATARANT 03 OD UJ JJ gt CD CoD am gt O NO NO DA 0 op UJ ZU gt 6 op O L gt e ov ISATARANT 04 V IN
154. DI REMIX STYLE REMIX MIDI Figure 47 RaindroPs KeeP Fal 55 CONCERT_GRAND SWING ARRANGER C znd Strings Tempo 123 Transp PIANO Page 1 J Besame Fucho mid Stop Barz4 amp abaretmid RmxGtr ff Doctor zZivado mid t Hello Dollv mid t Never Fall In mid f La Vie En Rose mid March Mendelssohn mid March Waaner mid CAMIDIFILE start 4 nonimo Veneziano mid saved s MID i Midnight Cowbo mid Figure 48 KETRON AUDYA 3D MIDI REMIX B LIVE GUITAR REMIX On Midi Remix feature is also possible add Live Guitar coming from selected style beside drum part Live Guitar could be played manually or automatically by Live Guitar REMIX which will extract harmony tune directly from midi file Live Guitar Remix can be activate on Manual or Autoplay way directly form MENU gt KEYBOARD CONTROL UTILITY Page 1 gt Remix Live Guitar By Manual mode User can insert LIVE GUITAR on Midi Remix simply playing on Left part of Audya keyboard while midi file run By Autoplay feature as well term say Live Guitar will be detected automatically from midi file while playing B How to follow chord s track to live guitar remix 1st method If Chord Txt format track is built on Midi file thus will play automatically by simply press Menu gt KEYBOARD CONTROL gt UTILITY Page 1 gt Remix Live Guitar Autoplay Figure 49 CH QUANT
155. DYA advanced music station KETRON s r l Via Giuseppe Taliercio n 7 60131 Ancona Italy Tel 39 071 285771 Tel 39 071 2857748 www ketron it email ketron ketron it Printed in Italy
156. Drum Set type selection for the second Drum Set IMPORTANT Groove section Groove Bank and Drum 2 are auto excluding but they can be added individually to Audio Drums or User Audio Drums or Drum Bank or Drumt F3 Bass Bank Bass Library 333 F6 Piano Bank Piano and Electric Piano Library 236 F7 Guitar Bank 1 Acoustic and Electric Guitar Library 253 F8 Guitar Bank 2 Acoustic and Electric Guitar Library 253 F9 Arp amp Lick Arpeggios and various Orchestral embellishments 254 F10 Live Guitar Audio Live Guitar Library with up to 150 Live Guitars synced to MIDI All the Orchestral Libraries such as Bass Piano Guitar 1 2 and Arp amp Lick are playing with their original Program Change but it is possible to change the voice on each section when box is blue coloured by simply selecting the sound family on the right hand and the single GM Voices Style View All variations applied to the Style with the insert of the Bank templates may be memorized and saved as usual into the correspondent User Style The access to a single template of the Bank Libraries may be reached also with the numerical key pad 0 9 Please see the STYLE BANK Lists KETRON AUDYA 1 Style View The Audio Style Modeling sections 1 Audio Drum The Audio Drum is a stereo Wave file containing an audio rhythmic sequence It can replace the normal Drum Set or be added to it If you want only the Au dio Drum you m
157. ELE Hl d AT MY d p OE iJe r p Cer ne i TII EFE Trage BT adim REIN LET CM i ir i pr onm eij bees jij agra ae eT E 1 Umum ee Figure 103 IU NN PEN I Lap dem Fu T TELI wq Cre oan oer mA HIT pet acie Car CMS proc Eg ES Fade r er J ere ENT if Ih Tarn 7 M PT dr m mar aT Lr Figure 105 Program e F1 F6 VOICES you can assign up to three ELI Wt PROGRAM VOICES to the same PROGRAM as already seen PI Me aT in the first PROGRAM EDIT screen e F2 F7 REVERB you can adjust the reverb effect send Values from 0 to 63 Figure 106 By pressing together the CURSOR lt 4 buttons you set the reverb send to 0 If in the EFF MODE page you choose an effect like DIST DIST CHO or DIST ECHO CHO you cannot adjust the REVERB send independently for each voice The parameter adjustment of the effect send is common to all three voices so the adjustment of one effect send affects all the effect sends Oa F3 F8 CHORUS you can adjust the Chorus effect send when you select the CHORUS effect type in the EFF MODE page Values from O to 63 By pressing the CURSOR lt 4 buttons together you set the effect CHORUS send to 0 Figure 107 e FA F9 ECHO you can adjust the Echo effect send when you select the ECH
158. ES EDIT voices parameters up to 5 voices Volume Pan Formant Detune Cutoff Resonance F8 EQUALIZER 10 bands graphic equalizer F9 EFFECTS effects parameters F10 VOCAL TO ARR automatic setting of the vocalizer and the Arranger DUET By pressing the F1 button the list of DUET effects similar to Figure 354 will appear from which you can choose one of the available duet effects by using the CURSOR A buttons or the DATA VALUE wheel Bluegrass Folk 1 Up Down olk 2 Down Bluegrass Up Folk 3 Up Chained Up Country Up Chained Folk 1 Down Down TRIO By pressing the F2 button the list of TRIO effects similar to Figure 355 will appear from where you can choose one of the effects di trio available by using the CURSOR A buttons or the DATA VALUE wheel QUARTET By pressing the F3 button will appear the list of effects QUARTET similar to Figure 356 from which you can choose one of the available quartet effects by using the CURSOR A V buttons or the DATA VALUE wheel Standard Jazz Block Chord Down Block Chord Up 134 KETRON AUDYA E Ory ALLAD STO CONCERT Gk AT a EN p ji HEt Bru ammet arem Lp Uike Lip 2 NTE Deer hep orem Up dere Cine Us ee 8 PES SEE TION Por oc T p nem in inde Dun 7 5 Pad Figure 353 S309 BALL AD E7 GHAND rr EEr a Mei Perr as ba P HEES Wi IW lg a leu Er r
159. Fig 2 03 ine 1 mH ec Er Figure 180 KETRON e AUDYA 81 Style Mode Style Mode By pressing the MODE button of the STYLE section you can access the functions and the settings of the Arranger The STYLE MODE main window is similar to Figure 181 From here you can choose 5 sections by using the USER buttons from 1 to 5 MODES USER 1 DRUM USER 2 BASS USER 3 CHORDS USER 4 LOWER USER 5 m MODES 1 By pressing the USER 1 button once you can access the first MODES window where you can see the following functions corresponding to the F1 F10 buttons e F1 VOICE LIST TO STYLE e F2 INTERACT GUITAR e F3 PIANIST BASSIST e FA4 PIANIST SUSTAIN e F5 PRESET MIX e F6 AUTO FILL e F7 AFTER FILL e F8 FILL TO ARRANGE e F9 CHORD MODE e F10 ROOTLESS VOICE LIST TO STYLE When this function is ON it enables the Voice List to Style Figure 182 You can store for each Style besides the various parameters also the Voice List currently selected on the panel This function works only if the Voice List button is lit while the Style is running Please note that this option can only be used with the User Style as you must save the style before use INTERACT GUITAR When the INTERACTIVE GUITAR function is ON you can set the dynamic value for the LIVE GUITAR part Figure 183 In other words by playing harder on the keyboard the arrangement of the guitar becomes an arpeggio By playing
160. Figure 319 1 Press the KEY TUNE button on the panel and select a Key Tune Figure 266 2 Pressthe EDIT button on the panel 3 Press the USER 2 button Tune View to view the associated keys to the Key Tune In Figure 267 there are 3 associated keys 4 For example if you want to start the song Barocco wav you can play the C3 note assigned to the Key Tune but also when you will play a C chord in all the variations In this way the Hold parameter will be set to ON To stop the Key Tune song just press a C chord or C note again This function is useful for the accordion player playing MIDI files When the Key Tune To Chord function is active the melody part of the accordion will not start the Key Tune but only the Chord part will In this way you can assign 12 songs maximum for example a song assigned to the G5 key and another to the G6 key by using the chord recognition G will start the song assigned to G5 key Combining this function to Registrations the accordion player can launch the MIDI files and the other settings in the Registration directly from the accordion without touching the keyboard KETRON AUDYA 123 B OUTPUT ASSIGN e By pressing the F5 button from the main page of the MENU you can access to the OUTPUT ASSIGN screen where you can make the routing settings of the internal sources to the outputs on the rear Main Stereo and separate outputs as shown in Figure 320 The options are the followi
161. I N AST FOLK INGERPICK OLK_12 8 RISH_WALZ6 8 ONG ELECT 1 ONG ELECT 2 ONG FOLK 1 ONG FOLK 2 ARTY FOX 1 NO NIO 4 N e O 5 5 LIS PARTY 2 4 2 STOP N DA NIPKNIM J MM Ico TU O A gt NO o 5 01 POLKA 3 38 POLKA 4 9 POLKA 5 OINI O oO O Co POP 4 28 POP 5 8 POP 6 8 9 4 16 ROCK 1 08 JJ Qo UJ r c m OD O a J m o m T 2 2 Qo OIOIO mI 20 dD U9 UJ Nj o m In Emi a0 LET ES N a mi ze w IO D O O x Co NO ROCK 15 0 RUMBA3 RUMBA 4 D O O x N Ke ROCK 14 96 98 99 UIl o RUMBA MIX 1 3 RUMBA MIX 2 AMBA JAZZ HORT ELECT1 HORT ELECT2 HORT FOLK1 HORT FOLK2 3 CO NO Co coo coo l OD N OD ie W Live Guitar O HUFFLE 1 HUFFLE 2 HUFFLE 3 HUFFLE 4 HUFFLE 5 HUFFLE 6 SHUF ROCK 1 HUF ROCK 2 Co d N WM 03 Co OD 77 HUF ROCK 3 S S SHUF_ROCK_4 S S LOW_ROCK6 8 BRIN DL RL RIA LOW_ROCK_1 25 SLOW
162. I INI N N ojdvc oj do o o Co 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 UJ JJ D CD CoD I gt O K NIN amp o 52 BRASS CHA 04 4 53 46 FISAWALZ 02 5 47 FISAWALZ 03 55 48 FISAWALZ 04 5 7 57 74 5 7 RASS POP ISAWALZ o C2 O NO CO D gt Co C5 E O 2 e NO 69 BSYNT I7 71 YNT 21 YNT 22 YNT 23 YNT 24 YNT 25 YNT 26 YNT 27 o OD NO IN UJ JJ D CD CD U O U O NO NO N D CD NO CO D gt Co C5 5 O Q O C2 NO D 8 CoD NO O UJ JJ D CD CD U O U O K NO D N NO CO D gt Co CD n O Q O NO O Co o NO Co NO op NO UJ JI 2 op P U O 5 oO NO 06 59 BRASS POP O7 76 60 B S 08 7 amma mimmi 9 UJ Dalal ale LOLIO Il ololo H N O o NO O NO N SWG SWG 02 SWG 03 SWG 04 AX SWG 05 83 SAX SWG 06 NO es I gt o O G NO N Co 63 BRASS SWG Oi 7 8 66 BRASS SWG O4 8 8 NO OD O UO D gt o O D G NO N Co o 6 MIDI DI CO N o or UJ ZU gt 6 ep op Q e OD UJ JJ D CD CD OD Q O K UJ JJ 2 6 o o Q eo C2 MIMI N O o ep 67 BRASS SWG 05 8 68 BRASS SWG 06 69 BRASS SWG 07 7
163. IFILE folder of the disk will be created Figure 335 18 Press the START button or the USER 5 button START to start playback of the recorded MIDI file To browse and listen the recorded MIDI file press the MIDI button in the Player section B Recording a MIDI file from the MIDI IN port 1 Press the MENU button and the F9 button MIDI RECORDING to enter the MIDI recording environment 2 You will be prompted to give a name to the file Digit the name for the MIDI file directly from the keyboard 3 Press the F2 button MIDI PORT IN GM to set the data recording mode from the external port Figure 336 4 Press the USER 5 button START REC to start the MIDI recording 5 Start the external MIDI sequencer or play any MIDI keyboard connected to the MIDI IN connector 6 Press the USER 4 button STOP REC to stop MIDI recording 7 Afile in the MIDIFILE folder of the disk will be created 8 To browse and listen the recorded MIDI file press the MIDI button in the Player section If you make a MIDI recording using an Audio Drum part for the drum the drum sounds AUDIO will not be recorded into the MIDI recording If you want to record an Audio Drum please use the audio recording method B MACRO RECORDING The MACRO RECORDING records all the events performed on the keyboard Figure 337 The files have the extension MRS and are saved into the MIDI folder from where it is also possible to reproduce them Once the Ma
164. LOSE A va Figure 347 CONCEBRT CB AND TH FIICH To PRESET J ar 6 Ca Fre Pt e E E ro mM DOMO Loses 5 1 Figure 348 Saving a microphone effect After you have modified one of the MICRO PRESETS you can save it by overwriting the same Preset or giving a new name Here is the procedure to follow 1 2 3 Select a MICRO PRESET Press the EDIT button on the front panel and edit the parameters as explained above Once finished press the SAVE button on the front panel Type a name by using the keyboard for example MICRO and press the USER 5 button SAVE as shown in Figure 349 By using the F1 F10 buttons is now possible to select the User Preset from the list as shown in Figure 350 Setting a VOCALIZER effect Tis 2 Press and hold for few seconds VOCALIZER button The VOICETRON PRESETS window will appear Figure 351 that is the effects for the microphone connected to MICRO 1 on the rear Press the F1 F10 buttons to select one of the VOICETRON PRESETS Press the CURSOR gt buttons to scroll the VOICETRON PRESETS pages By using the F1 F10 buttons you can select 20 VOICETRON PRESETS from two pages VOCALIZER 1 USER 1 F1 F F2 USER 2 F3 USER 3 F4 USER 4 F5 6 7 F5 USER 5 F6 USER 6 F7 USER 7 F8 USER 8 F9 USER 9 10 MIDI MODE In Figure 352 you can see the VOICETRON PRESETS of the second page Please note that t
165. M LIST M SYSTEM MY FOLDERS USER AUDIO DRUMS SEARCH Figure 376 NEXT gt gt VIEW E INSTRUMENTS LYRIC ON E wore Tr View 1MP3 MSP OFF PLa LIST Transp j E REGISTRATION MARKER E SFX MIXER Search string SLOW BALLAD CONCERT_GRAND end StringsL PIAMO Page 1 BALLAD Grand Piana Tempo 7G Transp C LEAD UN ii I Like Fusian mp3 VIEW AT Like Fusian wav LYRIC ON ia I Like Fusion wav OFF MARKER REMIX Off M FOLDERS NEXT gt gt Time EC CINTERNAL M i Figure 377 KETRON e AUDYA 139 User Assignable User Assignable By pressing the USER ASSIGNABLE button COMULR T GRAND located to left of the display you can access the screen where to assign custom functions to the USER buttons Figure 378 FILTER 3 By using the F1 F5 buttons you can assign up to five USER TABS PRES that is five different LEERLTABS PRES3 CHORD 1 WHA gt functions for the five User buttons below the T ADE PRES 1 PORTRMENTO TOME display Press one of the F1 F5 buttons and the mr i LT AB 7 TES EDIT button to access the screen like Figure ia omo anos 379 Here you can assign to each USER button picas o Bon one of the following functions todo LOUPE ILL 1 ILL 2 ILL 3 ILL 4 ILL IN REAK 1 REAK 2 REAK 3 REAK 4 REAK ILL TO ARR SET
166. N F5 MUTE F6 SHIFT 36 semitones transposition F CHAN TX ON OFF F8 CHAN RX ON OFF F9 MODE VOICE VOCAL DRUM F10 SOLO You can change the GM part that is the track of the current MIDI file by using the CURSOR lt 4 buttons The parts stand in the middle of the screen as PART 01 PART O2 up to PART 16 Please note that the F5 and F10 buttons set the MUTE and SOLO functions of the part respectively For each part you can change also the instrument Program Change rotating the DATA VALUE when no F1 F10 buttons is selected You can set a GM VOICE and a SUPERSOLO previously loaded into RAM To deselect a F1 F10 button just press the same button twice Transposition of the MIDI part 1 Select the part by pressing the CURSOR lt 4 buttons For example select part 04 2 Press the F6 button SHIFT 3 Turn the DATA VALUE to set the value In Figure 205 the part is transposed by 12 semitones GM Part ue LOE Li I I x1 Lm x aH Pa Lb ATL TUE Figure 204 LE SL UM LT EE COATS LET Setting the VOCAL mode The melody part is usually on MIDI channel 4 so you can set the VOCALIZER effect by turning the DATA VALUE wheel When you select the VOCAL mode for the MIDI file part MIDI MODE appears in the middle of the screen Figure 206 At this point press the VOCALIZER button on the VOICETRON section and the MIDI file t
167. NKY 15 UNKY 16 8 CO O co co co no ho ho5 NIN INI NIN IN IN IN TN IN G P 00 CO N O01 0 P 87 88 209 210 211 212 213 214 TI C NO 7 16 Bass Bank USION 01 SION 02 USION 03 USION 04 ITANA 01 94 GITANA 02 95 GITANA 03 GOSPEL 01 97 GOSPEL 02 GOSPEL 03 HIP HOP 01 mH T T T 30 31 I O Es L O U O NO HOUSE 01 100 HOUSE 02 O O NO O Co O D O eo O NO NO NO NO NO NO NO D NO HOUSE O HOUSE O2 AZZ 01 AZZ 02 AZZ 059 AZZ 04 AZZ_05 AZZ 06 AZZ 07 AZZ 08 0 10 IGHTPOP 1 LIGHTPOP 02 12 LIGHTPOP 03 245 LOUNGE 46 LOUNGE 02 247 LOUNGE 03 ACARENA 01 14 MACARENA 02 15 MARCH 48 MAZURKA 16 MENEITO 01 17 MENEITO 02 MERENGUE 01 19 MERENGUE 02 KYB BR O O N oj cdcj o 1 Oo A CO c NO A JI c cO m E Lr m NO NO co E Oo KETRON e AUDYA 151 Bass Bank Bass Bank j UJ UJ UJ UJ C C C C C
168. O RB JU Zz UJ e NO 6 65 RNBOS 66 RNB O4 67 RNB O5 68 RNB 06 69 RNB O7 70 RNB 0B 46 ROCKSHUFF 93 ROCKSHUFF_02 _ 94 ROCKSHUFF_03 _ 95_ ROCKSHUFF_04 _ 40 ROCK_01 1 ROCK 02 ROCK 09 3 ROCK04 ROCK NO NO O NO N NO Co NO Ko m ml m ev JJ 2J J ZU AIAIAIA WM 0 z Bi jE e pa C C C C ojo jojo RIO I NO N PIR AR S lo O 5 XIX UO oO o ER AR JJ O A UJ gt gt O Q N ALSA 01 48 SALSA 02 149 SALSA 03 191 SAMBA 192 SAMBA_02 193 SAMBA 03 AKE 151 SLOWROCK 303 SLOWROCK _ 304 SLOWROCK 03 __ 305 SLOWROCK 04 271 S COW SLOW 02 SLOW OS SLOW_04 SOULO SOUL O2 SouL 03 SOUL_04 SWING O WING 02 WING 03 190 SWING 04 275 SWING 05 276 SWING_06 277 SWING 07 278 SWING 08 SWING_09 SWING 10 ANGO 01 ANGO 02 E A N op op O N 272 273 274 152 153 154 155 156 o 279 280 7 58 dIo i TECHNO 02 83 TECHNO 03 TECHNO 04 Arp amp Licks 6GUIT 01 97 feGUIT 19 0 16STRINGS_04 1 feSTRINGS 05 23 1 24 1
169. O effect type in the EFF MODE page Values from 0 to 63 By pressing together the CURSOR lt 4 buttons together you set the effect ECHO send to 0 Figure 108 F5 F10 DISTORSOR you can adjust the distortion effect send when you select the DIST effect type in the EFF MODE page Values from O to 63 By pressing together the CURSOR lt 4 gt buttons together you set the effect DISTORTION send to 0 Figure 109 If you set an effect like DIST DIST CHO or DIST ECHO CHO in the EFF MODE page you cannot adjust the CHORUS ECHO and DISTORSOR sends independently for each voice The parameter adjustment of the effect send is common to all three voices so the adjustment of one effect send affects all the effect sends CONTROL 1 The USER 5 button opens a screen like Figure 110 where you can modify the parameters of the Vp o Pr CONTROL 1 page You can access the parameters by using the F1 F10 buttons in order to program the VOICES in splits or dynamic layers on the keyboard Once you select the parameter you can modify the parameters by using the DATA VALUE wheel or the CURSOR buttons Use the function F1 F6 buttons to select one of three VOICES of the PROGRAM Figure 110 KETRON AUDYA 55 Program e F1 F6 VOICES you can assign up to three VOICES to the same PROGRAM as already seen in the first PROGRAM EDIT screen F2 F7 RANGE Figure 111 you can set the split points of t
170. OFF mode enables or quickly mute the percussive instrument sections The correspondence between the multi tabs and percussion group is as follows Tabl Kick Tab2 Snare Snare Rim Shot Tab3 Hi Hat Tab4 Cymbals Crash Ride Cup Tab5 Toms FX Tab6 Tamb Tab7 Latin 1 Congas Bongos Tambora Tab8 Latin 2 Cowbell Guiro Claves Tab9 Latin3 Maracas Cabaza Shaker Guira Whistle Tab10 CLAP e When the LED is lit the section is muted The multi tab 14 and 15 enable the solo function of the percussion group of the kicks and the hi hats Multi Table 16 has the RESET function that is un mute all the percussive sections currently in this state and restores the normal operation of the percussion part F2 GM PAGE Figure 2 This mode allows to access to 16 parts of General Midi by only pressing the corresponding multi tab If you use a midi file this mode is useful to fast access to all parameters of the various tracks of the midi file For example you can change the program change of the bass and the drums inside a midi file by pressing the multi tab of the track and modify the parameters as explained in GM Part Chapter F3 ARAB SCALE Figure 3 By pressing multi tab 1 to 12 you can set the alterations on the 12 notes of the musical scale When the LED is lit the note of the multi tab is altered when the LED is off the note has no alterations You can quickly restore the ordinary scale by pressing the multi t
171. OWN to make overdubbing see details later Play the keyboard and or sing on your microphone connected to the MICRO 1 connector enable the MICRO button in the VOICETRON section Be sure that the input level is not too high by checking the stereo VU Meter Figure 328 Press the USER 5 button START REC or the ENTER or RECORD button to start recording 15 also possible to press the MENU button to exit but keeping ready to record The RECORD button remains lit You can then start the recording at any time by simply pressing the REC button which will start blinking Press the USER 4 button STOP REC to stop recording or press RECORD that is blinking file in the WAVE folder of the disk will be created Press the START button or the USER 5 button START to start playback of the recorded file To browse and select any recorded audio WAV file press the WAVE button in the Player section The recording volume is set by the WAVE slider on the PLAYER section 126 KETRON AUDYA SLOW BALLAD 63 BALLAD CONCERT_GRAND end Strings PIANO Page 1 arand Piana Tempo 76 Transp MIPS RECORDING MIDI SYNC RECORDING SAMPLER REC MIC SAMPLER REC LINE IN SELECT SOURCE UPDATE TIME LEFT PLEASE SELECT MODE WAVE REC Main Output Then press RECORD to start Split C3 Octave Bs B5 B5 DRUM BASS CHORD LOWER sd Figure 326 SLOW_BALLAD 63 BALLAD CONCERT_GRAND end Strinasl PI
172. Oc 00 di d2 F7 Data1 OOH OCH high nibble Data2 OOH OFH low nibble Es Datai 06h Es Data1 00h Es Data1 0Ch Data2 04h no tune 64h Data2 00h 100 tune Data2 08h 100 tune DRUM VOICE PART ASS FO 26 7B Of 00 GMPart Value F7 GMPart 00h Ofh Value O voice Value 1 drum GM MIDI RX CHANNEL FO 26 7B 12 00 GMPart Chan F7 GMPart OOh Ofh Chan OOh Ofh off GM MIDI TX CHANNEL FO 26 7B 18 00 GMPart Chan F7 GMPart 00h Ofh Chan 00h Ofh off KEYB RX CHANNEL FO 26 7B 13 00 Keyb Part chan F7 Chan 00 Ofh off KEYB TX CHANNEL FO 26 7B 19 00 Keyb Part chan F7 Chan 00 Ofh off Keyb Part MIDI GM PART 00h MIDI SECOND VOlH PART 1 MIDI SECOND VOI2 PART 02h MIDI PERCUSSION PART 03h MIDI CLICK PART 04h MIDI DRUM2 PART 08h MIDI DRUM1 PART 09h MIDI VOICE1 PART Och MIDI VOICE2_ PART Odh MIDI VOICE3 PART Oeh MIDI DRAWBAR_PART Of h MIDI GLOBAL PART 10h MIDI LEFT PART 11h MIDI RIGHT PART 12h MIDI REGIS PART 13h MIDI VOCALIZER PART 14h MIDI LOWER1 PART 15h MIDI LOWER2 PART 16h MIDI BASS PART 17h MIDI CH1 PART 18h MIDI CH2 PART 19h MIDI CH3 PART 18 MIDI 4 PART bh MIDI CH5 PART ich MIDI LIVEL PART dh MIDI LIVER PART 16 VELOCITY CURVE AND FILTER CURVE FO 26 7B 1B 00 Curve F7 Curve Velocity 00h 05h Filter O6h 09h FIXED VALUE CURVE FO 26 7B 16 00 Dyn Val F7 Dyn Val O1h 7fh GM PART KEY SHIFT FO 26 7B 1a 00 GMPart Shift F7 GMPart
173. Ol 9 Cuica02 32 Click 80 TriangleOl 33 MetronomeOl 8 TriangleO2 34 MetronomeO2 82 ShakerOl 35 Klck33 83 ShakerO2 36 Kick26 84 SticksO2 37 Rimshotl6 85 ClapOl 38 Snare040 86 Tambourinel 39 Clap02 87 Rimshot03 40 Snare029 88 Snare042 41 TomO7 89 Snare045 42 Stick07 90 Snare046 43 Tom08 amp 91 Kickl7 44 Stick08 92 Kick15 45 Tom09 93 MiddleO5 46 MiddleO6 94 Close04 47 TomlO 95 Reverse 48 Tomil 96 Applause 49 Crashl2 97 Belltree 50 Toml2 98 Empty 5 RideOl 99 Empty 52 Crash03 100 Empty 53 RidebellO 101 Empty 54 TambourineO 102 Empty 55 Crash04 103 Empty 56 Cowbell0l 104 Empty 57 Crash05 105 Empty 58 Vibraslap 106 Empty 59 Ride03 107 Empty 60 Bongo HIi 108 Empty 61 Bongo Low 109 Empty Grunge Program Change 85 14 SnareO001 62 Conga Slap 15 RollOl 63 Conga Hi 16 Roll02 64 Conga Low 17 SnareO002 65 Timbales Hi 18 Snare003 66 Timbales Lo 46 Open0d3 94 OpenO2 47 Tom04 95 Reverse 48 Tom05 96 Applause 49 Crash02 97 Belltree 50 TomO6 98 Empty 51 RideOl 99 Empty 52 Crash03 100 Empty 53 RidebellO1 101 Empty 54 TambourineO 102 Empty 55 Crash04 103 Empty 56 Cowbell0l 104 Empty 57 Crash05 105 Empty 58 Vibraslap 106 Empty 59 Ride02 107 Empty 60 Bongo Hi 108 Emp
174. R gt buttons to scroll the MICRO PRESETS pages By using the F1 F10 buttons you can select 20 MICRO PRESETS from two pages PAGE1 PAGE2 F3 VIBRATO Editing a vocal effect 1 Select one MICRO PRESETS from the list on the display 2 Press the EDIT button on the front panel A window like Figure 340 will appear 4 Byusing the F1 F10 buttons you can select the following options F1 MICRO 1 F2 MICRO2 F3 REVERB F4 ECHO F5 TRANSFORM F6 COMPRESSOR F LIMITER F8 EQUALIZER F9 VIBRATO F10 PITCH 130 KETRON AUDYA SLOW _BALLAD 63 CONCERT_GRAND end Strings PIANC Page 1 DRY BOOST REVERB SMALL ECHO REVERB REVERB MEDIUM ECHO REVERB TAP REVERB LARGE CORRECTION REVERB GATED BEAR PRESET SELECTION Page 1 Split C3 iiae ax HUM BASS CHORD LOW Bass CHORO LOWER d BALLAD Grand Piana Tempo 76 Transp Fill 1 EME Figure 339 SLOW_BALLAD 58 CONCERT_GRAND BALLAD Grand Piana 2nd StrinasL Tempo 6 Transp PISHO Page 1 MICROl PAN COMPRESSOR MICRO EFFECTS SEMD 32 LIMITER REVERE EQUALIZER ECHO VIBRATO TRANSFORM PITCH PRESET SELECTION Page 1 Split C3 ac 53 5 DRUM B 55 CHORD LOWER cMai sd Ma Figure 340 Please note that for MICRO1 that is the microphone connected to MICRO 1 on the rear all the options are available while for MICRO2 only REVERB and ECHO are available MICRO1 By selecting the F
175. R LockOff SS eee eee Figure 297 SLOVW_BALLAD 63 CONCERT_GRAND end StringsL PIANC Page 1 Oyverdr1 GAIN 18 INPUT GAIN 45 FILTER LEVEL 47 OUTPUT LEVEL 51 FILTER FREQ 47 FILTER RESO 1 Split C3 Octave BALLAD Grand Piana Tempo 76 Transp 55 Bass CHORO LOWER Figure 298 KETRON AUDYA 115 EQUALIZER By pressing the F7 button on the DSP page you can access the EQUALIZER screen as shown in Figure 299 Here you can select the EQUALIZER type to set as global equalization of the keyboard 5 Equalizer Presets are available Just press one of the F1 F5 buttons to select the corresponding Equalizer type Factory Flat When you activate an Equalizer Preset you can set the option Lock On Off as for the previous effects By pressing the EDIT button on the front panel you can access the parameters of the selected Equalizer Preset as shown in Figure 300 The parameters are identical for all the five Equalizer effects F1 Equalizer choose from 1 to 5 F2 BASS FREQ bass frequency values 80 970 Hz F3 MID BASS FREQ mid high frequency values 1050 1770 Hz F4 MID TREBLE FREQ mid high frequency values 3020 5290 Hz F5 TREBLE FREQ high frequency values 6090 14830 Hz F BASS GAIN bass gain values 12 dB F8 MID BASS GAIN mid bass gain values 12 dB F9 MID TREBLE GAIN mid high gain values 12 dB F10 TREBLE GAIN high ga
176. RB selection of the reverb for the right hand opens another window F2 LEFT GM REVERB selection of the reverb for the left hand and the GM parts opens another window F6 Right Level reverb amount settings for the right hand values 0 63 F7 Left GM Level reverb amount settings for the left hand and the GM parts values 0 63 F8 Micro Level reverb amount settings for the microphone values 0 63 By pressing the CURSOR lt 4 gt buttons together you set the value to 0 RIGHT REVERB From the REVERB page by pressing the F1 button Right Reverb you can access the page for the selection of the reverb for the right hand Figure 280 10 reverb Presets are available in the first page and 10 in the second by pressing any CURSOR button or the DATA VALUE wheel Press any F1 F10 button to select the corresponding reverb type tudio1 and Studio2 Club1 and Club2 Hall1 and Hall2 heatre1 and Theatre2 tage and Stage2 Church1 and Church2 Hangar pace User1 User2 User3 User4 and User5 see details later 110 KETRON AUDYA ud og AD CONCERT CR ANTI FEVERS oaaae OVERDRIVE Cun E DOUALETIR LCRO DELAS WAVE agus O OO mT RIGHT Aux umm LET E VERE La Lugar m Meo it m ak ri LE Ge ku LE pw i Figure 279 SOW 1 is di RT Tou Im wr A mt ui ime mmm 5 au sim
177. RUM BASS CHORD LOWER MODES 1 2 DRUM Lyfe Figure 200 m CHORDS 1 e The USER 4 button CHORDS allows to access the chords settings Figure 201 You can select the CLOSE PARALLEL mode except Live Guitar and NORMAL RETRIGGER mode for the 5 chords of the Style In CLOSE mode the chords follow the intervals of the notes closer to conventional harmony rules In PARALLEL mode the notes of the chords will be transposed without changing the intervals F1 CHORD 1 CLOSE PARAL sets the Close or Parallel mode F2 CHORD 2 F3 CHORD 3 as above as above CLOSE PARAL CLOSE PARAL F4 CHORD 4 CLOSE PARAL as above F5 CHORD 5 CLOSE PARAL as above F6 CHORD 1 NORMAL RETR sets how the chord plays In RETRIGGER mode the chord re trigger each time it is played F CHORD 2 NORMAL RETR as above F8 CHORD 3 NORMAL RETR as above F9 CHORD 4 NORMAL RETR as above F 10 CHORD 5 NORMAL RETR as above SN mM M NS m CHORDS 2 e By pressing the USER 4 button again you can access the INVERSION function corresponding to F1 button This function allows the control of the notes and the transposition threshold so the notes are automatically moved to the lower octave instead of being played on the higher octaves By using the CURSOR gt buttons or the DATA VALUE wheel you can set the Eb E F F G notes as shown by the arrow on top of Figure 202 Style Mode SLOW
178. Ronco Low 198 Empty 3m 25 Snare007 73 GuiroOl 61 Bongo_Low X 109 Empty 26 Fingsnap OI 4 Guiro02 27 Slap 75 ClavesOl 28 Snare008 76 W Block Hi 170 KETRON AUDYA Drum Set 46 MiddleO5 94 MiddleO6 47 Tomio 95 Reverse 48 Tomll 96 Applause 49 Crash02 97 Belltree 50 Toml2 98 Empty 5 RideOl 99 Empty 52 Crash03 100 Empty 53 RidebellO 101 Empty 54 TambourineO 102 Empty 55 Crash04 103 Empty 56 CowbellO 1 104 Empty 57 Crash05 105 Empty 58 Vibraslap 106 Empty 59 Ride03 107 Empty 60 Bongo Hi 108 Empty 61 Bongo Low 109 Empty Hip Box Program Change 60 14 Snare001 62 Conga Slap 15 RollOl 63 Conga Hi 16 Roll02 64 Conga Low 17 Snare002 65 Timbales Hi 18 Snare003 66 Timbales Lo 19 Snare004 67 Agogo_Hi 20 Snare005 68 Agogo Low 21 Snare006 69 Cabasa 22 Tom Flam0Ol 70 MaracasOl 23 Tom Flam02 71 Whistle0l 24 Crash0l 72 WhistleO2 25 Snare007 73 QGuiroOl 26 Fingsnap OI 74 Guiro02 27 Slap 75 ClavesOl 28 Snare008 76 W Block Hi 29 Scratch Up 77 W Block Lo 30 Scratch Down 78 Cuica0l 3 SticksOl 79 Cuica02 32 Click 80 TriangleO 33 MetronomeO
179. SELECTION Page REINTRO yen AUTO FILL Nr UTDEBICCIDUT3 CTUDUBUETD Figure 379 ARRANGER SL ALLAI W LCONLIBEZGRAND Cor are ferr crei inna WING BASS ASS TO ROOT ASS SUSTAIN OWER MUTE OWER OFF STOP OWER 1 HOLD OWER 2 HOLD 13 me Lee cnn P i 5 TUE i MEST ET tH IANIST SUSTAIN ENDONSTOP ANUAL DRUM ILL TO END E RASH NPLUGGED UKEBOX DRUM amp BASS EAD MUTE SUB REG UP DOWN Use the F10 button to save the repeatedly the button you can set the same USER TABS PRES in the current position function to CHORD 1 CHORD 2 CHORD 3 By using the BACK and FORWARD buttons you CHORD 4 CHORD 5 BASS ALL CHORDS ALL can add further 5 USER_TABS_PRES STYLE and RIGHT By using the buttons F6 F10 you can assign to F9 PORTAMENTO TIME sets the USER slider to the USER slider the following functions adjust the portamento time F6 Pi the PRE FADER LISTEN volume F10 CHORD 2 CUTOFF sets the USER slider to adjust the cutoff frequency of the chord 2 By F7 WAVE FILTER sets the USER slider to adjust the pressing repeatedly the button you can set the cutoff frequency on WAVE Player By pressing same function to CHORD 1 CHORD 2 CHORD repeatedly the button you can set the reverb send 3 CHORD 4 CHORD 5 BASS ALL CHORDS on the RIGHT part or on the microphone ALL STYLE and RIGHT F8 CHORD 1 WHA WHA sets the USER slider to adjust the cutoff frequency of the chord 1 in order to produc
180. SEND TO enables the data transmission from the MIDI IN port to the MIDI out 1 or 2 port F10 CLOCK IN TO STYLE Storing the changes into the MIDI file 1 From the window GM PARTS when the MIDI file is playing back or paused press the SAVE button on the front panel A dialogue window where to type the file name will appear Figure 213 Give a name to the file by typing letters and numbers directly on the keyboard and then press the USER 5 button SAVE The MIDI file will be saved with the new name or overwritten if you leave the same name The parameters settings to store into the MIDI file can be selected by using the F1 F10 buttons The options will be highlighted by an asterisk Figure 214 F1 Arab Scale Arabian scale settings F2 Drm Mixer Drum Mixer settings F3 Part Param GM part parameters F4 Song Param Song parameters F5 Song Tempo Song tempo setting F6 Lead Chan Lead channel F7 Right Param Right hand parameters F8 Song Trans Song transposition F9 Glob Trans Globale transposition F10 Keyb Trans Keyboard transposition Only for an example in each MIDI file you can store Tempo settings modified by the TEMPO SLOW FAST buttons Keyboard transposition semitones and or octaves Song transposition GM Part CONCERT GRAND Pret Pio ae i 5 LAD IM Trang ir LA out Heb cock ie ohtha Chock Out
181. Snare002 65 Timbales Hi 18 Snare003 66 Timbales Lo 19 Snare004 67 Agogo KETRON e AUDYA 1 5 Drum Set 20 Snare005 68 Agogo Low 21 Snare006 69 Cabasa 22 Tom FlamOl 70 MaracasOl 23 Tom Flam02 71 WhistleOl 24 CrashO0l 72 WhistleO2 25 Snare007 73 GuiroOl 26 Fingsnap OI 74 Guiro02 27 Slap 75 ClavesOl 28 Snare008 76 W Block Hi 29 Scratch Up 77 W Block Lo 30 Scratch Down 78 Cuica0l 3 SticksOl 79 Cuica02 32 Click 80 TriangleOl 33 MetronomeO 8 TriangleO2 34 MetronomeO2 82 ShakerOl 35 KickO6 83 ShakerO2 36 Kickl3 37 Rimshot02 84 SticksO2 85 Castagnet 38 Snare043 86 TambourineOl 39 SnareO024 87 RimshotO05 40 Snare025 88 Snare026 4 Tom l3 89 Snare043 42 StickO2 90 Snare023 43 Toml4 91 Middled4 44 Close0l 92 Stick02 45 Toml5 93 Close02 46 OpenOl 94 OpenO2 47 Toml6 95 Reverse 48 Toml7 96 Applause 49 Crash02 97 Belltree 50 Toml8 98 Empty 5 Ride03 99 Empty 52 Crash03 100 Empty 53 RidebellO 101 Empty 54 TambourineO 102 Empty 55 Crash04 103 Empty 56 CowbellO1 104 Empty 57 Crash05 105 Empty 58 Vibraslap 106 Empty 59 Ride04 107 Empty 60 Bongo Hi 108 Empty 61 Bongo Low 109 Empty Swing Program Change 81 14 Em
182. Stereo 6 co Syntt9 Musette2 Accordion Muted Yang Chin ang Chin ynth2 nth3 oor Bell2 ey Hammer isa K On remolo nth5 c Nylon2 hort Perc owed Pad Brazilian Slide CD 7 8 1 c Win rin lt THEE o no Ls B B NIO 65 66 67 69 70 72 75 76 E 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 36 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 yn bass14 l N DRUMSET ustom atin opJazz treet Analog Citypop Smooth Aci Kick amp Snare JazzBrush Swing Garage U S Pop MeloRap runge NIN 6 op 7 7 f f 7 6 7 1 8 8 2 3 4 Garage U S Pop 84 MeloRap 85 Grunge N jVOICE Melotom2 ninm ojo 213 Q RIS SIE SI ZI t I e vim OJ t 3 9 O 9 o o O 3 D xplosion ire Alarm oot Splash oot Steps unshot2 Gunshot3 a a e co 7 Heart Castanets Horse Horse Gallop et Laughing 118 Machine Gun 1 unch ain creaming irene arship iver hunder ain 1 I B BD ID I l l l O O1 Co o 5 O
183. TEM Press the ENTER button to enter the selected folder Press the EXIT button to exit the selected folder and jump to the parent folder Press the USER 5 button DISK MENU to list all the available functions Figure 385 F1 COPY copies one or more files F2 DELETE deletes one or more files F3 MOVE moves one or more files F4 RENAME rename a file F5 SAVE open a screen to save PROGRAM GM VOICE VOICE LIST DRAWBAR DRUMSET F6 NEW FOLDER creates a new folder F7 DEL FOLDER deletes a folder F10 FORMAT Whole Disk FORMAT featured Copy delete and move In order to execute the copy delete and move functions on DISK MENU first select one or more files by using the ENTER button A blue dot near to each selected file will appear Figure 386 Press the F1 button COPY F2 DELETE or F3 MOVE to select the appropriate function Press the USER 5 button EXECUTE to execute the selected function or the USER 4 button EXIT to cancel the operation Create or delete a folder To create a new folder press F6 on DISK MENU Give a name by inputting the characters from the keyboard In the example the folder name is NEW FOLDER Press the USER 5 button EXECUTE The folder will be created on the current position of the disk Figure 387 Selet again folder and press F7 DEL FOLDER to delete it Press the USER 5 button EXECUTE to delete the folder or the EXIT button to cancel the operation
184. TREBLE GAIN EQ LU dB IEEE PRESET SELECTION Page 1 BALLAD amp 3 BALLAD Grand Piano Tempo 76 Transp split C3 Octave G 5 o CHORD 1 2 LOWER BS BS BS DRUM Bass CHORD LOWER MODES 1 2 Figure 194 63 DigiPad end Grand Piana PAD Page 1 LIVE DRUM Stretch MEE BASS FREQ EQ 1 BASS GAIN EG T 5 dB TREBLE FREQ EQ aue Hz TREBLE GAIN EQ 2 dB SS SAWE STYLE BALLAD Grand Piana Tempo 76 Transp Save as as Sav SaaS aa Figure 195 50 CONCERT _ GRAND end Strings PIANO Page 1 AUTOCRASH INTRO On AUTOCRASH FILL B OM AU TOCRASH RIFF OFF USER AUDIO DRUM ON MEN _BALLAD BALLAD Grand Piano Tempo 76 Transp PRESET SELECTION Page 1 Split C3 Octave 54 53 57 DRUM BASS CHORD LOWER Peewee DRUM 2 2 Figure 196 KETRON e AUDYA 35 Style Mode B BASS 1 The USER 3 button BASS opens the edit window for the bass part of the Arranger By using the F1 F10 buttons you can set the following options F1 BASS TO ROOT Figure 197 brings all the automatic bass notes to the root of the recognized chord F2 RETRIGGER the bass re triggers by using the root note each time the chord is recognized F3 PEDALBOARD enables the functionality of the bass MIDI pedalboard F4 MONO POLY Figure 198 sets the monophonic or polyphonic behaviour of the
185. Tap function of the Echo effect set into one PROGRAM In other words when Tap is active the delay of the effect will be synchronized accordingly to the current tempo The effect delay will be synchronized also if the tempo changes That is this parameter allows the effect to be automatically synchronized by the tempo change USER ECHO DELAY When you select one of the five custom Echo effects you can access the parameters of the corresponding effect by pressing the EDIT button on the front panel The Figure 292 shows the parameters for Mono User1 but the parameters are identical for Stereo User 1 Stereo User 2 Triple User 1 and Triple User 2 The only difference is the basic algorithm The parameters are the following F1 User Echo choose from 1 to 5 F2 LEVEL effect level values 0 63 F3 TIME effect time values 0 63 F4A FEEDBACK feedback amount values 0 63 F5 FILTER filter amount values 0 63 F MASTER VOL master volume values 0 63 F8 LEFT VOL left channel volume values 0 63 F9 RIGHT VOL right channel volume values 0 63 F10 TAP MODE ON OFF enables disables the Tap mode If the parameter is disabled the effect will not be affected by the Tap Enable Disable function By pressing the CURSOR lt 4 gt buttons together you set the value to 0 1 E TRE TE i Haut oe o d Hin Em EAE Woe Hono Ene Shares Ecos tu Brie lim rs ier i gem ca m
186. The F9 button does not open any window F10 The F10 button opens the LYRIC window If no MIDI file is selected or the MIDI file does not contain lyrics the LYRIC section of this window will appear empty Figure 66 To return to the MAIN VIEW display press the F10 button again or any other button STYLE VOICES DRUM SET PROGRAM or Player button Tr ee TUTI orum T EE Figure 66 KETRON AUDYA 43 Main View MIDI Player MAIN VIEW From the MAIN VIEW window you can select directly one of the MIDI files stored on disc and display the karaoke lyrics if present B Selecting MIDI files from MAIN VIEW 1 In the MAIN VIEW window press the F3 button or F4 A list of MIDI files of the MIDIFILE folder will appear Figure 67 Select using the CURSOR A V buttons or the DATA VALUE wheel a MIDI file from the list Our example is JENNIFER MID Press the ENTER button to start MIDI file playback If the MIDI file contains lyrics you will see them on the right section of the MAIN VIEW window as illustrated in Figure 68 The USER buttons from 1 to 4 under the MAIN VIEW window will work like this USER 1 PAUSE CONTINUE USER 2 STOP USER 3 LEAD ON OFF melody mute USER 4 EXIT exit from the Lyric or MAIN VIEW window While the MIDI file is playing back or paused by pressing the F3 button or F4 a second time the MAIN VIEW window is divided in two sections Figure 69 to the ri
187. This section is for the User Styles selection and the disk management see on pages 81 and 142 Voice Section dedicated to the selection of the voices see Selecting voices on page 18 Player Multimedia Player see Player on page 25 Voicetron Microphone and voice effects see Voicetron on page 37 Master Main output control see Master on page 39 KETRON AUDYA Rear panel All the connections to external devices are on the rear panel In the Figure below each number corresponds to its description Headphone Standard stereo jack for the headphone The Master volume adjusts also the headphone output level Gain 2 Gain adjustment of the signal input level of the Micro 2 jack Micro 2 Standard combo mono jack for the connection of a dynamic microphone Micro 1 Standard combo mono jack for the connection of a dynamic microphone Gain 1 Gain adjustment of the signal input level of the Micro 1 jack Main Out Two standard mono jacks for main right left or mono RIGHT LEFT MONO outputs to be connected to a PA system Aux Out Four standard mono jacks as auxiliary outputs to be connected to monitors mixers outboard effects etc S PDIF Standard RCA connectors for stereo digital input and output with digital devices CD Player digital console etc USB connectors on the front side On the front panel there are two USB ports type A for easy connection to USB devices such as p
188. TriangleOl 33 Metronome0Ol 8 TriangleO2 34 Metronome02 82 ShakerOl 35 Kickl6 83 ShakerO2 36 KickOl 84 SticksO2 37 85 Castagnet 38 Snare095 86 Kick40 39 ClapOl 87 Kick39 40 Snare096 88 Empty 41 TomO07 89 Empty 42 StickOl 90 Empty 43 Tom08 9 Empty 44 CloseOl 92 Empty 45 TomO09 93 Empty 46 OpenOIl 94 Empty 47 TomlO 95 Empty 48 Tomll 96 Empty 49 Crash02 97 Empty 50 Toml2 98 Empty 5 RideOl 99 Empty 52 Crash03 100 Empty 53 RidebellO1 101 Empty 54 TambourineO 102 Empty 55 Crash04 103 Empty 56 Cowbell0l 104 Empty 57 Crash05 105 Empty Conga Slap Conga Hi Conga Low Timbales Hi Timbales Lo Agogo Hi 20 Empty 68 Agogo Low 21 Empty 69 Cabasa 22 Empty 70 MaracasOl 23 Empty 71 WhistleO 24 Empty 72 WhistleO2 162 KETRON AUDYA Drum Set 44 CloselO 92 Empty 45 Tom28 93 Empty 46 OpenO05 94 Empty 47 Tom29 95 Empty 48 Tom30 96 Empty 49 OpenO6 97 Empty 50 Tom3l 98 Empty 5 RideOl 99 Empty 52 Crash03 100 Empty 53 RidebellO1 101 Empty 54 TambourineOl 102 Empty 55 Crash04 103 Empty 56 Cowbell0l 104 Empty 57 Crash05 105 Empty 58 Vibraslap 106 Empty 59 RideO2 107 Empty 60 Bongo Hi 108 Empty 61 Bongo Low 109 Empty Standard Gm2 Program Change 8
189. _GRAND end StringsL PIAMO Page 1 MODE vga packeRouNp Green HOR START NORMAL TEXT Black HOR POSITION HIGHLIGHT FORE white VERT START HIGHLIGHT BACK Blu Hi VERT POSITION vRIC UPPERCASE Off MEE Split C3 Octave BALLAD Grand Piana Tempo 76 Transp 55 Bass CHORO LOWER Figure 325 KETRON e AUDYA 125 B AUDIO RECORDING From the main page of the MENU press the F8 button to open the AUDIO RECORDING page dedicated to audio recording Figure 326 By using the F1 F10 buttons you can set the following parameters F1 MP3 RECORDING MP3 file recording F2 MIDI SYNC RECORDING audio file recording synchronized with a MIDI file F5 SELECT SOURCE selection of the recording source that is SPDIF MP3 1 WAVE MICROPHONE VOICETRON F6 WAVE RECORDING WAV file recording F 10 UPDATE TIME LEFT calculates the available recording room on the disc Recording a WAV file 1 Press the MENU button and the F8 button AUDIO RECORDING to enter the audio recording environment Press the F6 button WAVE REC to choose WAV file recording mode Press the RECORD button You will be prompted to give a name to the file Digit the name for the audio file directly from the keyboard Figure 327 In the example the file is AUDIO 01 Press the USER 5 button ENTER Press the F3 button NORMAL to set the normal recording or the F4 button MIXD
190. ab 16 RESET The amount of hundredths of a semitone about the alteration for each individual note can be set from the ARABIC SCALE menu on the MENU gt Keyboard control gt Arabic page 10 KETRON AUDYA SLOW _BALLAD CONCERT_GRAND end Stringsl PIANG Page 1 BALLAD Grand Piana Tempo 76 Transp DRUM ON OFF 5 Reset FACTORY TAB GM PAGE ARABIC SCALE SEEN ASSIGN TAB PLAYLIST onyorr Tabs Save SEM Split C3 Octave 53 53 53 63 DRUM Bass CHORD LOWER emai Ma SST ee ee Figure 1 SLOW BALLAD CONCERT_GRAND end Stringsl PIANC Page 1 BALLAD Grand Fiano Tempo Transp DRUM ON OFF Audio Reset FACTORY TAB GM PAGE NE aScieh Toe PLAYLIST save NETUS Split C3 Octave DRUM BASS CHORD LOWER Tg Figure 2 SLOW_BALLAD 63 CONCERT GRAND BALLAD Grand Piana end Stringsl Tempo 76 Transp PIAN Page 1 DRUM ON OFF Audio Reset FACTORY TAB GM PAGE cro Rev ARABIC SCALE ASSIGN TAB PLAYLIST save MULTI TAB Split 3 Octave ORUM BASS CHORD LOWER d Figure 3 F4 ASSIGN TABS Figure 4 This mode allows to assign functions called by each of the 16 multi tabs You can therefore customize the multi tabs configuration and assign the desired function to them In order to make the assignment simply select the desired multi tabs by pressing DATA CURSOR Up and Down and scroll through t
191. able disable the SPLIT to 12 semitones function That is when SPLIT mode is set the RIGHT hand will sound a 1 octave instead when PIANIST mode is set the keyboard will sound the original octave e F9 HARMONY Figure 119 you can set the harmonization type choosing from the following parameters oice1 set Harmony at voice 1 oice2 set Harmony at voice 2 NICE BALLAD 53 MY PROGRAM BALLAD Grand Piano erat Strings oice3 set Harmony at voice 3 ff we wie E mu 2nd Vowel Mode Eff Sand Contro F10 AFTER WHEELS opens a further window LI where you can set the Aftertouch and Modulation Figure 118 Wheel parameters AFTER WHEELS From the AFTER WHEELS window you can n modify the parameters using the F1 F10 MICE BALLAD 83 MY PROGRAM buttons Once you have selected the parameter BALLAD arand Pang and Strings the value can be modified by using the DATA Tees LLL Traaso EDIT PROGR VALUE wheel or the CURSOR buttons VOICES F1 F6 VOICES you can assign up to three E eu VOICES to the same PROGRAM as already seen gw Pide mE cow in the first PROGRAM EDIT screen rte TN e F2 F7 AFTERT Figure 120 you can assign an Aftertouch control to each instrument If stored in the PROGRAM and then enabled in Aft amp Port Autoswitch Menu gt Keyboard Control gt Aftertouch you can activate it from the button on the fr
192. ach button of the keyboard Every button tune has loop capabilities and can be played as a Dj User Live Guitars New User LIVE GUITARS suitable on Ins Ram memory Edit Pattern New menu where create or edit your own styles Wave Edit Sampler New Menu for Wave track Sampler and MSP Edit You can record and remix your songs within a complete audio MIDI hard disk recording environment B Drawbars Audya includes a built in professional organ with nine faders for digital Drawbars control You can create in real time all the sonic power of a real tonewheel organ featuring percussion click rotary speaker distortion vibrato and much more B USB Audya has an internal large hard disk accessed by USB connection from a computer In this way you can easily manage the musical content of the disk and make backup copies of your songs and settings Moreover two USB ports on the front side panel accept any USB storage device such as pendrives external hard disks CD and DVD players and more B Voicetron The new Voicetron section features a vocalizer with a new five voices engine The vocalizer has an effects library with many presets that can easily fit all the needs of the 6 KETRON AUDYA Top panel The front panel of Audya is divided in various operative sections In the figure below each number corresponds to its description Some buttons and controls on the front panel are marked by a blue serigraphy meaning that a
193. ached to a product it means the product is covered by the European Directive 2002 96 EC 2 Allelectrical and electronic products should be disposed of separately from the municipal waste stream via designated collection facilities appointed by the government or the local authorities 3 The correct disposal of your old appliance will help prevent potential negative consequences for the environment and human health For more detailed information about disposal of your old appliance please contact your city office waste disposal service or the shop where you purchased the product KETRON AUDYA 3 Table of contents 5 Main 5 TOD IN i koci bru dates toanuinonay 7 NETTE 8 USB connectors on the front side 8 The new panel on Audya 4 and 5 9 Connections eeeeeeeeenen nnne nnns 12 AUDIO 12 MIDI 13 VIDEO 14 USB connection eee 14 Display and function keys 16 DIP T 16 F1 F2 F3 F9 and F10 function buttons 16 User
194. ad 12 30 ScurT 03 3 Low Live ne HPeno Detue CE Stole 32 split C3 Octave MUNI S ORUM BASS CHORD LOWER voce Ed MLITE SINGLE Figure 167 Edit Pattern Edit Pattern 16_BEAT_1 63 CONCERT_GRAND BALLAD ARRANGER 2nd Stringst The PATTERN Editor offers all the necessary features 1 to create your own Styles directly on the Ketron ARR A m AUDYA Figure 168 16 BEATIRX 76 37 brna RO POP_SUPER KIT o PARAMETER ee QUANTI E Using Pattern Editor to Create or Edit Styles Major eee In order to access the Pattern Editor screen from the cna conryfs 23 default screen press the User Style button select METR ON e pa COPY a Style to modify or any User style then press the eha Strings VELOCITY ise Guitar rmemerk so cM EDIT button to access the screen shown here voan live Ger Caer amm ENTER for Bank EDIT PATTERN RECORD Switch 3 BAR 8 Here is a detailed explanation of the options SOLO VOLUME NEW STYLE NO LOOP SAVE available Figure 168 F1 Shows the Style s Arranger part to be Edited Created Arranger A B C D F2 PARAMETER access to all Parameter settings for all arrangements F3 In this filed the display shows the chord tonality being edited created whatever is recorded will only be played when this chord type is played apar
195. ain Drum amp bass Lead on off Storing of the DRUM REMIX SEQUENCER new song setup Synchronisation of MIDI files and audio drum Real time song recording REGISTRATIONS Single and block mode DRMI 54 user drum sets 10 percussion sections Drum mixer Manual drums DRUM 2 Audio 240 live drums acoustic electro jazz and Latin loops REAL AUDIO ARRANGER 570 styles with real audio drums and percussions Live accompaniment tracks including acoustic and electric guitars 4 arrangers per style A B C D 3 intro ending 4 fill ins 4 breaks Manual bass Jump Tap tempo Auto Mute for single arranger parts After fill Slow fast tempo Bass pedal board functions Standard recognition and rootless chords Voice to Arrange Pattern section for new styles programming Pianist standard and auto mode Bassist Octave selection 24 semitones Octave doubling KETRON AUDYA 201 Specifications ACCORDION Accordion functions with international and Belgian system Controllable dynamics of bass and chords Octave selectable on manual bass and chord Manual drum on bass and chords DSP EFFECTS 16 new DSP multi effects Reverb chorus flanger delay phaser tremolo tap delay 4 8 wha wha distortion overdrive slow fast rotor parameters 4 band equalizer MICRO 1 MICRO 2 2 microphone inputs with separate gain control 10 band equalizer echo reverb pan pitch shift talk voice transformation VOICETRON Ketr
196. alue wheel Figure 177 When set parameters will be completed press SAVE than back to Main Style Creation page by press EXIT button From this point you can now proceed to recording your Style as usual Record the Drums Bass Chords When done with the recording simply press SAVE U5 10 to save it IMPORTANT QUICK STYLE CREATOR TOOLS Within the Pattern Editor menu you can access and use the huge Library Banks available to help you instantly create professional styles at once v Substitute internal Audio and or Midi Drums with User Audio Drums you ve created recorded sampled or loaded from an external source v Substitute internal Midi Bass parts with the new ones from the Bass Bank v Substitute internal Chord 1 parts with the new ones from the Piano bank v Substitute internal Chord 2 amp 3 parts respectively with the new Guitar Banks 1 and 2 sounds v Substitute internal Chord 4 parts with the new Arp amp Licks melodies v Substitute internal Chord 5 parts with the Live Audio Guitar or User Live Guitar 80 KETRON AUDYA iu NI pu Ti Figure 178 Move the cursor to highlight the desired part and use Dial to select the required Bank Figure 178 During playback you cannot move the cursor vertically from one instrument to another but only horizontally User Styles Audya features two style families FACTORY STYLES and USER STYLES The FACTORY STYLES are the built in styles of Audya an
197. alues 12 semitones F7 Aft amp Port Autoswitch enables disables the automatic activation of the Portamento and the Aftertouch when they are set within a PROGRAM EXPR PEDAL By pressing the F4 button on the KEYBOARD CONTROL page you can access the settings for the EXPRESSION PEDAL Figure 308 that is the pedal to control the expression connected on the rear panel F1 Pedal Curve adjustment of the pedal curve behaviour values NORMAL OPEN and CLOSE1 2 F2 Expr To Song expression control of the song currently playing in the Player values ON OFF F3 Swell To Right expression control on the right hand values ON OFF F4 Swell To Player expression control on Player values OFF ALL WAV 1 WAV 2 MP3 1 MP3 2 ACCORDION By pressing the F5 button on the KEYBOARD CONTROL page you can access the settings for ACCORDION Figure 309 connected via MIDI F1 Mode values Intern Belgig that is International and Belgian F2 Left Velocity adjustment of the left hand Velocity response You can set the values by pressing repeatedly the F2 button and by using the CURSOR lt 4 buttons or the DATA VALUE wheel values 0 63 Soft1 Soft2 Normal Hard1 Hard2 F3 Right Velocity adjustment of the right hand Velocity response You can set the values by pressing repeatedly the F2 button and by using the CURSOR lt 4 buttons or the DATA VALUE wheel values 0 63 Soft1 Soft2 Normal Hard1 Hard2 F4 Left Drum
198. ambora02 3 Roll04 79 Tambora03 32 Snare053 80 Empty 33 Roll05 81 Empty 34 Snare066 82 Empty 35 Kick54 83 Empty 36 Kick52 84 Empty 37 Rimshot21 85 Empty 38 Snare067 86 Empty 39 Snare088 87 Empty 40 Snare089 88 Empty 4 0 89 Empty 42 Stickl4 90 Empty 43 Tom02 9 Empty 44 Stick03 92 Empty 45 03 93 Empty 46 OpenO7 94 Empty 47 Tom04 95 Empty 48 0 96 Empty 49 CrashlO 97 Empty 50 TomO6 98 Empty 5 Ride04 99 Empty 52 Crash02 100 Empty 53 Ridebell03 101 Empty KETRON AUDYA 181 Voice Preset Voice Preset a EL_PIANOS CHROM 182 KETRON AUDYA o ORGAN ae ACCORDION P GUITAR C GUITAR BASS ACOUSTIC FINGER BEEN STRINGS ENSEMBLE p CHOIR POP AHH POP OHH VOCALS BRASS ee eee FLUTE ACOUSTIC DREAM SYNSTRINGS BRIGHTPAD EXPLORER SYNTH Se ETHNIC Voice Preset J AFRICAN MALLET TRES KOTO ZURNA EFFECT SFX ed EFFECT SFX KETRON AUDYA 183 kk vv 0 0 midi channel kk 01H 7FH NOTE ON vv velocity 01 H 7FH 0 means NOTE OFF NOTE OFF 8nH kk vv 0 0 midi channel kk 01H 7FH 2 NOTE OFF 9nH kk 00H vv don t care if command 8nH PITCH BEND EnH bl bh Pitch Bend as specified by bl low bh high bl2 00H 7FH bh 00H 7FH 14 bit resolution Maximum swing is 1 tone default Can be changed using RPN 0000H Center position is b
199. ame m a Fei i i Figure 289 ETE T pl AER E WIL L E Ec Ip vitm fecto ee cw m ma CHORUS CHEL p jar ern tobe Der oct D MET gc EA m mam wm EPA Figure 290 NETTEN AD TEE NEL iilum ar UP a LE e LIP E ie Beer Ted Mewoteni stares cna Mano E Stara Gonos Hen 45 i EC lake one M mm m 3 Phal Figure 291 ELTE TE i COR LE T Cea m Aurei ng um a n He uw ma ol Par 5 VETUS Th ELE Di M oce Tom 5 Pal Figure 292 After you set the parameters you can to store the custom Echo by pressing the USER 5 button SAVE or the SAVE button on the front panel A brief SAVE DATA TO DISK message will appear KETRON e AUDYA 113 DISTORTION By pressing the F4 button on the DSP page you can access the DISTORSION screen as shown in Figure 293 Here you can select the DISTORTION type to set into the DSP in order to make it available for PROGRAMS from which you can choose a DISTORTION algorithm Figure 294 10 Distortion Presets are available in the first page and 10 in the second by pressing any CURSOR button or the DATA VALUE wheel Press any F1 F10 button to select the corresponding Distortion type Overdrive Overdrive3 Tube and Tube2 Distorsion1 Distorsion3
200. ame time Sampler On Menu gt Audio Recording we add a couple new function called Sampler Rec Mic And Sampler Rec Lin In This new feature allows to record directly from microphone or Line in If user operate in wave folder once recording is completed Audya automatically swap on Wave Edit to operate modifications and saving your own sample Player Wave Etit 63 JINGLE BALLAD Grand Piana 2nd Digipad Tempo 0 Transp PIANO Page 2 Cw A VEYSODOOOOO start D 2 A3 wav Vol 53 A B3wav End F 8 CER wav cutoff 127 DFS wav Kew C3 MDS wav End 5510 ES wav pitch Tracking FS wav Loop 1128 AS ie Ide 3 wav Fine AP G3 Wavy WAVE EDIT C3 wav gt IN EDIT MSP VIEWS oT Figure 26 Je 63 JINGLE BALLAD Grand Piana 2nd Digipad Tempo 0 Transp PIANO Page 2 200M 1x start o End 5510 Loop 1128 NORM C3 WAY IN EDIT Time 00 01 Figure 27 k z Figure 28 SLOW BALLAD 63 EmPty voice BALLAD Grand Piana 2nd Grand Piana PIAMO Page 1 MPS RECORDING WAVE REC Main Qutput MIDI SYNC RECORDING SAMPLER REC MIC SAMPLER REC LINE IN SELECT SOURCE UPDATE TIME LEFT PLEASE SELECT MODE Split C 2 Octave Then oress RECORD to start DROM CHORD LOWER Tempo 76 Transp KETRON AUDYA 29 Player B DJ LOOP The DJ LOOP butto
201. armony channel 103 02 Q 127 127 Reverb level Echo level Reverb time 0 40ms Echo time 0 40ms to 127 400ms Reverb echo high pass filter on input 0 no filter Reverb damp high frequency filter on reverb decay Echo damp high frequency filter echo feedback Echo feedback Reverb preset calls a reverb preset See table below for description of the presets Echo preset calls on echo preset See table below for description of the presets 103 2 0 127 Reverb input level 10 13 0 127 O Echo input level 103 0 127 O Send echo to reverb Note EQ band frequencies are fixed to the following values 103 103 103 103 103 103 103 0 127 0 127 0 127 0 127 0 127 0 127 0 127 0 18 127 O Co 10 O Co O oO O O N il KETRON e AUDYA 191 9 Mo Bo p B M 205 6b 7 35 B Reset NRPN NRPN NRPN Data Default value Parameter MSB LSB MSB Soft reset sets most of the vocalizer parameters to their default value all notes off The following parameters are reset pan Control 10 expression Control 11 portamento Controls 5 amp 65 pitch bend lead harmony switches System NRPN 5 to 7 Voice transform controls System NRPN 17 harmony formant amp tone controls Harmony NRPN 11 to 25 vibrato Harmony NRPN 26 to 45 humanization Harmony NRPN 46 to 50 192 KETRON AUDYA TABS for compatibility SD series FO
202. as described for the WAVE screen When a MIDI track is playing and the lyric is shown because you pressed LYRIC ON you can go back to the list of the MIDI files by pressing the EXIT button or the F2 button LYRIC OFF 30 KETRON AUDYA il CER E AD S DOMAAT GRAND Wahi SE LP LT Eug r Wal LIEF LEAD acc ETIT 44 GR WIEN S CHE u ae T 5 TM Figure 29 m 311 T O THAM ahii ai ULT gm mul Y T LM aj LEAD M fi BET Ves ti Pera E VIEN 1 Ae of Rocu vocal mo OF lb MER Sev mE levee U Baro ed h Borel 3 ZUM oF f iDa Band Zn i Chl HiFi nan bree Gor me Pood Pese ree POR faan ETE e MERE e EFE FALE AUI ti NE HaR ETE LEAD DA oem GR VIEW EHEMALS ihi a L fr ul ners PM E MKHERTEA mory E TN E ee tm o Tat REMIE ovr myers Te AE herr CE FEAT E ADI EE EE S RIETI S propre T io ee EF LEAD ON E fore erem oi ed uS WIEN Y Tue Ses Misc rin nid LYRIC Uh nut frviewe U i fee fori Haili Deltr Fd LE n Tii Fail In p Pa Ve n Baba Herh Mere nmi RHD GTI de LM parer red Pore Cowbcs med ral WEE es
203. atically assigned to the C3 key of the keyboard 5 Select another song and press the ENTER button The song will be automatically assigned to the C 3 key of the keyboard 6 Continue assigning all the songs that you want to any key of the keyboard Figure 140 7 You can see the list of single selected files by pressing the TUNE VIEW USER 2 key where you can edit each track settings 8 Press the USER 5 button SAVE to store the KEY TUNE 9 Digit a name on the dialogue box by using the keys on the keyboard The example shows MY TUNE 10 Press SAVE again At this point the KEY TUNE file named MY TUNE will appear on the screen Figure 141 11 To remove a song from a KEY TUNE press the USER 3 button REMOVE below the display B KEY TUNE parameters When you create a KEY TUNE from scratch or edit a previous one you can set the following parameters by using the F1 F10 buttons e F3 STARFT the start note of the trigger interval e g C3 You can set this by pressing directly any keys on the keyboard FA END the end note of the trigger interval e g F3 You can set this by pressing directly any keys on the keyboard e F5 INC DEC you can set the automatic insertion of the trigger interval by increasing decreasing the note automatically For example if you begin from C3 and INC is set the next song is assigned to C 3 If DEC Is set it the next song will be assigned to B2 e F6 VOL sets the output v
204. ation In order to Save Arrange Variation sequence plus Style and Midi button while REMIX function is playing user must activate RECORD button While user manage this procedure all data are saved on Midi file To complete this procedure press SAVE while REMIX is still playing with RECORD button led active By the way with this procedure will be possible record Chord change sequence coming from LEFT part For further information please see LIVE GUITAR HEMIX 2nd method B Saving Procedure We add a couple options in order to Save MIDI REMIX F1 Start Bar F2 Stop Bar F6 Save As Mid Kmx F7 RmxGtr Start Bar and Stop Bar Figure 48 These bar show respectively Beat Start from and Beat Stop to of Midi Remix plus Style which will play Please notice Outside these marker Start and Stop bar Midi File will play with original Drum part Save As Allows to Save your work in a two different format file The first one will be a traditional midi file which include Exclusive message to play it as Remix The second one will be renamed as KMX file This file format is a Ketron proprietary format which include all information to play a Remix plus Style Transposer tempo and so on This file is really useful to export all information over another Audya keyboard and guarantee to play it properly Of course all resources Audiodrum Live guitar must be installed on thus other Audya RmxGtr Live Guitar setting to Save on File MI
205. b Oah Gated Plate Obh User1 Och User2 Odh Users Oah Stereo Tap Obh Mono 3 4 Tap Och Stereo 3 4 Tap Odh Mono 4 4 Tap FOOTSWITCH FO 26 79 03 footswich Status F7 footswitch OOh Sustain 10h Break 3 01h Soft 02h Sostenuto O3h Arr A O4h Arr B 05 Arr C O6h Arr D 07h Int End 1 08h Int End 2 09h Int End 3 Oah Fill 1 Obh Fill 2 3bh Arabic 8 Och Fill 3 Odh Fill 4 Oeh Break 1 Ofh Break 2 40h Arabic 13 41h Micro Talk 42h Fade Out 43h Crash 44h Voice Down 45h Voice Up 46h Harmony 47h Swell 48h Transp 49h Transp 4ah 2nd Voice 4bh Hold 4ch Left Drum 4dh Inter Gtr 4eh Rotor On Off 4fh Rotor Slow Fast VOICETRON 20h Tom Fx Off 11h Break 4 12h Tempo 13h Tempo 14h minor 15h 7th 16h m7th 17h 5 18h dim 19h eth 1ah 7th 1bh Fill In 1ch Kick Off 1dh Snare Off 1eh HiHat Off 1fh Cymbal Off 50h Micro On Off 51h BasToLowest 52h Lead Mute 53h Pianist 54h Bassist 55h Only Kick 56h Drum amp Bass 57h Accordion 58h PianistSust 59h Bass Sust 5ah FillToArr 5bh Bas Mono Poly 5ch Cross Fade 5dh Zoom 5eh Manual Drum 5fh Relntro Assign GM Part to Voicetron FO 26 7B 33 00 gmpart value F7 Voicetron preset FO 26 7B 37 00 Voc Preset F7 Voc Preset 04h Stereo 3 4 05h Mono 4 4 O6h Stereo 4 4 07h Mono Triplet 08h Stereo Triplet 09h Mono Tap Oeh Stereo 4 4 Tap Ofh Mono Triplet Tap 10h St Triplet Tap 11h Usert 12h User2 13h User3 Status 0 off Status 127 ON 30h Di
206. ca02 32 Click 80 TriangleOl 33 MetronomeOl 8 TriangleO2 34 Metronome02 82 Shaker03 35 Kick03 83 Shaker04 36 Kick02 84 SticksO2 37 Rimshot02 85 ClapOl 38 SnareO081 86 Tambourinel 39 Clap02 87 Rimshotll 40 SnareO17 88 SnareOlO 4 0 89 Snare013 42 StickOl 90 Snare028 43 02 9 Stick05 44 Close0l 92 StickO2 45 Tom03 93 Close02 46 OpenOl 94 OpenOIl 47 Tom04 95 Cowbell02 48 Tom05 96 Applause 49 Crash02 97 Belltree 50 TomO6 98 Empty 5 RideOl 99 Empty 52 Crash03 100 Empty 53 RidebellO1 101 Empty 54 TambourineO 102 Empty 55 Crash04 103 Empty 56 Cowbell0l 104 Empty 57 Crash05 105 Empty 58 Vibraslap 106 Empty 59 Ride03 107 Empty 60 Bongo Hi 108 Empty 61 Bongo Low 109 Empty Latin Program Change 66 14 SnareO0l 62 Conga Slap 15 Rollo 63 Conga Hi 16 Roll02 64 Conga Low 17 Snare002 65 Timbales Hi 18 Snare003 66 Timbales Lo 19 Snare004 67 Agogo 20 Snare005 68 Agogo Low 21 SnareO006 69 Cabasa 22 Tom 70 Maracas03 23 Tom Flam02 71 WhistleOl 24 CrashOl 72 Whistle02 25 Snare007 75 Guiro0l 26 Maracas02 74 Guiro02 27 Tom42 75 ClavesOl 28 PanderoOl 76 W Block Hi 29 PanderoO2 77 W Block Lo 30 Pandero03 78 CuicaO0l 3 Kick40 79 Cuica02 32 Kick39 80 TriangleO 33 Toml9 8 TriangleO2 34 MetronomeO02 82 ShakerOl 35 Kick32 83 ShakerO2 36 KickO4 84 SticksO2 37 Rimshotl1 85 Castagnet 38 SnareO009 86 Tambourinel 39 ClapOl 87 Rimshot03 40 SnareOll 88
207. cal division Transpose It shows the transpolf value of the right hand or of the current filely loaded in the Player Split It shows the split point currently set on the keyboard Octave It shows the octave transpolf value for the right hand The F1 button opens the window for style selection It shows also the value of the volume set from STYLE MASTER and the ABCD variation of the Arranger Figure 62 The F2 button opens the window for the REGISTRATION selection Figure 52 More details in the REGISTRATION section of this manual 42 AUDYA Split C3 Right PIANC CONCERT GRAND PRESET 2nd Voice STRINGS1 Left Voice oct 2 63 GRAND PIANO Style BALLAD Slow_Ballad ARRANGER Registration Oct 1 53 MID T T TT 63 Drum Bass Chord Lower LYRIC Fill 1 Fill 4 Sty le Start Figure 62 Tram Wok 63 Style BALLAD 3 Slow_Ballad ARRANGER Right PIANO CONCERT GRAND PRESET CAREGISTRA TION SINGLE SLOW SRG 0002 _POP_ROCK SRG Dons EURO DANCE SRG DOO4 PARTSIEMNE SRG 000S LIVE_BOSS4 SRG OU06_BEGUINE SRG O00 _BLUEGRASS SRG Jazz WALT SR Duns SAMBA Jazz SRG MID Tran T T T OOLO_ROCK SRG Drum Bass Chord Lower 0011 15 BEAT SRG Style Start Figure 63 Wok 63 Main View F3 F4 The F3 button or F4 opens the default PEERS ESSE window for MIDI files selection It also shows
208. created by the user Figure 229 B INS USER 3 By selecting INS you can DRUM SET loaded into RAM B FUNCTION USER 4 By selecting FUNCTION you can access the screen where to set the button SHIFT function which shift the DRUM SET in the range of 24 APCE eee semitones in 12 semitones steps Figure 230 Sars ae a ust Ch tere peg feo Lee B FULL RANGE USER 5 ee eS in By selecting FULL RANGE you can put the Figure 230 DRUM SET on the entire keyboard or on the left LOW BALLAD 61 DOKTER T JERARD split SPLITTED te Tore bogu Creating or editing a user DRUM SET Ee 1 Press the USER 2 button USER to enter the user Ss n a DRUM SET editing window Figure 231 wee ex 2 Select one of the 10 USER DRUM of the first window by using the F1 F10 buttons or one of DAM GMI uma c i 10 of the second window accessible by using iw nas TN se dnm oe lt 4 buttons or the DATA VALUE um 3 Press the EDIT button on the front panel A window like Figure 232 will appear 4 Press F1 KEY to select the percussive instrument to assign to the note played on the keyboard On our example is C1 of the KICK percussive group oon INA 3 If you assign another percussive instrument but DA r Dirie 5 press any other key on the keyboard 1 PUECET CE Pag T ue dedi ee Figure 232 KETRON e AUDYA 95 Drum
209. cro Recording feature is selected the display will show a sub menu with the possibility to assign a name and other options Figure 338 e Macro Restore if set to On at the end of the Macro Recording sequence will be automatically restored all the previous panel conditions of the machine before the Macro performance e Macro Rec Keyb Enable Disable for the keyboard recording e Macro Play Keyb Enable Disable for keyboard playing during the Macro reproduction e Macro Play Tab Enable Disable for the panel tab functioning during the Macro playback e Sync Start Rec this function permits to start automatically the Macro recording as soon the Style is activated In order to use this feature it s enough to exit by pressing the tab Menu and then return to the Main View doing Start to the Style the MACRO will begin it s recording e Sync Stop Rec the feature allow to stop the Macro recording with the Stop fo the Style Bm Macro Recording amp Playback Once a name is given and the various options are 11 T Gp AP abri EE Lar LER AXIS CLER i E i hin CONTROL DUTPUT ASN nu ine APSO AME i Ramiro UNTETLED Pig Pur kargi Slat Ba CST Figure 338 selected it is possible to start the Macro Recording by pressing the tab START REC user 5 10 All the following events prod
210. ctly by pressing the MENU button To store the Chorus type at start up press the SAVE button on the front panel and F6 CUSTOM STARTUP CHORUS LEFT GM From the CHORUS page by pressing the F2 button LEFT GM REVERB you can access the page for the selection of the Chorus for the left hand and the GM parts The available Chorus Preset are the same of those for the right hand seen before To lock the Chorus also when changing Program or Registration or at start up press the Lock ON button corresponding to the USER 1 button as shown by the arrow on Figure 286 After the effect type selection exit by pressing the EXIT button or directly by pressing the MENU button USER CHORUS When you select the Chorus for the right hand or the left hand and the GM parts you can choose one of the 5 USER CHORUSES Figure 287 corresponding to the F6 F10 buttons of the second CHORUS page By pressing the EDIT button on the front panel you can customize the User Chorus and store them as User Cho1 User Cho2 User Cho3 User Cho4 and User Cho5 The Figure 288 shows the parameters of User that you can modify by using the F1 F10 buttons and the CURSOR lt 4 buttons or the DATA VALUE F1 User Cho choose from 1 to 5 F2 LEVEL Chorus level values 0 63 F3 TIME Chorus time values 0 63 F4 MODE Chorus mode Chorus Flanger Tremolo and Phaser F7 FEEDBACK feedback amount values 0 63 F8 DEPTH Chorus depth values 0 63
211. curve of the keyboard You can set the values by pressing repeatedly the F6 button The available values are Soft1 Soft2 Normal Hard1 and Hard2 You can select also a fixed Velocity Curve value VEL CURVE FIXED In this case set the fixed value by using the CURSOR a gt buttons or the DATA VALUE wheel values 1 63 VEL FILTER emo feeen By pressing the F7 button from the KEYBOARD EUN s umm gt CONTROL page you can set the Velocity Filter Figure EFBOED CONTR mazim 312 that is the dynamic curve of the filter You can set the values by pressing repeatedly the F7 button The available values are Openi Open2 Close1 and Closed ARABIC By pressing the F8 button from the KEYBOARD CONTROL page you can access a window like Figure 313 where you can set the Arabian scale parameters F1 Left Scale sets the Arabian scale for the left hand Values NO ARR and LOW that is no scale Arabian scale to the Arranger or to the Lower part F2 Footswitch pedal modes Values NO NOTE AR SET that is no parameter pedal controlling the note or the Arabic set from 1 to 16 F7 Arabic Set selection of one Arabic set from 1 to 16 F8 Koma Tab Harmony activation of the Koma i Ls 1 1 a LEGE FEE IDEWEY Figure 313 Modifying one set Using the 6th bth eighth on Audya 4 and 5 select the note you want to alter change the amount of tune by using the dial When done p
212. d can be accessed by using the keypad in the STYLE section and the ordinary selection of the style by using the F1 F10 buttons as already described in the Styles chapter on page 17 The styles of this family cannot be modified meaning that you cannot overwrite them You can load these FACTORY STYLES into memory and play them However you can edit the style currently loaded in memory by using the edit pages described in STYLE VIEW See on page 67 Then you can store the edited style as USER STYLE B Storing a FACTORY STYLE as a USER STYLE 1 Select a FACTORY STYLE Once you have modified the style in the Style Modeling environment see STYLE VIEW on page 69 press the SAVE button 3 You will be prompted to input a name for the USER STYLE Digit a name on the dialogue box by inputting characters directly from the keyboard and press SAVE again Figure 179 4 After saving the style will be available in the USER STYLES area Figure 1180 5 Load the modified style from the USER STYLES area by pressing the USER STYLES button To reload the style that you have modified and stored you must search it and load it from the USER STYLES area User Styles 5L CM BAL ATI CEN mU CAVE are a4 geri LU Lal Figure 179 MY TALL mU qiue A MEW RALAD A Posos A MEW A SLOW FULL AD A SOFT 1 SELLE IUH
213. d on WAVE EDIT Audya display will show a screen shot alike the previous issue The main remarkable difference is LOOP F4 Figure 27 LOOP feature as well name say allows to set a Loop point on the selected wave previously imported The LOOP point will be notable on display by the Green horizontal line as showed by Once LOOP point is selected F4 button value can be edited by usual directional button or with Alpha Dial When navigation arrows are both pressed LOOP point will be set at the same START point automatically Thus caused repetition of whole waveform If arrows button will be pressed once again this feature will be de activated The SAMPLER recognizes the LOOP Point which can be assigned by using a professional Audio Editor on a computer As previously mentioned a START END Loop preview feature is possible by pressing assigned wave button of MSP NORM and FADE function need a rendering PREVIEW as well mentioned on previous issue Once modification will be completed you can save your edit file by SAVE feature If during a SAVE procedure a different name will be used Audya will replace automatically the previous file with the new one named assigned Figure 28 If MSP file is arranged with several sounds to operate on MSP VIEW will be necessary press Enter to select than WAVE EDIT in order to operate directly on a Single file On this feature we suggest to use SOLO function to avoid other wave playing at the s
214. dd Wav this command permit to add the Wav to the MIDI file F9 Play Wav allow to Play the selected Wave Figure 42 Once all parameters are set properly the user can arrange a sort of preview of the final project simply by playing the MIDI file F10 In order to save the new MIDI Audio Wave Sync NIIT E ERARE rand Pie r i nd aul is TR wog od _ 14 wee ee LA mee JA EE ere ee eee eee 7 5 Elechrigt Payer ems lt har Pattern 4 wm Long lir B5 wir EMI jatana ip nan males SELECT FREE Figure 40 p MITES D i Lew Oe 11 mei al P Exttisn CuccuPM md m EIS em E AU re ELIT ws ISIN Tam uit je lA we CT rea ra adi L ES 3 vt Pier bie Pal teri me _ gu Patiri rir 3 Denis d i 154185 wire vnm Piy Ha ELITARE Gata ts BG Ti pr z D Si Figure 41 1 ase Lil P WaT Em d e iii EE ET nink ro QUE Eat FU pe Eg s bts way eum rod D I ws Li PIELEA wary mdhire y peccet n AC war Er 154 1 ES te Pas Ad gren d wars mea oce was Uer P a E108
215. dow will appear where to set the Program Change reception filter Figure 272 By using the buttons F1 10 you can select the parts to filter F1 Right F2 Left F3 Bass F4 Drums F5 ALL PARTS F6 Global global channel of the keyboard F7 Registration F8 Voicetron F9 ARRANGER CHORDS opens another window F10 VOICE DRAWBAR opens another window Select the MIDI reception filter options by using the CURSOR A V buttons or the DATA VALUE wheel Press the CURSOR lt 4 gt buttons to set the FILTERED value to activate the filter or the value to deactivate the filter The filter options are the following Figure 272 273 274 PITCHBEND WHA ADSR ADSR 0 0 CUTOFF Chorus Effect TRANPOSE RX From the first screen of the MIDI menu by pressing the F3 button a window will appear where to set the MIDI reception of the parts transposition By using the F1 F10 buttons or the CURSOR A buttons you can select the parts to transpose via MIDI reception as shown in Figure 275 By using the CURSOR lt 4 buttons or the DATA VALUE wheel you can assign 36 semitones transposition value in 1 semitone steps By pressing the CURSOR lt 4 together you set the default value that is no transposition F1 Right F2 Left F3 Bass F4 Lower1 F5 Lower2 F6 Chord1 F7 Chord2 F8 Chord3 F9 Chord4 F10 Chord5 108 KETRON AUDYA 65 COMRAT
216. drum on the left hand values ON OFF F5 Autochord automatic chords values ON OFF F6 Bass Sustain sustain for the bass values 0 63 F7 Bass To Chord bass to chord values ON OFF F8 Bass Octave bass octave values 2 octaves F9 Lower1 Octave Lower1 part octave values 2 octaves F10 Lower2 Octave Lower1 part octave values 2 octaves Press the USER 1 button ACTIVE INACTIVE to activate the ACCORDION parameters Once you set the parameters you can to store the ACCORDION parameters by pressing the USER 5 button SAVE or the SAVE button on the front panel A brief SAVE DATA TO DISK message will appear A AD ndr pe 1 kg aT Tl x 41 41 41 inum peci Pai Figure 307 Wadi 1 cea ees ees an Ente n hare i wi Per do bea Pem Mud on i pe ia mem ce 4 mw Pm ro Dii M oce nm 5 Phal Figure 308 14 ETT IE AH Figure 309 LEFT DRUM By pressing the USER 3 button on the ACCORDION page as shown by the arrow on Figure 309 you can access the LEFT DRUM page where to set percussive instruments for the left hand See next page BS ON STOP By pressing USER 4 button on ACCORDION page User enable disable Bass note played on Style Stop feature KETRON e AUDYA 119 By using the F1 F10 buttons from the LEFT DRUM page Figure 310 you can set the percussive instruments for the left ha
217. dule 8 dynamic curves Aftertouch Portamento Operating system updatable via USB port 17 Volume slider controls 1 assignable 10 display User Tab Audya 8 Right 52 button Left 120 basses Left and Right separate velocity range controls 6 velocity curves Pitch modulation aftertouch and portamento controls Operating system updatable via USB port 17 volume slider controls with 1 assignable 10 display User Tab USB pen drive Floppy USB MP3 Player CD ROM and DVD ROM HD must be with power supply or built in USB pen drive and Hd must be on FAT 32 formatted based 360 MB PCM wavetable 32 MB rewritable by user 384 Orchestral presets Stereo and multi layer Voices 512 GM2 sounds 32 parts multitimbral Up to 320 custom sound locations 20 User Voice List UVL associated to MIDI file MP3 Wave Styles 9 digital drawbars slow fast rotor percussion and overdrive 320 Programs 3 Voices 3 splits Functions sustain portamento velocity switch duet trio morphing steel slide harmony Editing ADSR cut off resonance effects 2nd Voice 64 MB RAM sounds loadable from disk 2 WAV 2 MP3 2 MIDI Time stretching and audio transposition in real time Play list autoplay MP3 encoder modifiable resolution Audio Ripper from CD with wave transform and saving SMF player with KAR file karaoke and TXT file text KAR and MIDI file conversion type 0 to type 1 Jukebox Intelligent transposition Song ch
218. e RAM INS SUPERSOLO button of the third row in the VOICE section The display will show a list of the INS voices stored on the hard disk 2 Select one voice by using the CURSOR A V JU 3 Press the SELECT button that appears on the m display next to the USER 5 button A dot will m m appear before the name of the selected INS CU Am voice Repeat the choice in order to select more INS voices by using the CURSOR A V and the v SELECT button Figure 5 Jm 4 Press the ENTER button to load in the memory Fo location all the selected INS voices In the foo 9 1D E cC example five INS voices have been loaded in the j mo ym first five memory locations corresponding to the F1 F5 buttons Figure 6 For advanced operations about the INS voices see on page 98 0 t EDU W g Figure 5 The INS voices appear on the display with an asterisk For example DJIANGO ins If you try to load one voice already loaded in memory this will not be loaded twice E bu 152 eet a 2H 1 p minui J Om pe E m EI e The RAM INS indication next to the SUPERSOLO button rm F L mi means that the INS voices will be loaded into memory temporarily For this reason when you power OFF the To LM e INS voices will not be retained in memory U t3 k3 g Figure 6 KETRON e AUDYA 19 Selecting voices Adding a second voice to the right ha
219. e a Wha Wha effect By pressing 140 KETRON AUDYA Text scrolling In addition to the ordinary lyric functions showing synchronized text contained in the Standard MIDI files karaoke Audya allows to synchronize lyric with any audio and MP3 file B Combining a text file with a MIDI file an MP3 or a WAVE file 1 Make the USB connection to access the hard disk of Audya After connecting open the WAVE folder and copy a text file an ordinary TXT file containing the lyric of a song The name of the TXT file must be identical to the title of the song except the file extension Figure 380 In the example the text file is Chill Out txt corresponding to the song Chill Out wav 2 After disconnecting properly the USB connection press the WAVE button to access the WAVE folder containing the songs 3 Select the song matching the same TXT file and start playback by pressing the START button Figure 381 4 Press F2 LYRIC ON to show the lyric on the display Figure 382 5 When necessary jump to the next page of lyric by pressing the CURSOR button to display the next lyric page Figure 383 B Synchronizing the lyric auto scroll 1 Playback the WAVE file MIDI or MP3 2 Press the RECORD button 3 Scroll the text pages by pressing the CURSOR V button as necessary 4 While the file is still running press the SAVE button 5 You will be prompted to save the TXT file 6 Confirm 7 When you restart th
220. e current file is playing back you can select a file from the list by using the CURSOR A buttons or the DATA VALUE wheel and start by using the button ENTER To return to the main window press the F3 button or F4 again Main View hilt i oa a i PLURI LEAD Oli ce m at A Ge tw way LEJU DN Diektra Phe ay a ici bh mz vee For Lee Gabe vers Harp r17tervea HHZ Mf 2 wHg fuper Gt s E Lus Punon ops T xs cerni Pot awe Lr 7 5 LAGE n T INTERVAL LA Hi BAT KIT 1 LEE Fur HON vri v 1141 44 Figure CESE 2100 Tm 08103 I EMEP IO Fu sion Funk JE d Fee ire ande Bot Loren Fee of the reor I HH 1 UOCE Int 3 Fusion Funk AGE E At da od iic o ce idt for Ship wnh ffe zen ng pk 309 Fore Mie ee visor exiis vw FLUAGEL NEM MU WAY FOLE LIVE GETAR WAY HEEP INTERVALS WAY Wy LIKE RESON TTAL FLEA Wd Figure 74 KETRON e AUDYA 45 Main View MP3 SFX Player MAIN VIEW From the MAIN VIEW window you can select directly the MP3 or SFX files on disc B Selecting an MP3 SFX file from MAIN VIEW 1 The default MAIN VIEW window
221. e song the displayed lyric will change in sync Text Scrolling E i Figure 380 TAN Aa io TEE PIANO Poo BAV um F OL Toa Temi vocniMure bt Te OL Wale wi UN EU Age ot Roch sca bet fae nf hock ver wry I io 581 eer cise vem rice i Baroque way r Pot Eip Emad 1 fiabe the wor Hab Fe UC cm ui Out txt 1 dinan iy rr LE ug NR i aur Pis WB ler G i WAVE FEST me Chill Cort 6 COMERT GRAND REELE re Chars pag s kj RT ie spe pisi leave me alone ume ow Note by note just zx ot kidding once more Feel the music growing HY oe VEW Tree li WAVL 081 MEET gt gt Tama Ob du ict FT Figure 382 and drum you have My FOLDERS indi VIEW Te Ver G Trwep n wave HET EE ga 15 nz Figure 383 KETRON e AUDYA 141 Disk Disk Audya features a bunch of functions dedicated to the disk management B Disk Menu 1 Press the DISK button to see the content of the internal disk Figure 384 The disk contains a certain number of folders that you can access by using the CURSOR A V or the DATA VALUE wheel The content is DJ LOOP MSP MIDIFILE STREAM LIST MP3 USER VOICE LIST PLAYLIST USER AUDIO DRUM SFX USER LIVE GUITAR USER STYLES USER DATA WAVE INSTRUMENTS REGISTRATION SYS
222. e046 Tom38 Snare058 Stick24 Snare059 Tom41 Stick07 44 Stick22 92 Stickll 45 Tom40 93 Stick18 Drum Set 46 OpenO5 94 Close0l 47 Tom40 95 Reverse 48 Tom39 96 Applause 49 Crash02 97 Belltree 50 Tom39 98 Empty 5 Ride02 99 Empty 52 Crash03 100 Empty 53 RidebellO 101 Empty 54 TambourineO 102 Empty 55 Crash04 103 Empty 56 Cowbell0l 104 Empty 57 Crash05 105 Empty 58 Vibraslap 106 Empty 59 Ride03 107 Empty 60 Bongo Hi 108 Empty 61 Bongo Low 109 Empty Electro Program Change 88 14 SnareO0l 62 Conga Slap 15 RollOl 63 Conga Hi 16 Roll02 64 Conga Low 17 SnareO002 65 Timbales Hi 18 Snare003 66 Timbales Lo 19 Snare004 67 Agogo_Hi 20 Snare005 68 Agogo Low 21 Snare006 69 Cabasa 22 Tom FlamO 70 MaracasOl 23 Tom Flam02 71 WhistleOl 24 CrashO0l 72 WhistleO2 25 Snare007 73 GuiroO 26 Fingsnap OI 74 Guiro02 27 Slap 75 ClavesOl 28 SnareO08 76 W Block Hi 29 Scratch Up 77 W Block Lo 30 Scratch Down 78 Cuica0l 31 SticksOl 79 Cuica02 32 Click 80 TriangleOl 33 MetronomeOl 8 TriangleO2 34 MetronomeO2 82 ShakerOl 35 Kick48 83 ShakerO2 36 Kickl5 84 SticksO2 37 85 ClapOl 38 Snare030 86 Tambourinel
223. el to load the INS block and all its instruments at one time Figure 244 While loading the INS voices if there is not enough room in memory a warning message will appear inviting to free one or more memory locations of INS voices by using the F2 button CLEAR SELECT or the F6 button CLEAR ALL OB KETRON AUDYA ul CHA BALL ALI Emil vie ap A certi um nurs Lb ii iat oe Fe oe ee k Cee ye ee ad FEN TP Caley San gt mu iio E censis d BY CHTMICS ines TET m our p tani CL CHOISIS UU ins Rank Js im desk pare Pr artic Figure 242 ah LEET Fu p AL Poot yoo Til LL fait Fase DATES 5 CLT Tams Enty Bt GRAT LATO Si Bice 142 i trea AY A T BRE Mtr EI E S EP bts aT E DCE TIIITE T i hi NR kal OLEIS HEAT OY E ALI FP TRIEPE NT PERPE surda FAE Enetr ET GRAFT ATO SAL n Cie deco rici ied BB E 15 m3 2 4 CH ii o Eins PET Fir Pa 55256 EB i Figure 244 When you can access to RAM INS section you can find the folder called SUPERSOLO containing high quality exclusive for AUDYA orchestral voices MSP Audya offers a complete Multi Sample Player editor To access
224. en drives card readers etc For the connection to a computer please use the USB connector on the rear panel IL x Line In Standard RCA connectors for line right left input RIGHT LEFT of stereo devices with line level signal CD Player etc Sustain Pedal Standard mono jack for the connection of one Sustain pedal optional Volume Pedal Standard stereo jack for the connection of one Volume pedal optional Foot Switch Standard multipolar connector for an optional pedal to control internal functions MIDI Standard MIDI IN IN2 KEYB MIDI OUT and MIDI THRU jacks USB Device Standard USB port type B for the connection to a personal computer Video Interface Standard VGA jack for the connection to an external video VGA monitor Main Switch Fuse Standard AC power connection 220 V with ON OFF switch and protection fuse USB connector 1 USB connector for pen drives and other USB devices card readers players hard disk etc USB connector 2 The same of USB 1 Along the keyboard from C3 to E6 you can find letters and numbers for easy input of names when saving Please do not use a USB cable longer than 30 cm KETRON AUDYA files on the hard disk and for a quick file search On Audya 4 and Audya 8 use arrows key 4 gt A V Introduction The new panel on Audya 4 and 5 Multi Tabs are made of a group of 16 buttons on the left side of the keyboard with which you can activate a
225. ess a button on the VOICE section Preset Figure 192 RIAN a ee Program or GM Voice mene a o 3 By using the CURSOR gt buttons or the c jaro rime ce DATA VALUE wheel select an instrument within the category For example FM PIANO of the EL Piano category 4 Repeat the operation for each slot 5 Press the F5 button Style Enabled to enable the function for the single Style 6 Press the F10 button Global Enabled to enable the VOICE TO ARRANGE function globally for all the Styles 7 Save your choices into the current style by pressing the SAVE button on the front panel wot e jenen EEE Eam ES ui one eser SR E Figure 193 B ORIGINAL FILL The original fill will be always executed B ORIGINAL BREAK The original break will be always executed B INTRO TO ARRA After the intro is executed the arranger moves automatically to Arr A B STYLE BALANCE Shows the volume balance of the style with the main volume of the keyboard 84 KETRON AUDYA m DRUM 1 By pressing the USER 2 DRUM once you can access to the first edit window of the audio drum Figure 194 F1 LIVE DRUM sets the STRETCH or PITCH mode for Audio Style Modeling of the live drum The STRETCH algorithm default guarantees a good audio quality even changing the tempo The available range is 3096 up to 38 of the nominal speed of the wave The PIT
226. evices When is the MAIN VIEW is active the search engine looks different from the normal view a isin Lr E T3 DITE mTMaVO Dr Er TX gn Way enr 6 m Searching a file in the MAIN VIEW window L 2 r1 1 Press the SEARCH button i Fi 2 The last open directory of the disc will appear Bus Gerd aa SEHE ym Wi Figure 370 harg TE 3 Use the CURSOR A V buttons or the DATA igure ge PG lim L u ME Nw VALUE wheel and the ENTER button to search a TULIT folder search CONCERT GRAND 4 Digit the name of a file even partially inputting a letters and numbers from the keyboard 5 In Figure 371 only the character S is inputted the engine locates the first entry of the file name starting with an S The found file will be highlighted 6 In Figure 372 by entering the second character the engine locates more precisely what you are looking for 7 Repeat inputting characters as you like 8 When the file you are looking for it s found you can press the ENTER button to start the file In Figure 373 is SOLO TROMBONE WAV 9 By pressing the EXIT button on the front panel you can change the search folder on the disc 10 By pressing the USER 5 button EXIT as shown by the arrow on Figure 374 you can exit the search function and return to the ordinary MAIN VIEW window gy Fh rm Lis
227. files and two bak files backup files of the two original wav files BALLAL ua NI il 144 LIT E a IT my C manga Lx T If vr FGD FEH WE LEAD DM i ft m mz d imis F feram Mucho mii LIED ON I m I oDector Iemqge mec F tee Diol mid Eri Prout rd 22 OLOR VEW T D MARKER t Heo Marce song reci BiH Harc Wear wer ined us rebas Heyet AT mad E Aeros dali mg Tt c OMISIT d LEAD Dh Po Doo Veneto re P Him Macho mi LYRE Ote i 72 iiie Docior Divireuned Halic Deli s rid EDOM NT Pu Ner Fail inr mid din wWw En Rr mad HAB EET Poncho Mardatr ben med t Beech awe mii z I Heni Mr rouen CET TR Mx f Pam Fell cmd ug NR i aur Pile Ir agus MIDI 2 z LLAN UH aea ee Id Ti VEALW Lyne UM D as Cabaret i p Pater eerie BXM un laeso Doi s rid DW U Meer Fa Im rl E La e nrc Pese med POPE Meere nnn rm E Pim wm tm 4 it i t JTE x A SHE A B IL V C 1MILCFILE LEAD Form Ferrer ed F uaa cala d La LIRIE ON BIB Pu dnhpgk vue m Ivy F Dx Immun MARKER Helio Do med BEM X Off x Lg Vues Er Evene m s Mi rocas eme nonne s ME E Figure
228. for mal rut Trap MITT AN s j mee GUTTA i MisE ETLE Mr LvatC DN Pa WAT DATA MEER WOE LET ZOOM OE oe wr Ij E wok FIR E arr LOU 151 i Bor C ALL TAS TEU O aupv 325 MEM Ee INTE a nL Figure 164 OOMCERT GRAND E LLAD LI DUE Pret Tern im ead H gun 1 E ER LIVE GOTAR PErTETTETE E APL ECT Ae gi ILL Dt Cane eck gtr CAE ETNOCEZ gi i ACT ae ot 1 1 0 Rb CLASSIC gtr EE MA 3 NEW GTR E s SLOWCOUNT EY gt A LAE oF 3 soRAGTR Metas gtr zs CS vns RIGHT dt Figure 165 SLOVW_BALLAD 63 CORNCERT_GRAND Grand Piana end Strings Tempo 76 Transp PIANWG Page 1 CAUSER LIVE GUITARS GARAGEROCK ES L6ELECTAP gtr CLEAR ALL GARAGEROCK L gtr GARAGEROCK GRRAGEROCKZ atr LOAD GTR J z ZGUITAR atr JAZZGUITAR E CLASSIC atr SAVE SEL E RNB NEW GTR DCTAVE E SLOWCOUNTRY atr ALDAD OFF El SOKAGTR V amp LS LEFT atr O E VALS_RIGHT gtr GTR Enabled cINTERNAL REEL 317 7T Figure 166 SLOVW_BALLAD 63 CONCERT_GRAND BALLAD ARRANGER A 2nd Strinast Tempo 76 Transp FIMO Page 1 audia Drum chi 16 BEAT1 76 41 38 Groove chz POP 25 countryz 1 ch3 Precision 40 Pianoi 2i Low 1 Arpt Lick Digip
229. g the root and the seventh you obtain the seventh chord Easy 2 Similar to Easy 1 but it keeps in memory all the previously played notes even if one note or more are released 14 i Ai da CT i AL ruj EL TUS m enne se weweramm sm jemm rums ewe ncs Pars wiae sm Fpa astar o qv pert j l ew T U a Sage ii Eg A t EE ae uj Figure 190 Wu EL Vb L dg zu time aF t jen neer ama e a rums mwe ricer cer e Fingered 1 The chord is recognized only by the notes really ee femra played pee sai coe e Fingered 2 i1 a EF E ES fA Loe Similar to Fingered 1 but it Keeps in memory all the previously played notes even if one note or more are released Figure 191 TLE E ff ROOTLESS When the parameter is ON Figure 191 it allows a particular recognition of the chords without the root uR Ant Ls emen pe B MODES 2 Ee to By pressing the USER 1 button twice you can 1 fe access the second MODES window Figure 192 OE or mener see This screen allows to enable disable the VOICE ical d mat Cte TO ARRANGE function This function lets you o play an instrument on the right split accordingly to Variation A B C D of any style 1 From the window with the empty slots Figure 193 press any F1 F4 buttons n 2 Pr
230. ght the section LYRIC To the left the list of the MIDI files on the disc In this way while the current file is playing back you can select the file from the list using the CURSOR A buttons or the DATA VALUE wheel and start using the ENTER button Press the F3 button or F4 again to dispaly the ordinary window Press the F10 button To switch the window LYRIC ON OFF HOME button of the MIDI Player By pressing the MIDI button of the Player you can enter the usual list of MIDI files on the disc The window now shows the HOME function activated by the USER 3 button as illustrated in Figure 70 The HOME function is useful when you want return to the MAIN VIEW and operate from the new functions 4 4 KETRON AUDYA cro tre res li Pa L aa gE e c RET a ic LE a 1 mr i m Slow Ballad CELESTA MY_REGISTRATION ME a bs T T oi Dian Bari MEM TOS HE WARCE WAGERMID 0 Figure 67 i MEUS Spit C3 EL SWING min Slow Ballad zw GRAND PIANO reg wert LS natervea Dos lerguf ev mi ize ee r TEC mr im GRAND PIANO Satie oct m Slow _ Ballad erin CAMIDU EJ ANUKGMD WEM T AH Pin M re Toy Po Pr3 E do ACHAT ie Wakes Pu qnem ler DOC TOR ZP ALM T x COMES MID DIESE CE m RE M reel hr De Emi a LA VIL DH
231. gio amp Lick Library offers a variety of em bellishment for various instruments Piano Guitar 72 KETRON AUDYA Strings Synth Banjo It works in place of the Chord 4 of the Style You can store 4 Arp amp Lick for any A B C and D part 5 Live Guitar The Live Guitar are audio guitar sequences controlled and synchronized by using MIDI To scroll the parts please refer to the lists at the end of this manual 6 Piano Bank Huge Midi Piano pattern library available on Chord 1 section Can be used instead of original programmed style midi part 7 Guitar 1 Bank Huge Midi Guitar pattern library available on Chord 2 section Can be used instead of original programmed style midi part 8 Guitar 2 Bank Huge Midi Guitar pattern library available on Chord 3 section Can be used instead of original programmed style midi part B Setting an Audio Drum Groove Bank or Live Guitar The selection of the tables for these three parts is the same This is the procedure to set an Audio Drum The procedure is the same for the other two parts With the Arranger stopped press the STYLE VIEW button 1 Press the F1 button 2 Wait please will appear briefly while reading the Audio Style from disc The part now is called Audio Drum 3 Turn the DATA VALUE wheel to scroll all the avail able tables or digit the number of the table by using the numeric keypad of the style section For exam ple digit 201 to se
232. hand For example when you play bass solos B SPLIT Holding the SPLIT button a small keyboard at the bottom of the display appears By pressing any key on the keyboard you can set the split point for the Arranger In the example the SPLIT point has been set on F2 note Figure 16 The SPLIT point is always set on C3 note at startup B PIANIST The PIANIST button allow you to play on the entire keyboard Basically by pressing this button you remove the SPLIT point If Arranger mode the chords will be recognized on the entire keyboard B LEFT VOICE By pressing the LEFT VOICE button this will flash until you choose the voice for the left hand Figure 17 Once selected press LEFT VOICE button again For the detailed explanation of the PLAY CONTROL section please see the following pages corresponding to the namesake buttons e DRUM MIXER page 92 GM PART page 89 e STYLE MODE page 82 e STYLE VIEW page 67 USER ASSIGNABLE page 140 e SEARCH page 138 Play Control SLOW BALLAD 63 CONCERT_GRAND FALLAL Grand Piana end Strinasl Tempo 7 amp Transp PIANO Page 1 CONCERT GRAND ROMANTIC GRAND UPRIGHT PIANC TIME PIANO POP GRAND D TNAPIANC HONK Y_ TONK HARPSICHORD LATIN PLANO CLAVI Split TEL F Figure 16 SLOW BALLAD 5 amp 3 CORNCERT_GRAND FALLAL Grand Piana end Strings1 Tempo 7 amp Transp PIANO Page 1 CONCERT GRAND ROMANTIC GRAND UPRIGHT PIANC TIME PIANO POP GR
233. he REGISTRATION BLOCK Press the SAVE button and give a name to the 62 KETRON AUDYA 5 CGM CRAD mr Figure 131 CR 1 i DH PS TENE Erry Prats 60a oca eR E DO 0 OO Lipi MIT EN PARERI PPa r 3 mtt si DOLL Ii MH imi xx zx E uA S CO Bua tR EU te pao nc wa me mmm eo en Sic oe mes Figure 133 REGISTRATION BLOCK 9 By using the F1 F10 buttons you can recall the corresponding item Style Voice or Player When you enter the Registration Block EDIT mode the NUMERIC option is automatically disabled B Recalling a REGISTRATION from the MAIN VIEW window If the MAIN VIEW function and the NUMERIC ON function are enabled by pressing the F2 button you can directly recall the REGISTRATION number by using the numeric keypad 1 From the MAIN VIEW window press the F2 button Enter Number gt will appear Figure 134 2 Digit a REGISTRATION number by using the numeric keypad Wait Please will appear Figure 135 The corresponding REGISTRATION will be searched and loaded 3 If the NUMERIC ON function is disabled you must manually select the REGISTRATION by using the CURSOR A V buttons or the DATA VALUE wheel and by pressing the ENTER button Figure 13
234. he available functions by pressing DATA CURSOR Left and Right or using the dial The following table shows the available functions 32 CONCERT GRAND 53 BALLAD Grand Piana end Strings 33 Tempo 100 Transp PISNO Page 1 DRUM ON OFF Audio Reset FACTORY TAB Wave Filter GM PAGE ARABIC SCALE Whawha BassToRoot ASSIGH TAB Lead Mute PLAYLIST Lyric OnrOff Cave LRL Split C3 Octave 31 zu zu zv DELI Bass CHORD LOWER B 3 5 Figure 4 Transp Only Kick F5 PLAYLIST This mode allows you to drive the first 16 tracks of any loaded playlist The first press on the button starts the corresponding track playback and re selecting the same button while the LED is lit the track playback is stopped m7th Voicetron Arabic 4 Arabic 5 F6 FACTORY TABS It sets the multi tabs factory default KETRON AUDYA 11 Connections AUDIO connections Stereo jack connection to a PA system q a om LINE INPUT 1and2 ayia MAIN OUT L R MAIN OUT RIGHT LEFT eSI I WM 5555 E e AMPLIFIED SPEAKERS INPUT L INPUT R AMPLIFIED SPEAKERS 12 KETRON AUDYA Connections Connecting one or two microphones and one headphones MICRO 2 MICRO 1 STEREO HEADPHONES 00 mms o ODER a i j E t 1 E o bio A c m L ull 77 SO UAA MIDI con
235. he last Preset corresponding to the F10 button on the second page is MIDI MODE shown by the arrow on Figure 352 that is the harmonization mode controlled by the MIDI file In this mode the harmonization is automatically controlled by the melody track of the MIDI file Please see Setting the VOCAL mode on the GM Parts section in this manual Voicetron SLCM BUA ij j 1 ex WU T TR T FAN SF RCT SM M em a al T CRANN Ls Lx pg Pe lt _ pP _ REVERBMEDUM TP REVERB LARGE COONMECTICH PRESET SELECTION Page 1 DEM LOFER 2 r F EEE SO DALLAN Na T CANG Dix IE Trad Stewed STANDARD TRIO STANDARD TRIO 2 CHAINED TRIL pM Ells Eee PRESET SELECTION Pave 1 witch kk a n ET Pa Diu biii Crue Phu Ejj SELECTED Page a Fi amp 83 HORD LOWER aj KETRON AUDYA 133 Voicetron Editing a VOCALIZER effect 1 Select a VOCALIZER effect 2 By pressing the EDIT button a window like Figure 353 will appear 3 Press the F1 F10 buttons to access the parameters of the Preset F1 DUET duet effects 2 trio effects F3 QUARTET quartet effects F4 QUINTET quintet effects F5 FIXED INTERV fixed interval effects F6 VOCODER vocoder parameters F VOIC
236. he three instruments You can set the split points for each VOICE playing directly on the keyboard For example lower NOTE of the first VOICE 1 higher NOTE of the first VOICE 2 lower NOTE of the second VOICE 3 higher NOTE of the second VOICE 4 lower NOTE of the third VOICE G6 higher NOTE of the third VOICE e FS F8 VELOCITY Figure 112 you can set the dynamic value for each VOICE values from 0 to 127 For example Minimum VELOCITY for the first VOICE 1 Maximum VELOCITY for the first VOICE 88 Minimum VELOCITY for the second VOICE 89 Maximum VELOCITY for the second VOICE 127 Minimum VELOCITY for the third VOICE 1 Maximum VELOCITY for the third VOICE 127 This means that if you play on the keyboard with a VELOCITY value dynamic value from 89 or above the first VOICE will stop playing while the second will play Instead the third VOICE will always play at any velocity value By pressing together the CURSOR buttons you can set the value to 1 in the odd VELOCITY boxes and to 127 in the even boxes e FA F9 SUSTAIN Figure 113 enable disable the sustain pedal for each VOICE e F5 F10 EXPR Figure 114 enable disable the expression control for each VOICE CONTROL 2 A ea een You can open a second control page from the CONTROL 1 page where you can modify further parameters of the PROGRAM By pressing the USER 5 button Control 2 from the CONTROL 1 page you will see a screen like Figure 115 Once
237. hen the Arranger is stopped the manual bass and the chord play together Hold Stop holds the Lower also when the Arranger is stopped instead of being disabled in normal condition BREAK HOLD If set to off clears the lower 1 when executing a break BREAK HOLD If set to off clears the lower 2 when executing a break RETRIGGER makes retrigger of lower when arranger changes VOICE LOCK locks the voice on lower 88 KETRON AUDYA SLOW BALLAD 50 CONCERT GRAND FALLAL Grand Piana end Strinasi Tempo 76 Transp PIANO Page 1 LOWERL HOLD On BREAK HOLD On LOWER2 HOLD OFF BREAK HOLD On OFF STOP OFF RETRIGGER OFF MUTE OFF vore LOCK OFF 1 Normal PRESET SELECTION Page 1 Split C3 eS DRUM BASS CHORD LOWER MODES 1 2 DRUM 1 2 LOWER Figure 203 GM Part When MIDI Player is playing back you can open the window to control the parts corresponding to the MIDI tracks of the file Figure 204 by pressing the GM PART button on the PLAY CONTROL section By using the USER 1 5 buttons you can see the pages where to set all the parameters of the MIDI tracks of the file The USER buttons allow to edit the following items GM PARTS FILT TX RX FILT TO ALL 16 PARTS UTILITY B GM PARTS USER 1 By pressing GM PARTS default selection the F1 F10 buttons allow to set the following parameters F1 VOLUME F2 REVERB F3 CHORUS DISTORTION ECHO F4 PA
238. her The lower the tolerance the more the algorithm will consider these transitions as a discontinuity it will therefore send a Note Off to shut down the old note then a Note On to start a new note after the transient The higher the tolerance the more the algorithm will consider theses transitions as a glissando it will keep the current note playing while adjusting its tuning to follow the input pitch Note you must always have Note trigger sensitivity lt Pitch transition tolerance By design it is impossible to have a high Note trigger sensitivity and a low Pitch transition tolerance at the same time Therefore if you set one of these two parameters the other may be automatically adjusted to comply with this constraint 14 0 127 16 Pitch to MIDI level threshold this parameter adjusts the input signal level under which no MIDI note will be output You may want to raise this threshold in a noisy environment for instance to avoid unwanted short MIDI notes to be triggered during silent or low level sections consonants This parameter may also be used to reduce artifacts on note onsets in conjunction with NRPN 96 12 The shift amount to 0 enabling this mode and playing the loop the developer can tweak the sensitivity parameter by listening to what audio events the algorithm considers as the critical sections to preserve There must be enough of them but not too many see warning above Note enabling this mode
239. histleOl 60 Bongo_Hi 108 Empty 24 Crash0l 72 Whistle02 61 Bongo Low 109 Empty 25 Snare007 73 Guiro0l Orchestra Program Change 49 14 SnareOOl 15 RollOl 16 RollO2 17 Snare002 18 Snare003 19 Snare004 20 Snare005 2 SnareO006 22 Tom FlamOl 23 Tom Flam02 24 CrashO0l 25 Snare007 26 Fingsnap 01 27 Stick02 28 Close0l 29 Openodl 30 RideOl 3 SticksOl 32 Click 33 Metronomeodl 34 MetronomeO2 35 Kick41 36 Kick37 37 Rimshotl8 38 Snare031 39 ClapOl 40 Snare014 41 TimpaniOl 42 TimpaniO2 43 Timpani03 44 TimpaniO4 45 TimpaniO5 93 Close02 46 Timpani06 94 48 TimpaniO8 96 Applause 49 Timpani09 97 Belltree Lightpop 50 TimpanilO 98 Empty 5 Timpanill 99 Empty 62 Conga Slap 63 Conga Hi 64 Conga Low 65 Timbales Hi 66 Timbales Lo 67 Agogo Hi 68 Agogo Low 69 Cabasa 70 MaracasOl 71 WhistleOl 72 WhistleO2 73 GuiroOl 74 Guiro02 75 ClavesOl 76 W_Block_Hi 77 W Block Lo 8 Cuica0l 9 Cuica02 80 TriangleO 8 TriangleO2 82 ShakerOl 83 ShakerO2 84 SticksO2 85 Castagnet 86 Tambourinel 87 RimshotOl 88 SnareO013 89 Snare094 90 SnareO009 91 MiddleO 92 Stick02 55 Crash d 103 Empty 19 Snare004 67 Agogo_Hi Program Change 58 14 SnareO0l 62 Conga Slap Conga_Hi 52 Timpanil2 00 Empty Rone cz Conga Ow Snare003 Timbales Lo Snare004 Agogo Hi Snare005 Snare006 S eR 24 Crash0l 72 WhistleO2 60 Bongo Hi __
240. ide e Clavinet e Harps Octave e Electric e Pulse Clavi Upright e Grand Hammer e Latin Piano e Pop hammer Press the CURSOR lt 4 gt buttons together to switch a voice OFF You can also insert an INS instrument already loaded in memory see RAM INS SUPERSOLO section on page 98 By using the CURSOR A W buttons you can scroll all the instruments from top to the bottom of the list instead of scrolling them continuously That is in the above example from Grand Piano up to Pulse Clavi 48 KETRON AUDYA ECKE n5 Y 14 114 Aa n Ed HALE ALI ns BY AM I NIS Eg LE a ires 3 j Til ea eo You can also assign one DRAWBARS voice to each PROGRAM only for the third VOICE Move the selection on the third VOICE by using the buttons F1 or F6 and press the DRAWBARS button to select one organ voice by using the CURSOR gt buttons or the wheel Figure 85 F2 F7 VOLUME By pressing the F2 or F7 buttons you will highlight repeatdly the voice of which you want adjust the volume Use the DATA VALUE wheel or the CURSOR 4 gt buttons to adjust the volume from 0 to 63 of three voices independently Figure 86 Press the CURSOR lt 4 buttons together to automatically set the volume to zero F3 F8 SHIFT By pressing the F3 or F8 buttons you will highlight repeatdly the voice of which you want adjust the pitch Use the DATA VALUE wheel or the CURSOR buttons to adj
241. igure 102 you can choose from the following types Overdrive1 Overdrive2 Overdrive3 ube 1 Tube 2 Distorsion1 Distorsion2 Distorsion3 Hyper Dist UZZ Hot British Org Over 1 Org Over 2 Org Over 3 Over User1 Over User2 Dist User1 Dist User2 Dist Users When you set a distortion please consider that the volume of the VOICE represents the volume to the distortion input and the DISTORSOR item in EFF SEND represents the output of the distortion e F5 ROTOR ON OFF you can enable disable the ROTOR effect Figure 103 You can control the speed by using the SLOW and FAST buttons of the ROTOR section on the panel F10 SUST PEDAL TO ROTOR ON OFF you can enable disable the functionality of the ROTOR effect to the sustain pedal Figure 104 connected to the SUSTAIN connector on the rear panel EFF SEND The USER 4 button will open a screen like Figure 105 where you can modify the effects send parameters In this way you can hear the effects assigned in the EFF MODE page Once you select a parameter you can modify its value by using the DATA VALUE wheel or the CURSOR lt 4 buttons Use the function F1 F6 buttons to select one of three VOICES of the PROGRAM The values of the parameters for EFF ASSIGN and EFF TYPE are strictly connected to the parameters of the EFF SEND page You coud not hear any effect until you adjust the sends in the EFF SEND page as explained later 54 KETRON AUDYA HW
242. imshot20 85 ClapOl 38 Snare087 86 Tambourinel 39 ClapOl 87 Rimshot0Ol 40 Snare037 88 Snare059 41 0 89 Snare074 42 Stickl6 90 Snare034 43 Tom02 91 Kickl7 44 Stickl1 92 Kickl5 45 Tom03 93 MiddleO5 46 OpenO6 94 Stick13 47 Tom04 95 Reverse 48 Tom05 96 Applause 49 Crash02 97 Belltree 50 TomO6 98 Empty 5 OpenO6 99 Empty 52 Crash03 100 Empty 53 RidebellO1 101 Empty 54 TambourineO 102 Empty 55 Crash04 103 Empty 56 Cowbell0l 104 Empty 57 Crash05 105 Empty 58 Vibraslap 106 Empty 59 Ride03 107 Empty 60 Bongo Hi 108 Empty 61 Bongo Low 109 Empty Citypop Program Change 76 14 SnareO0l 62 Conga Slap 15 Rollo 63 Conga Hi 16 Roll02 64 Conga Low 17 Snare002 65 Timbales Hi 18 Snare003 66 Timbales Lo 19 Snare004 67 Agogo 20 Snare005 68 Agogo Low 21 Snare006 69 Cabasa 22 Tom FlamOl 70 MaracasOl 23 Tom Flam02 71 WhistleOl 24 Crash0l 72 Whistle0O2 25 Snare007 73 GuiroOl 26 Fingsnap 0 74 Guiro02 27 Slap 75 ClavesOl 28 Snare008 76 W_Block_Hi 29 Scratch Up 77 W Block Lo 30 Scratch Down 8 Cuica0l 31 SticksOl 79 Cuica02 174 KETRON AUDYA 32 Click 80 TriangleOl 33 Metronome0Ol 8 TriangleO2 34 MetronomeO02 82 ShakerOl 35 Kick02 83 ShakerO2 36 Kick35 84 SticksO2 37 Rimshot25 85 Clap03 38 Snare019 86 TambourineOl 39 Clap03 87 Rimshot08 40 Snare062 88 Snare034 4 TomO7 89 Snare077 42 Stickl12 90 Kick08 43 Tom08 91 Kickl3 44 Close06 92 KicklO 45
243. in values 12 dB By pressing the CURSOR lt 4 gt buttons together you set the default frequency value of the EQ band or the Gain value of the EQ band to 0 Press the USER 1 button ACTIVE to enable the Equalizer as shown by the arrow on Figure 300 The USER 2 button DEFAULT resets the parameters to the default values After you set the parameters you can to store the custom Equalizer by pressing the USER 5 button SAVE or the SAVE button on the front panel A brief message SAVE DATA TO DISK will appear 116 KETRON AUDYA SLOW BALLAD 63 CONCERT_GRAND BALLAD Grand Piana Tempo YG Transp end StringsL PIANC Page 1 Factory Loudness Warm Boost Flat Split C3 Octave 53 DRUM BASS CHORD LOWER LockOff aa Ee ae Figure 299 SLOVW_BALLAD 63 CONCERT_GRAND end StringsL PIANC Page 1 Factory BASS FREU BASS GAIN 12 dB MID Bass FREQ 1490Hz2 MID Bass GAIN 1 dB 4990H2 MID TREBLE GAIN 12 dB 1 TREBLE GAIM 12 split c3 Octave BALLAD Grand Piana Tempo 76 Transp MID TREBLE FREQ TREBLE FREQ DRUM Y BASS CHORD LOWER i Ma a NE 77 Figure 300 WAVE EQUALIZER By pressing the F8 button on the DSP page you can access the WAVE EQUALIZER screen as shown in Figure 301 Here you can select the WAVE EQUALIZER type to set as equalization of the WAVE Player 5 Wave Equali
244. indows to analyze waveform as block of 1 8 1 4 1 2 1 1 In detail 1 Move a Start Point ahead just focused in a better way your waveform i e put value to 24040 2 Select ZOOM feature and assign 16x value 3 Select START feature again If everything will done as suggest display will show as in Figure 24 Display will show more detail with ZOOM feature Figure 25 When ZOOM will be magnify display will inform you on Value related on point selected Arrow will show value updated 28 KETRON AUDYA 42 ROMAHTIC GRAND end Dark Ensemble PIAMO Page 1 BALLAD BRRANGER Tempo 0 Transp Time 00 55 ade3ij6ms VE Figure 23 42 ROMAHTIC GRAND end Dark Ensemble PIANO Page 1 700M 16x s Age of Rock VocalMute by Munny vav BALLAD ARRANGER Tempo 0 Transp E 2422584 2422504 NORM Time 00 54 PREVIEW RESTORE SAVE Figure 24 42 ROMANTIC GRAND 2nd Dark Ensemble PIAMO Page 1 BALLAD ARRANGER Tempo 0 Transp start 24040 E 2422584 NORM KL 779 R 6040 lt Time 00 54 PREVIEW RESTORE SAVE Figure 25 WAVE EDIT on MSP template See MSP editing on page 99 WAVE EDIT menu is available also on MSP template to create your own MSP Select MSP Edit load your wave file and it will be available on display Figure 26 Once the wave file will be importe
245. ing The LED of the MP3 track flashes while the LED of the WAVE track lights steadily In this case you should lower manually the volume fader of the WAVE track and raise the volume fader of the MP3 track in order to make a sort of manual crossfade between the two tracks p MIX two WAVE files 1 Press the WAVE button 2 Select an audio file from the WAVE folder 3 Press the ENTER button to start playback 4 Select another audio file from the same WAVE folder Player If you want to create a MIX using all the five tracks just press the ENTER button when you select the files Be sure that the CROSSFADE LED is off For example 1 Press the WAVE button select a file from the WAVE folder and press ENTER 2 Press the DJ LOOP button select a file from the WAVE folder and press ENTER 3 Press the MP3 button select a file from the folder MP3 and press ENTER 4 Press the SFX button select a file from the folder SFX and press ENTER 5 Press the MIDI button select a file from the folder MIDIFILE and press ENTER In this way all the tracks will be playing simultaneously and you will be able to adjust the volume of each track by moving the corresponding fader acting like a Dj player CONCERT GRAND BALLAD Grand Piana Tempo O Transp Cy ave LEAD is Cool Pap wav J Dance wav LYRIC ON M Elektro Bit wav Trview J Flugel Horn amp Muted way f Folk Live Guitar war OFF T Funk Su
246. ion and then play the melody with one or two note max without altering the tonality of the Arranger EASY in easy mode the chord is immediately recognized while the notes are being pressed without waiting a complete chord with at least three notes EXPERT the chord recognition is achieved while the notes are being played by the left hand with Manual Bass and playing on the right split In this way complex chords can be recognized and the Arranger can be controlled with your right hand Once a new chord is found you can freely play the bass line without altering the chord recognition PIANIST SUSTAIN When this parameter is ON or OFF Figure 185 enables disables the Sustain Pedal control on Pianist when this is activated PRESET MIX When this parameter is ON Figure 186 the Styles play the original factory mix While in OFF position you can freely adjust the volumes of the sections of the Arranger by using the sliders AUTOFILL When this parameter is ON Figure 187 the drum plays automatically a Fill In when passes from a variation of the Arranger to another AFTER FILL When this parameter is ON Figure 188 the drum plays the Fill In if you apply an Aftertouch on the left split FILL TO ARRANGE When this parameter is ON Figure 189 each time you activate the Fill In causes the automatic change to the next variation Style Mode A MA uh WIE LIES ti om
247. ion later Press the EDIT button The VOICE LIST button flashes Select any keys in the VOICE section For example EL PIANO if you want to stay in the same family but you can choose any other family of course By using the F1 F10 buttons and the CURSOR lt q gt for page selection select any voice For example FM PIANO 2 on the second page of EL PIANO Figure 252 Press the ENTER button to confirm the selection If you want choose further voices following the same procedure from step 5 to step 7 changing each time the memory location by using the F1 F10 buttons and the CURSOR lt 4 gt until you finish your favourite VOICE LIST Figure 253 Press SAVE corresponding to the USER 5 button or press the SAVE button on the panel to store the custom VOICE LIST Press the EDIT button to exit edit mode The VOICE LIST button will stop flashing At this point if you press the VOICE LIST button you will display your custom list for each family of the VOICE section ET CLASSIC CHUNK MY THEATRE THEATRE PRECET CFLFCTION Page it ive EH T Y mO CUTE raa RE MISI GRAND PLAHO Fal LA pa hn iW FL EMPTY VOKE BPTY VOICE voice avoe semvoe EMPTY VOICE VOKE Por peL ih P LER E POA PELLET Pore Cay Oech m 41 a ee mask o rg ee EM Figure 25
248. ion of the Player F2 PLAYER remembers the current folder of the Player F3 PLAYLIST enables the active Play List when you save the registration F4 TEXT stores the active text F5 STYLE stores the style F6 TEMPO stores the tempo F7 ARRANGER VARIATION stores the variation of the Arranger A B C D F8 ARRANGER MODES stores the Arranger settings F9 RIGHT LEFT stores the right hand and left hand settings F10 SLIDERS stores the slider settings By pressing USER 1 button Section page 1 user swap on the 2nd page edit Section page 2 with new selectable feature F1 EFFECTS Effects settings F2 MICRO Mic settings F3 VOICETRON Voicetron settings F4 DRUM MIXER Drum Mixer settings F5 MIDI SETTING MIDI settings F6 UTILITY Utility page settings F ARABIC Arabic scale settings F8 FOOTSWITCH Footswitch settings F9 KEYBOARD PARAM Keyboard parameters settings F10 AUTO SWITCH OFF Feature with automatic Registration switch off button after loading registration is completed 60 KETRON AUDYA wi 311 um Bo O TEAN and SEAT ITA AT ITIN Tees mear eae ROMANTIC c i px POR urit ar Unc pue riw ris d nes Paltt BNNE Se t noc AT BA em ir i oo mid bec StL ARSE mM IEF the Lar te rudi cok BEAT ee are taut TRATIC Get wo
249. is intended to alert the user to the presence of uninsulated dangerous voltage within the product s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance Servicing instructions in the literature accompanying the appliance WARNING TO PREVENT FIRE OR SHOCK HAZARD DO NOT EXPOSE THIS APPLIANCE TO RAIN OR MOISTURE e Do not expose this apparatus to drips or splashes e Do not place any objects filled with liquids such as vases on the apparatus Do not install this apparatus in a confined space such as a book case or similar unit e The apparatus should be located close enough to the AC outlet so that you can easily grasp the power cord plug at any time e he main plug is used as the disconnect device the disconnect device shall remain readily operable e An apparatus with Class construction shall be connected to an AC outlet with a protective grounding connection Excessive sound pressure from earphones and head phones can cause hearing loss e he apparatus draws nominal non operating power from the AC outlet with its STANDBY ON in the Standby position e No live flame like candles lights must be placed on this apparatus For European Users Disposal of old appliance 1 When this crossed out wheeled bin symbol is att
250. istle02 25 Snare007 73 GuiroOl 26 Fingsnap OI 74 Guiro02 27 Slap 75 ClavesOl 28 Snare008 76 W Block Hi 29 Scratch Up 77 W Block Lo Drum Set 30 Scratch Down 78 CuicaOl 3 SticksOl 79 Cuica02 32 Click 80 TriangleO 33 MetronomeOl 8 TriangleO2 34 MetronomeO2 82 ShakerOl 35 Kickl6 83 ShakerO2 36 KickO6 37 RimshotO8 84 SticksO2 85 Castagnet 38 Snare020 86 TambourineOl 47 Tom04 95 Reverse 48 Tom05 96 Applause 49 Crash02 97 Belltree 50 Tom06 98 Empty 5 RideOl 99 Empty 52 Crash03 100 Empty 53 RidebellO 101 Empty 54 TambourineO 102 Empty 39 ClapOl 87 RimshotO05 40 Snare019 88 Snare009 41 TomO07 89 SnareOl2 42 StickOl 90 Snare013 43 Tom08 91 MiddleO 44 CloseOl 92 Stick04 45 Tom09 93 Close02 46 Openol 94 OpenO2 47 Tomio 95 Reverse 48 Tomll 96 Applause 49 Crash02 97 Belltree 50 Toml2 98 Empty 5 RideOl 99 Empty 52 Crash03 100 Empty 53 RidebellO 101 Empty 54 TambourineO 102 Empty 55 Crash04 103 Empty 56 Cowbell0l 104 Empty 57 Crash05 105 Empty 58 Vibraslap 106 Empty 59 RideO2 107 Empty 60 Bongo Hi 108 Empty 61 Bongo Low 109 Empty Vintage Program Change 12 14 SnareO001 62 Conga Slap 15 RollOl 63 Conga Hi 16 Roll02 64 Conga Low 17 Snare002
251. k Guitar Bank i PAMDERO1 2 i BEnT 07 3t Bass Bank Guitar Bank 2 SBEAT 40 snm a4 Low Arpa amp Lick Digipad 12 30 3j Low Live Guikar ElPiano_Detune 12 Teb LECT 1 J SAWE STYLE Save as BALLAD M Y BALLAD BALLAD ARRANGER Tempo 7G Transp CONCERT_GRAND end Stringsl PIANO Page 1 STYLE SELECTION Page 1 1 split C3 ctave 53 63 55 55 DRUM Bass CHORO LOWER 35 Fill 1 Fill 2 Fill 3 Fill 4 Style Start Figure 160 MY_BALLAD 63 CONCERT_GRAND BALLAL ARRANGER A end Strings Tempo 76 Transp PIANG Page 1 POP_BALLAD_2 A NEW BALLAD A POP SONG A NEW TITLE A SLOW BALLAD fA NICE A SOFT BEAT 1 fA POP BALLAD 1 A SOFT_BEAT_2 STYLE SELECTION Page 3 4 Split C3 Octave 53 53 53 53 ORUM Base CHORD LOWER Fill 1 Fill 4 Style Start Figure 161 A BALLAD User Audio Drum The user can include custom Wave loops instead of the internal AUDIO DRUMS into the Audya Styles These Loops must be allocated into the folder USER AUDIO DRUMS which is placed on root of Audya C The Loops must have the following characteristics 44 KHz 16 bit and the name must have the sign followed by the precise BPM indication of the Loop As an example HOUSE2 2127 wav When enabled see note 2 Display will show Loading Audio Resources when Audya is turned on The Demo folder contains 1 Use
252. l2 00H 40H Min bl 2 00H bh 00H Max bl 2 7FH bh 7FH PROGRAM CHANGE HANNEL ONTROL 00 ONTROL 01 ONTROL 05H Portamento time ONTROL 06H Data Entry Provides data to RPN NRPN ONTROL 07 ONTROL OAH BnH OAH co ONTROL OBH Expression Default 7FH ONTROL 40H ONTROL 41H Portamento On Off On 7FH Off 00H ONTROL 45 ONTROL 43H ONTROL 68 ONTROL 50 ONTROL 77H ONTROL 78H ONTROL 79H BnH 79H 00H ONTROL 78 ONTROL 7EH ONTROL 7FH ONTROL 54H ONTROLSSH 55H oc ONTROL 10H Vocalizer midi mode on ONTROL 11H RPN OOOOH RPN 0001H RPN 0002H RPN 0108H RPN 0109H RPNOTOAH BnH 63H O1H RPN 0110H RPN OTITH RPN RPN 0113 RPN 0120H RPN 0121H RPN 0130H BnH 63 01H 62H 30H 06H vv FM Amplitudet vv 40H no modify RPN 013TH RPN 0132H RPN 0133H RPN 0163H RPN 0164H RPN 0166H RPN OT6BH RPN 18rrH BnH 63H 18H 62H rr 06 wv Pitch Course of drum instr in semitones rr note vv 40H no modify see note 2 RPN 19rrH BnH 63H 19H 62H rr 06H wv Pitch Fine of drum instr in semitones rr note vv 00h no modify vv 7FH 1 2 tone see note 2 6 RPN 1ArrH BnH 63H 1AH 2H rr 06 wv Level of drum instr note rr vv 00h to 7FH see note 2 RPN 1CrrH BnH 63H 1CH 62H rr 06H vv Pan of drum instr note rr vv 00h to 7FH see note 2 RPN 1DrrH BnH 63H 1DH 62H rr 06H vv Reverb send level of drum instr note rr vv 00h to 7FH see note 2 RPN 1ErrH BnH 63H 1EH 62H rr 06H vv Chorus send level of drum instr note rr vv 00h to 7FH see
253. lap 15 Rollo 63 Conga Hi 16 Roll02 64 Conga Low 17 Snare002 65 Timbales Hi 18 Snare003 66 Timbales Lo 19 Snare004 67 Agogo_Hi 20 Snare005 68 Agogo Low 21 Snare006 69 Cabasa 22 Tom Flam0Ol 70 MaracasOl 23 Tom Flam02 71 WhistleO1 24 Crash0l 72 WhistleO2 25 Snare007 73 GuiroOl 26 Fingsnap OI 74 Guiro02 27 Slap 75 ClavesOl 28 Snare008 76 W Block Hi 29 Scratch Up 77 W Block Lo 30 Scratch Down 78 Cuica0l 3 SticksOl 79 Cuica02 32 Click 80 TriangleOl 33 8 TriangleO2 34 MetronomeO02 82 ShakerOl 35 Kick34 83 ShakerO2 36 Kick23 84 SticksO2 37 Rimshot15 85 Clap03 38 Snare077 86 Tambourinel 39 Clap02 87 Rimshotl2 40 Snare074 88 Snare039 41 TomO07 89 SnareO7l 42 Stick08 90 Snare041 43 Tom08 91 MiddleO8 44 Stickl6 92 StickO7 45 Tom09 93 Stick18 KETRON AUDYA 17 1 Drum Set Modern Program Change 62 14 SnareOOl 62 Conga Slap 15 Rollo 63 Conga Hi 16 Roll02 64 Conga Low 17 Snare002 65 Timbales Hi 18 Snare003 66 Timbales Lo 19 Snare004 67 Agogo_Hi 20 Snare005 68 Agogo Low 21 Snare006 69 Cabasa 22 Tom
254. lease time of the envelope F6 SLOPE sets the slope of the envelope F7 OFFSET sets the amount of the envelope accordingly to the dynamics F8 FILT SLOPE sets the filter slope F9 FILT OFFSET sets the amount of offset on the filter accordingly to the dynamics Load another WAV file assign it to another button and repeat editing When you select all the desired WAV files you can see the list of the files loaded into MSP by pressing the MSP VIEW button USER 2 button In this screen you can check the files out remove files USER 3 button and play a file by using the SOLO button USER 4 button This environment lets you ri edit the previously created MSP files By pressing the MSP VIEW button again you exit to the main window MSP function cedri TAL LAL uo GLA Wat HEE wave TE 1 s a Rock voces were As s Band 1 4 oup AA Beg Bard way n A Tal dud eq nma Lim Gubnr ens box Ad Cred wis HT Dm Lov Dose meo It ninr Fei pnr T pim eee FP a p M Figure 245 rw nal AD jw aE ee a a Le aya 63 a wmm r Ini M ur un iV ud Bare Tate the Ker 1 amp Tara andy fad 524240 Cut erae nth train Clee Live Guta BE lam Pul rrt Pp Des nem m me m Eier KA rer FUTT Paonia
255. lect the Audio Drum called 16 BEAT6 72 Figure 157 4 Start the style by using the START button on the panel 5 To change the Audio Drum stop the Arranger and repeat from step 3 B Setting a Bass Bank Guitar 1 2 Piano Bank or an Arp amp Lick The selection from the tables or sounds for these two parts is the same This is the procedure to set and edit a Bass Bank With the Arranger stopped press the STYLE VIEW button 1 Press the F3 button 2 Wait please will appear briefly while reading the Bass Bank from disc The part now is called Bass Bank 3 Turn the DATA VALUE wheel to scroll all the avail able tables or digit the number of the table by using the numeric keypad of the style section For exam ple digit 55 to select the Bass Bank called PAN DERO1 Figure 158 4 Start the style by using the START button on the panel 5 While the style is playing you can change the instrument choosing from the table by using the DATA VALUE wheel You can assign any GM voice 6 To change the Bass Bank stop the Arranger and repeat from step 3 Style View SLOW _BALLAD BARREL_HONKYT end Strings PIANO Page 1 audio Drum chi crena iano E Groove Bank PANDEROL Bass Precision Low Live oT ElPiann Detune 12 28 SE FUNK i ARRANGER Split C3 Cictave BALLAD Grand Piana Tempo 72 Transp File select BI BS acres TD
256. leles Tinkle Triangle Tambora Claves O N o f c 2 109 11 111 ERES 113 114 115 116 117 118 Ac Tom snare Crash 121 Scratch Below Breaths Laser Fx Slap 18 Brushtom nare Scratch1 cratch2 8 NO NO CD ok 15 0 aser2 x_Slap aser1 28 Fisa K Off 8 NO O NO N KETRON AUDYA 145 Sounds GM Voices BANK D 660 Value 11 N jVOICE 1 Concert L Concert R op Hammer ulse Clavi Piano2 JI N age_Piano O pen_Concert Harps Wide Harps Octave ElPiano Detune Marktree Vibraphon Wide Marimba Wide Full Fast B3 Fast Church Octave Pipe Octave Fisa8 Blues Harp Cassotto Ac Folk2 Ac Folk2 Folk amp Slide Jazz Guitar2 Country2 Thin Strato Ac Nylon1 azz Octave co 4 N 9 O Concert L 33 Concet R 34 Pop Hammer 35 Pulse Clavi 36 El Piano 37 Dx Tine 38 Soft Dx 39 Stage Piano 40 Pop Slow EN Synthit 42 pen Concert 43 Harps Wide 44 Harps Octave 45 EiPiano Detune 46 Marktree A7 16 Vibraphon Wide 48 Clean Detune Marimba Wide 49 Ful Fast 50 B3 Fast Church Octave 52 Pipe Octave 53 FisaB 54 Blues Harp 55 Cassotto 56 Ac Folk2 57 Ac_Folk2 58 Folk amp Slide 59 Jazz Guitar2 60 Country
257. lltree 50 Toml2 98 Empty 5 RideOl 99 Empty 52 Crash03 100 Empty 53 RidebellO 101 Empty 54 TambourineO 102 Empty 55 Crash04 103 Empty 56 CowbellO 104 Empty 57 Crash05 105 Empty 58 Vibraslap 106 Empty 59 Ride02 107 Empty 60 Bongo_Hi 108 Empty 61 Bongo_Low 109 Empty Analog Program Change 75 14 SnareO001 62 Conga Slap 15 Roll 63 Conga Hi 16 Roll02 64 Conga Low 17 SnareO002 65 Timbales Hi 18 Snare003 66 Timbales Lo 19 Snare004 67 Agogo Hi 47 TomlO 95 Tambora03 48 Tomll 96 Applause 49 Crash02 97 Cowbell03 50 Toml2 98 Empty 5 Ride03 99 Empty 52 Crash03 100 Clap07 53 RidebellO 101 ClapO8 54 TambourineO 102 Empty 55 Crash04 103 Empty 56 Cowbell0l 104 Empty 57 Crash05 105 Empty 58 Vibraslap 106 Empty 59 RideOl 107 Empty 60 Bongo HIi 108 Empty 61 Bongo Low 109 Empty Pop Jazz Program Change 73 14 SnareO01 62 Conga Slap 15 RollOl 63 Conga Hi 16 Roll02 64 Conga Low 17 Snare002 65 Timbales Hi 18 Snare003 66 Timbales Lo 19 Snare004 67 Agogo Hi 20 Snare005 68 Agogo Low 21 SnareO06 69 Cabasa 22 Tom 70 MaracasOl 23 Tom Flam02 71 WhistleOl 24 Crash0l 72 WhistleO2 25 Snare007 73 GuiroOl 26 Fingsnap 0 74 Guiro02 27 Slap 75 ClavesOl 28 SnareO008 76 W Block Hi 29 Scratch Up 77 W Block Lo 30 Scratch Down 78 Cuica0l 3 SticksOl 79 Cuica02 32 Click 80 TriangleOl 33 MetronomeOl 8 TriangleO2 34 Metr
258. lob Transp On Midi Port In Keyb Fortz MIDI KEYBOARD UTILITY split C3 53 53 B3 53 DRUM BASS CHORD LOWER _ General Masterz accord Figure 276 BALLAD Grand Piana Tempo 76 Transp Figure 277 Please disable the soft MIDI THRU function from the sequencer application in order to avoid dangerous MIDI loops For the correct playback of the parts and the instruments please use the same MIDI channels for the transmission and the reception For example Right MIDI channel 1 both TX and RX Left MIDI channel 2 both TX and RX Bass MIDI channel 3 both TX and RX Chord1 MIDI channel 5 both TX and RX Drum1 MIDI channel 10 both TX and RX and so on KETRON e AUDYA 109 m DSP e From the first screen of the menu press the F3 button to open the DSP Digital Signal Processor settings page as shown in Figure 278 By using the F1 F10 buttons you can edit the following pages F1 REVERB Reverb settings F2 CHORUS Chorus settings F3 ECHO DELAY Echo settings F4 DISTORTION Distortion settings F5 ROTOR Rotor Leslie settings F6 DRAWBAR OVERDRIVE Organ distortion settings F EQUALIZER Equalizer settings F8 WAVE EQUALIZER Wave file EQ settings REVERB By pressing the F1 button on the DSP page you can access the REVERB window as shown in Figure 279 Here you can select the following parameters F1 RIGHT REVE
259. lourful backlit liquid crystal display LCD See on page 16 the explanation on how to operate the display Brightness Small knob for the display brightness adjustment Turn clockwise counter clockwise in order to match the right brightness of the display accordingly to your needs and the environmental light conditions 9 User Back and Forward buttons The five User buttons and two Back lt lt and Forward gt buttons below the display allow the selection of the functions that appear on the display accordingly to the operative modes see on page 16 Arranger Conductor This section contains the buttons for real time control of the Arranger Intro Ending button Start Key Stop ABCD Fill In Break Tempo Hold see on page 17 Data Value This group is made of one wheel and four CURSOR buttons lt 4 gt A WV By using the wheel and cursor buttons you can input data change parameter values or navigate through the lists and menu items accordingly to the operative modes see on page 18 Transport This section includes Start Stop and Count In Restart controls in Arranger mode or Start Stop and Pause for the song currently selected Style This section is for the selection of the Arranger styles see Selecting the Styles on page 21 User Style Disk area
260. m4 LAS CREMEN LE wr SAU ET CIUrcra We Rm Heri 1 Lair Rita Gamy Liga Riri wil Dre FF n LE ea IRE GM CHEG n 1 Ld 3 i Td Figure 283 BALL AL EIo COMERT GHAND 3 Dre E 11 EJ E T GA CHE LEETE i 1 Figure 284 EIo COMERT GHAND R15 Geant Pores Pe A ii fii Level 40 LefucM Level 40 em x 1 itive j 41 LE 57 PE INS CENE NBI LE Eri TOES Figure 285 KETRON e AUDYA 111 CHORUS RIGHT From the CHORUS page by pressing the F1 button CHORUS RIGHT you can access the page for the selection of the Chorus for the right hand Figure 286 10 Chorus Presets are available in the first page and 10 in the second by pressing any CURSOR button or the DATA VALUE wheel Press any F1 F10 button to select the corresponding Chorus type Chorus1 Chorus2 Chorus6 Tremolo1 Tremolo2 and Tremolos Phaser1 Phaser2 and Phaser3 Flanger1 Flanger2 and Flanger3 User1 User2 User3 User4 and User5 see details later After you select the effect for the right hand you can hear the result by playing directly on the right split of the keyboard To lock the Chorus also when changing Program or Registration or at start up press the Lock ON button corresponding to the USER 1 button Figure 286 After the effect type selection exit by pressing the EXIT button or dire
261. manual bass and the pedalboard F5 OCTAVE Figure 199 octave selection for the manual bass and for the pedalboard within 2 octaves range F6 SUSTAIN Sustain length for the manual bass and for the pedalboard values from O to 64 F PEDAL TO CHORD the bass pedalboard takes a part in the chord recognition In this way you can control the automatic bass by using the pedalboard while the automatic chords are always controlled by using the left hand F8 PEDAL DYNAMIC Figure 200 dynamic control by using the pedalboard Use the CURSOR a gt buttons to set a fixed dynamic value from 0 to 127 Press the buttons together to return to normal mode F9 PIANIST BASIC BASS special feature of the automatic bass within PIANIST mode You can play the root note of the chord for the beat length When the beat ends the bass will follow its original line F10 BASS ALTERNATE special mode for the alternate bass that follows the chord change accordingly to the correct harmony rules For example when you don t play again the root note or the fifth that you have just played The function works only with the styles in which the alternate root fifth bass was programmed B BASS 2 Pressing the USER 3 BASS 1 2 button you enter the second page which contains the following parameter Voice Lock ON OFF It locks the bass voice so it will not change when loading a registration Manual Bass Level Bass Volume setting User can define fixed
262. ms e The Loops must be Wave 44 KHz 16 bit and must have a name with symbol 9 followed from the exact BPM number for example House2 127 wav 70 KETRON AUDYA STYLE MODELING 63 CONHCERT GRAND DANCE ARRANGER A 2nd Strings Tempo 76 Transp PIANO Page 1 Drumi FOLK 2n 37 Groove chz MARACAS ut exces Je Bass chs Finger 40 strata 3s Low ch4 Softpad 412 8 English Horn B Lowz chs ix Piana 412 lt 4 strinasi de x split C3 Octave DRUM BASS CHORD LOWER SINGLE MEZZZZMI MUTE Figure 153 STYLE MODELING 63 BARREL_HONKY DANCE ARRANGER A 2nd Strinasz Tempo 6 Transp PIAMO Page 1 Audio Drum Piano Bank o eene 57 Groove Bank Guitar Bank 1 BACHATA 40 CHITRYBEAT J2 Bass Bank Guitar Bank 2 SBEAT_O2 40 cuTRYSLOW DI 3 Low ArpeLick Softpad 12 20 60 Low Live Guitar x Piano iz lt 4 de ARRANGER YOLUMES Split Octave 53 53 53 53 ORUM BASS CHORD LOWER LT VOICE MUTE SINGLE Figure 154 STYLE MODELING es 1003 2098 DAC Anat Tempo fh Trep Pie Pm IL ELES Pin res fink 18 BT_EP0 a Tani BACHATA 40 cNTRVBEAT 09 x Rarttfank T Dor rim BREAT ni D 1 Lew Lie Quar rz Fannin ate 2 pee 1
263. n View SLOW_BALLAD 63 CONCERT_GRAND end StringsL BALLAD Grand Piana Tempo 75 Transp PIANO Page 1 Cross Fade Mode Fade 1 ain View OM Cross Fade Velocity Morrmal utoswitch Time sec TG Fade Time B Lyricy Tot Small Font Off Player Autoload rexteuMt Registration Sort Numeric Enabled Numb Files Off Registration Restore Off Lii Split C3 Octave 55 Bass CHORO LOWER Figure 60 SLOW BALLAL 63 CONCERT_GRAND end StringsL BALLAD Grand Piana Tempo 75 Transp PIAMO Page 1 Cross Fade Mode Fade 1 Main VIEW On Crass Fade Velocity Normal nutoswitch Time soc 5 Fade Time B LyricyTxt Small Font Off Player Autoload fText uM Registration Sort Numeric Enabled Numb Files Off Registration Restore Off DIEN Split C3 Octave 55 55 5 55 DRIM BE 55 CHORO LOWER Figure 61 KETRON e AUDYA 41 Main View Main View description Hereunder you can see the organization of the graphical layout of the MAIN VIEW window sont c3 oct 1 3 re xe 8 CONCERT GRAND PRESE ka Voice 63 STRINGS Lert Wane oct 2 GE AND PTANO mmu B MAIN VIEW Window D F1 F2 BPM Tempo It shows the BPM Tempo set for the style or the current filely loaded in the Player When the Arranger or the Player are playing the red and green LED light accordingly to the musi
264. n enables the DJ LOOP screen where you start playback of the selected audio loop Figure 29 The fader below adjusts the volume of the track To navigate in this screen use the cursor buttons the ENTER and EXIT buttons as described for the WAVE screen The DJ LOOP song are a particular kind of looping tracks prepared for several music genres The USER 5 button allows the JUMP NORM IMM function normal immediate jump B MP3 The MP3 button enables the MP3 screen where you start playback of the selected track Figure 30 The fader below adjusts the volume of the track To navigate in this screen use the cursor buttons the ENTER and EXIT buttons as described for the WAVE screen B SFX The SFX button enables the SFX screen where you start playback of the selected track Figure 31 The fader below adjusts the volume of the track To navigate in this screen use the cursor buttons the ENTER and EXIT buttons as described for the WAVE screen The SFX tracks are particular tracks containing special effects to be used in different situations including applause orchestral hits snare rolls and many more This Player can play back MP3s with max 192 Kb s bitrate e does not support joint stereo formats B MIDI The MIDI button enables the MIDI screen where you start playback of the selected MIDI file Figure 32 The fader below adjusts the volume of the MIDI file To navigate in this screen use the cursor buttons the ENTER and EXIT buttons
265. nd F1 Bass Drum Instr 1 percussive instrument 1 for the bass see note F2 Bass Drum Instr 2 percussive instrument 2 for the bass see note F3 Chords Drum Instr 1 percussive instrument 1 for LT NATI Gant fee froth amm emm am Bari bum bril eres bari trm oma 2 imi i terti Crum brote immer tes n 1 m ern iras beati iem ereet br mi s m iem pog c Ee ag the chords see note ag mec es F4 Chords Drum Instr 2 percussive instrument 2 for UNT oes iram t Pat the chords see note Figure 310 F6 Bass Drum Velo 1 Velocity setting for the percussive instrument 1 of the bass TOT You can choose the percussive instrument among those F7 Bass Drum Velo 2 Velocity setting for the percussive instrument 2 of the bass values 0 127 F8 Chords Drum Velo 1 Velocity setting for the percussive instrument 1 of the chords values 0 127 F9 Chords Drum Velo 2 Velocity setting for the percussive instrument 2 of the chords values 0 127 listed in the list at the end of this manual For example kick01 cymbal07 snare018 and so on LT ETE fi GRE NT ul HOD ETE s qud aper E d ET us VEL CURVE ee fooro By pressing the button from the KEYBOARD jam CONTROL page you can set the Velocity Curve M ECK em Figure 311 that is the dynamic
266. nd 2nd VOICE Press the 2nd VOICE button on the third row in the VOICE section According to the PRESET or PROGRAM voice you will add a second voice to the sound of the right hand Note that the 2nd VOICE voices can be freely programmed by the user in any PROGRAM Press the EDIT button and the USER 2 button to open the 2nd VOICE page Figure 7 For more details on how to create edit a PROGRAM see on page 48 Selecting the organ DRAWBARS Press the DRAWBARS button on the third row in the VOICE section The display will show the organ DRAWBARS screen Figure 8 Select one organ by using the F1 F10 buttons ORGAN1 ORGANZ etc Press the CURSOR button to select the second page of DRAWBARS ORGAN 11 ORGAN 12 etc Press the USER 1 button PedToRotor below the display to control the ROTOR by using one external SUSTAIN pedal By pressing the pedal repeatedly you can toggle ROTOR SLOW ROTOR FAST If PedToRotor is disabled the SUSTAIN pedal returns to its ordinary function Use the fader controls in the MIXER section page 24 to set the nine footages of the organ DRAWBARS 16 8 5 1 3 4 2 2 3 2 13 5 1 1 3 1 Figure 9 shows the exact correspondence of the nine faders of the mixer section and the nine DRAWBARS displayed on the screen Press the USER 5 button Drw Lock Unlock below the display to toggle Lock Unlock function SO you can use the faders for mixing the Arranger parts or the MIDI file
267. nd control many of the functions provided by the instrument In the various operating modes you can control the mute percussion sections direct access to 16 shares of General Midi control the playlist change the pitch of the tempered scale Moreover the functions can be assigned directly to these keys by the user who can customize the tool to suit his needs and his own way of playing 27 EIE Fe RAE mes a NUM L awe EE a u w aL RUM E dm d UN E n 4 e ae TS TE Eg T By default these buttons are set as printed on the panel as follows Audio reset Resynchronization of style between MIDI and Audio Wave filter It assigns the user filter wave to the slider Micro rev It assigns the reverb into the micro slider user Wha to pedal page 59 Bass to root page 86 Unplugg switch off all style parts except Live Guitar Arp amp Lick or Chord page 11 Lead page 25 Lyric page 25 Juke box page 123 Zoom page 25 Autocrash page 85 After fill page 83 Fill to arr page 83 Auto fill page 83 Reintro page 140 Fill to end O o KETRON AUDYA 9 Bm MULTI TABS MENU By pressing the MODE button the menu management Multi Tabs will open By pressing the F1 F6 function keys you can activate various modes of operation which will be described in detail in the following section F1 DRUM ON OFF Figure 1 DRUM ON
268. nd by using the CURSORE lt 4 and change the value 14 dB by using the DATA VALUE wheel or the CURSOR A buttons The Preset curves are the following lat USER 1 owCut USER 2 ighCut USER 3 oudness USER 4 User USER 5 VIBRATO By selecting the F9 button a VIBRATO screen only for MICRO 1 like Figure 347 will appear where you can choose one of the available Vibrato effects by using the CURSOR A V buttons or the DATA VALUE wheel PITCH By selecting the F10 button a PITCH screen only for MICRO 1 like Figure 348 will appear where you can set the parameters to change the pitch Select the PITCH SHIFT parameter by using the CURSOR A V buttons and change the value by using the CURSOR 4 or the DATA VALUE wheel values 24 semitones Select the PITCH CORRECTION parameter by using the CURSOR A V buttons and change the value by using the CURSOR lt 4 or the DATA VALUE wheel Off Slight Slow Medium Fast 132 KETRON AUDYA LI m Im rt J e La iix Etrewgs wwe x PRESET SELECTION Page J ph fates poi BAS CHORO LOWER 5 Vas Figure 345 fa Wi COMERT ai Bi im Clara a m g u FE iun MEC VIBRATO P m eru UG PERCH SELECTICON Page J E s jart E n ET Lm i RATI C rn BLA d ATI D LER S T Dami BAS DO
269. ne frequency we fo foss f voce tone requency 64 71 Voice 1 tone resonance harmony voice low pass filter resonance amount joo a Jan Ja Voieztmeresoname so a 4 71 a Voiedtmereonace So Ja o ri RM Vice4tonereoname so Js Jean fea VoieStoereonace s 26 0 64 127 G4 Voice 1 detune 50 0 50 cents se zr 0 64 7 a so 8 0 64 7 Voceddee ss 5 0 4 7 e Vorce4deme 0 64 7 ViceSdeme SSS joo w oim o Voicelvibratodepirupto 1 semitone ss s o o Vocezvivtodeph SSS ss s o o Vocedvbmtodeph eo w o o Voce4vimtodeph oo fas o o VjceSvivatodeph ss fee o iz Voice 1 vibrato rate up to approximately 12Hz e o ss 8 joo s oar Vocedvimtore oar e Voiesvimtorde ss n o iz i0 Voice 1 vibrato deley 0 3 seconds ss oir io Vocezvivodesy 59 o i io Vocedvivaodeay s9 ja oi Vocedvbmtodeay p fe oer o 127 Voice 1 humanization amount humanization applies small pitch variations extracted from the input signal to Lai the is voices sound more natural s a loaz vore2humanzatonamout s e loaz Voeghumanzaionamout eo 9 loaz Voted4humanzaionamout eo o loaz VoteShumanzaionamout s s oi o VoteTpotamenoswibh s s2 oi o voce2pornamenoswteh s ss lonar o voce3pornamenoswteh
270. nection MIDI connection to an external interface connected to a computer AUDIO MIDI USB INTERFACE or FIREWIRE at MIDI OUT MIDI IN ERE T j Au te TL s CRM EL a m B a T Ho c ETAT ATE TU TUT TT TAT AT I I Mei c SONAR Logic Reaper Live Reason Fruity Loops Sequel etc COMPUTER WITH A DAW KETRON AUDYA 13 Connections VIDEO connection Connecting a VGA monitor VGA MONITOR VIDEO PORT ETE L e X r d ao Dg iB i a E E f U i 4 am Li LE dl E b gE TONS T HEET B RERREBE Ls ba IIT seiri d td AL USB connection USB connection to a computer USB DEVICE 0 o a u m ML a a E d Li CUM Ls z i is YT A HEIL AST TTT 14 KETRON AUDYA COMPUTER CONNECTED VIA USB Connections BM USB connection procedure 1 Connect the USB cable to the USB DEVICE port KETRON of Audya and to the USB port of a computer 2 After a while USB connected will appear on the JB Lt display of Audya Figure A All the functions on T m the front panel are disabled r j ot 3 After a while a screen like Figure B should Caer E appear on the screen of your computer From this B
271. ng F1 Out3 amp 4 3 and 4 outputs F2 Out1 amp 2 Drum 1 and 2 outputs for the drum and the percussive instruments F3 Out1 amp 2 1 and 2 outputs for the right hand all the drums and MIDI Out3 amp 4 By using the CURSOR A V buttons or the DATA VALUE wheel you can select the source to send to the 3 and 4 outputs The internal sources interne are the following Wave 1 2 A Drum MP3 2 SFX MP3 1 Voicetron Drawbars Bass Lower Chords By using the CURSOR gt buttons you can select the source one by one and set the output destination choosing from Main Stereo or Main 3 amp 4 By using the button USER 5 SAVE you can store up to 5 outputs Presets Select a Preset with the F6 F10 buttons and press the USER 5 button SAVE Out1 amp 2 Drum By using the CURSOR A V buttons or the DATA VALUE wheel you can select the percussive instrument of the drum to output Figure 321 The percussive instruments are the following Once selected the percussive instrument you can set the output with the CURSOR gt buttons choosing between Main Stereo or 1 amp 2 Stereo Out1 amp 2 By using the CURSOR A Y buttons or the DATA VALUE wheel you can select the internal source to 124 KETRON AUDYA 1410 LOm EK pan nals ane ram NT CS NN REN Figure 320 urne n j AL ua i 1481 mI Ira ir Pare rt Ferran Figure 322 send to the output 1 and 2 Figure 322 The internal so
272. ns you can access TATUS Te the following pages Ie F1 PITCH VOL TRANS Pitch Bend Master JU TRI Le Tune Master Volume Keyb Transpose Player e jam 2 Transpose Lock and Right Boost Level settings ee E E F2 MODULATION Modulation Wheel sensitivity 2m az settings Figure 304 F3 AFTERTOUCH Aftertouch settings F4 EXPR PEDAL expression pedal settings ETETUTT UNIES F5 ACCORDION Accordion MIDI parameters y Sle tien epa settings ye F6 VEL CURVE keyboard dynamic curve setting w jare eie m F7 VEL FILTER dynamic filter response setting 5 F8 ARABIC Arabian scale settings eed ke E F9 FOOTSWITCH footswitch settings Erm ortamin cer F10 UTILITY utility page for the following Paver Tew tech parameters FITUS OLUMES FRAME 3 SPDIF In Out just only Audya 76 keys M oca Tm 5 Pat Edit Value Recycle 3 Fast Song Figure 305 Show File Icon A dA i CORDE I Gan e Intelligent Transpose uab tiei i Sri er 2nd Right Tab e Remix Live Guitar e Headphone to Out3 amp 4 SSeS Eee e Video Lyric PITCH VOL TRANS es By pressing the F1 button on the KEYBOARD 1 re ae CONTROL page you can access the settings of the mo mom D DT following parameters Figure 305 3 Sl F1 Master Tune master tuning of the keyboard 440 Figure 306 Hz reference 100 F2 Sound Ca
273. o set the ARP amp LICK part F10 Live Guitar see groove list on page 155 Press F10 to set the LIVE GUITAR part 16 KETRON AUDYA B 9s om Back button It allows to display the previous five functions corresponding to the User 1 6 2 7 3 8 4 8 5 10 buttons see User Assignable on page 140 5 pp Forward button It allows to display the next five functions corresponding to the User 1 6 2 7 3 8 4 8 5 10 buttons see User Assignable on page 140 The serigraphy below the User buttons has the following numbering 1 6 2 7 3 8 4 8 5 10 In this manual we use USER 1 USER 2 etc for short 8 i ii User buttons In addition to the FILL and BREAK selection in Arranger mode and other assignable user functions see User Assignable on page 140 the five User buttons can access many functions For example while in the different operative modes MENU DISK PLAYLIST STYLE VIEW DRUM MIXER and so on these five User buttons allow the selection of further pages that open their own settings menus In the Figure you can see how the User buttons in STYLE VIEW mode allow the selection of the VOICE EFFECT PAN and MUTE SINGLE pages By pressing one of the five User buttons you can view the content of the corresponding page Arranger Conductor buttons Display and function buttons A 4 lu rae s Pl Le Mul 1 n ee
274. olume of the song in the range 0 127 Key Tunes Jed Fri RI zar ME i gw i VI P g ra 14 inter rs vul 12 AF E Ac iin is F md sm Figure 141 e F7 LOOP ON OFF sets the loop on off e F8 HOLD ON OFF sets the hold on off that means that the song continues playing after releasing the key otherwise the song stops e F9 DIN sets dynamic response of the keyboard that is the harder you play the louder the volume of the song e F10 SINGLE GLOBAL EDIT sets the changes for a single KEY TUNE or all Key Tune to Chord function see page 123 By pressing USER 1 CLEAR ALL you will clear all the songs from the current KEY TUNE The Key Tunes feature uses a WAVE track so if a Key Tune is playing back the Wave Player will not work and viceversa KETRON e AUDYA 65 Double Harmony Double Harmony By pressing the DOUBLE button in the VOICE section you can activate the function to double the octave of the voice for the right hand By pressing the HARMONY button in the VOICE section you can enable the function to harmonize the voice for the right hand By hold for a couple of seconds Harmony button User can scroll 20 different selection 2 pages menu Figure 142 By using the F1 F10 buttons you can access the following harmonizations PAGE
275. ommand the lead voice MIDI channel will change so you ll need to send all the following MIDI messages to the new channel Harmony and melody MIDI channels must be different if you try set the melody channel at the current harmony channel value the command will be ignored You must change the harmony to another channel before 186 KETRON AUDYA NRPN NRPN_ Data MSB Default Parameter MSB value 23 Virtual voice presets presets for Virtual voice feature Calling a preset overwrites the current Voice transform vibrato formant tone and EQ parameters of the lead voice Calling a preset also turns Lead channel processing switch NRPN 96 06 on automatically Presets are 0 Pop 1 Mellow 2 Teen pop 3 Soft air 4 Dark 5 Energy 6 Delicate 7 Opera 8 Crooner 9 Light 10 Tremolo 11 Vibrato 12 Breathy 13 Shaky 14 Phone 15 Angel 16 Alien 17 Cartoon 18 Nasal 19 Strange 20 Deep 21 Girl 22 Drunk 23 default x none Auto Chord presets preset tables for Auto Chord mode NRPN 96 med 01 data 07 These preset tables are uploaded by the user through a sysex message sysex ID 1 so you must send such a sysex at least 47 once before using this NRPN Please refer to the sysex section for D9 more information regarding the content of the preset tables and how nl 1 to upload them into Voicetron P This NRPN builds a harmony table from a root and one of the 10 107 stored preset tables
276. on also when you are in the MAIN environments by pressing the SAVE button and choosing REGISTRATION IER PHIBATE ec aar TIS OX nts COO BEANS Des Lats OUI BEGENETES feet BOLA LOUNGE RG at COUNTRY Gare Ungte DOG Jere REC Det y COLO FERAIS BE HT a COS Decet Gina HC K amp ox Figure 129 fet BET aie Leger nir j BERT SE s l e Cites Beo gr Sox TE DOT Lee gt 5590 IM Am eo Ds DOR wal XR LEVE Lent W eA Bey e Co POR DOCE el Firg ILS PEOCOLHARUM ERN im ONG RET Ime oe ADT C Lee T Figure 130 KETRON AUDYA 61 jump to the second page press the BACK or FORWARD buttons below the display If you want to replace or delete one SINGLE REGISTRATION select it by using the F1 F10 buttons and press the USER 2 button REPLACE or USER 3 button DELETE respectively and then the ENTER button Press the SAVE button and give a name to the REGISTRATION BLOCK Digit a name in the text box by inputting the characters directly from the keyboard Once the REGISTRATION BLOCK is saved you can recall it from the list by using the CURSOR A V or the DATA VALUE wheel and by pressing the ENTER button Figure 131 By using the F1 F10 buttons you recall
277. on harmonizer with 5 voices Vocoder mode auto harmony by using the arranger vocalizer track on MIDI file advanced editing on all 5 voices 0 In 1 In 2 Out Thru 32 MIDI channels GM2 Standard OUTPUTS Left mono right 4 separate assignable outputs 1 stereo or 2 mono Digital input and output S PDIF at 48 kHz Audya only Stereo headphone INPUTS 2 XLR microphone inputs 2 line in inputs 2 stereo or 2 mono Sustain and pedal volume Footswitch 6 or 13 switches VIDEO INTERFACE VGA monitor mirror zoom karaoke Screen size and positioning controls Resolution 320x240 INCLUDED Video interface hard disk vocalizer power cord music stand user manual ACCESSORIES OPTIONAL Hard case piano type sustain pedal volume pedal control pedal FS6 FS13 MIDI bass pedals ACCESSORIES DIMENSIONS Audya LX Wx H 114 cm x 43 cm x 15 cm 45 x 17 x 6 Audya 5 Lx W x H 100 cm x 43 cm x 15 cm Audya 4 LxXWxH252cm x 32 cm x 1 cm Audya 8 Lx Wx H 105 cm x 43 cm x 15 cm WEIGHT Audya 18 5 Kg 40 Ibs Audya 5 17 Kg 37 lbs Audya 4 7 Kg 15 Ibs Audya 8 18 Kg 39 7 Ibs POWER Automatic voltage detection 110V 60Hz 240V 50Hz plug and play Due to continuing product improvement efforts specifications and appearance are subject to change without notice Please visit frequently our website www ketron it to check for software updates user manuals etc 202 KETRON AUDYA KETRON AUDYA 203 AU
278. ong will be played when loaded by Footswitch Block Registration Regis Up Down WAV DJ MIX function When the WAV DJ MIX function is ON you can use the two Players together 1 Select a file WAVE Press ENTER or START Select another WAVE file and press ENTER The second WAVE file will be pre loaded Press the DJ Loop button to cue the second Player the LEDs are blinking Press the USER 4 button CONTINUE to start the second Wave file 7 Adjust the two sources output by using the WAVE and DJ LOOP faders as you like VIS Coo Oo KEY TUNE TO CHORD function When the Key Tune To Chord is active you can start a Key Tune by using the associated key but also by using the recognition of the associated chord Here s an example By means of the chord recognition if Bass To Chord is set to On also the bass section will start the Key Tune EI TER COMO T CIAND m E i Be du a ul rr E i Ea iT Bm dg ere rank a PRESET ERECTION Page 1 a e c Ch ed is Heald Off LL Figure 318 Der 3 45 1 COW ELLA Terre l fran COMCERT_oEANT zrer t Lar RT Mahe Finger us S Bra Basin wee 127 CX Pad Fw Py Laer Cub rire Lire Orr Con Pno wav A ES Wwe Sr 7 ud 3 as inc Orge Frit Geert Tune to F r E
279. onomeO02 82 ShakerOl 35 Kick02 83 ShakerO2 36 Kickl6 84 SticksO2 37 RimshotO09 85 Castagnet 38 Snare021 86 TambourineOl 39 ClapOl 87 Rimshotl8 40 Snare028 88 SnareO012 41 0 89 Snare016 42 Stick04 90 Snare013 43 02 91 Close06 44 Close02 92 Stick02 45 Tom03 93 Close0l 46 Open0O2 94 OpenO2 47 Tom04 95 Reverse 48 Tom05 96 Applause 49 Crash02 97 Belltree 50 Tom06 98 Empty 5 Ride03 99 Empty 52 Crash03 100 Empty 53 RidebellO 101 Empty 54 TambourineO 102 Empty 55 Crash04 103 Empty 56 Cowbell0l 104 Empty 57 Crash05 105 Empty 58 Vibraslap 106 Empty 59 Ride02 107 Empty 20 Snare005 68 Agogo Low KETRON e AUDYA 173 Drum Set 2 Snare006 69 Cabasa 22 Tom Flam0Ol 70 MaracasOl 23 Tom Flam02 71 WhistleOl 24 Crash0l 72 Whistle0O2 25 Snare007 73 Guiro0l 26 Fingsnap 0 74 Guiro02 27 Slap 75 ClavesOl 28 Snare008 76 W_Block_Hi 29 Scratch Up 77 W Block Lo 30 Scratch Down 8 Cuica0l 9 SticksOl 79 Cuica02 32 Click 80 TriangleOl 33 MetronomeOl 8 TriangleO2 34 MetronomeO02 82 ShakerOl 35 Kick23 83 ShakerO2 36 Kick24 84 SticksO2 37 R
280. ont panel For example Pitch1 Pitch2 changes the pitch Filter changes the filter Figure 120 Amplitude changes the amplitude mitai 58 KETRON AUDYA Cutoff changes the cutoff of the filter Pit Cutoff changes pitch and cutoff Pitch Filt changes pitch and filter Pitch Ampl changes pitch and amplitude Pit FiltAmp changes pitch filter and amplitude Pi FitAm Cut changes pitch filter amplitude and cutoff Slide 1 Slide 2 Slide 3 Slide 4 applies a slide effect Slide Bend applies a note bending Soft Pitch applies a slight untuning By pressing the CURSOR gt buttons together you can switch the parameter OFF FS F8 MOD WHA Figure 121 you can assign a Modulation wheel control to each VOICE For example Pitch changes the pitch Filter changes the filter Amplitude changes the amplitude Cutoff changes the cutoff of the filter Pit Cutoff changes pitch and cutoff Pitch Filt changes pitch and filter Pitch Amp changes pitch and amplitube Pit Filt Amp changes pitch filter and amplitude Wha To Pedal applies a wha wha effect to the pedal Wha To Wheel applies a wha wha effect to the wheel e FA F9 BEND Figure 122 you can assign a Bend control to each VOICE For example Pitch changes the pitch PittAmpl changes the pitch and the amplitude Pit Cutoff changes pitch and cutoff PittAmp Cutt changes pitch the amplitude and the cutoff Pit TVF changes pitch and the envelope of the
281. ora 1 Tan Tas mes F6 Alphab Numeric Sort file sorting in alphabetical mem 8 i or numerical way sa Taro Cred F Pon F7 Number Ass it allows to assign permanently the numbers into files so that in future if you modify the folder indexing of files remains the same This option opens to pop up where you can assign numbers only to files of the actual Player F1 or to all file types F2 In the lower part of the window a progress bar will appear during the file number n Leie 3 emi Bip Du ing of the folder Instead if a numbering is already rmm LEAL MA MERE E assigned a pop up to remove numbering will ap ear em n p Crap ies d fi DES eer l cud sw 18 Con Pon is Dance em i py ctr omne o ERR i a xp p Figure 39 32 KETRON AUDYA Wave Sync WAVE SYNC Environment allows to assign several wave tracks synchronized to MIDI track by MIDI clock On this feature you can assign Starting Stop Repeat measure for each Wave track assigned 1 2 WAVE and MIDI tracks must be located on the same folder Use F8 button to select WAVE SYNC feature This action allows to Create or Edit your WAVE SYNC files Enter into the MIDI player and select the MIDI file to be edit and press Load MIDI F10 Display will show a loading pop up message Once loading procedure will be completed PLAY and STOP function will
282. os emn Pr PERT rs Figure 19 e F5 MY FOLDERS when enabled by pressing one of the 0 9 numeric keypad in STYLE section that folder is recalled To store the position of a folder WAVE DJ LOOP MP3 etc hold to 0 9 button of the keypad while the content of the folder is shown B Page 1 e F6 GLOB LOCAL VIEW enables the global view or local view In LOCAL VIEW mode only the files by using the same extension e g WAV are shown In GLOBAL VIEW mode all the file types are shown Note that the TXT files are always shown e F7 SONG TR shows the transpose value previously stored in the song F8 TRANSP transpose the track in the range of 24 semitones e F9 Wave Edit see next paragraph e F10 PREV NEXT 1 3 NEXT by pressing this button NEXT you can access to next pages B Page 2 e F6 A PLAY PAUSE ON SPACE 3s In Autoplay position the player will automatically playback all the files in the folder In PAUSE position after the current track the player moves to the next without starting If set to SPACE 3s instead the player add a 3 second pause between the track You can customize the waiting time by using the Dial KETRON e AUDYA 25 Player e F7 LOOP ON OFF enables disables the loop playback of one track e F8 PFL ON OFF enables disables the PFL When PFL is active the Player is routed to AUX3 amp 4 and AUX3 amp 4 outputs to headphones This works only if the
283. ote that you can access more than two pages for each style family gie z A dms HA 51 5 zm Ll Am wea 1 LIB amp besem p gi LJE A CUNEO Puce p Go iaaii Neo m o By turning the wheel clockwise Wis D uU counter clockwise you can scroll the Ei best 19 pages just like the CURSOR 4 9 Also you can scroll the pages by pressing repeatedly the same STYLE family button e g BALLAD POP and so on Note that the styles which contain an audio part AUDIO DRUM GROOVES LIVE GUITAR have the symbol before the style name KETRON AUDYA 21 Play Control Play Control The PLAY CONTROL section contains all the control functions so you can start playing the keyboard and modify the settings accordingly to your own way of playing PLAY CONTROL Peay TE MT TOUCH SET CEP PARE TH LIEST assist VEN i LEFT LEER 5L TW hist SPLIT FEE vod AS SRM EOE a Ss eh B TRANSPOSER By pressing the and buttons you can transpose the overall pitch in 24 semitones up or SLOW BALLAD down 1 semitone step including the Arranger l l m l except the drum The display shows the current ALLAL arand Prana TRANSPOSE value Figure 13 Press the and Tempo Transp buttons simultaneously to instantly reset the transpose value to 0 Figure 13
284. pel Dahl e ocn T Ti z Figure 281 After you select the effect for the right hand you can hear the result by playing directly on the right split of the keyboard To lock the reverb also when changing Program or Registration or at start up press the Lock ON button corresponding to the USER 1 button Figure 281 After the effect type selection exit by pressing the EXIT button or directly by pressing the MENU button To store the reverb type at start up press the SAVE button on the front panel and F6 CUSTOM STARTUP LEFT GM REVERB From the REVERB page by pressing the F2 button LEFT GM REVERB you can access the page for the selection of the reverb for the left hand and the GM parts Figure 282 The available reverb Preset are the same of those for the right hand seen before To lock the reverb also when changing Program or Registration or at start up press the Lock ON button corresponding to the USER 1 button as shown by the arrow on Figure 283 After the effect type selection exit by pressing the EXIT button or directly by pressing the MENU button USER REVERB When you select the reverb for the right hand or the left hand and the GM parts you can choose one of the 5 USER REVERBS Figure 284 corresponding to the F6 F10 buttons of the second REVERB page By pressing the EDIT button on the front panel you can customize the user reverbs and store them as User Rev1 User Rev2 User Rev3 Use
285. per Kitway Transp end StringsL PIANC Page 1 GLOB VIEW HHH A Funky Tune wav MARKER K Harp Interval way WAVE EDIT Hi Hat Super Kit way I Like Fusion wav MY FOLDER J Italian Polka wav SERV ue Time LO Re CINTERNAL BENE HEN RE Figure 33 SLOW BALLAD 63 CONCERT_GRAND end Stringsl PIANG Page 1 CARES LEAD ON i DI TooSwina vocalMute mp3 lli O2 Soe of Rack vacaL mp3 LYRIC ON i Alto Sax exercise mp3 lll Baroque mp3 ll Big Band 1 Take the mp3 200M OFF lu Bia Band 2 mp3 Transp 0 lili Chill Gut mp3 MARKER i Clean Live Guitar mp3 MIXER lili Cool Pap mp3 ll Dance mp3 M Y FOLDERS lll Elektro Kitmp3 NEXT gt gt BALLAD arand Piana Tempo LOO Transp GLOB VIEW HUME Time Figure 34 Press the ENTER button to start playback Adjust the fader 1 and fader 2 of the Player in order to mix the two audio files TRACK 1 and TRACK 2 in blue colour on the panel or KETRON AUDYA O1 Player TG Ap ANTI CROSSFADE If you want to execute an automatic crossfade between the two tracks while playing press the CROSSFADE button on the panel and follow the procedure below CROSSFADE between WAVE and MP3 files 1 Press the WAVE button 2 Select an audio file from the WAVE folder Figure 33 3 Press the START button USER 5 or the ENTER button or the START button on the panel The WAVE track
286. press the F7 button VIDEO MODE to open the page for the video settings Figure 325 By using the F1 F10 buttons you can open the following settings pages F1 MODE sets the VGA video output for lyric display karaoke or as MIRROR all that you see in the display is mirrored on a VGA monitor F2 HOR START sets the horizontal start position F3 HOR POSITION horizontal position F4 VERT START sets the vertical start position F5 VERT POSITION vertical position F6 BACKGROUND sets the background colour F7 NORMAL TEXT sets the normal text colour F8 HIGHLIGHT FORE sets the highlighted text fore colour F9 HIGHLIGHT BACK sets the highlighted text background colour F10 LYRIC UPPERCASE sets upper lower case for lyric text karaoke CONCERT_GRAND end StringsL PIANC Page 1 LINK MODE All Tempo 100 RUP MODE Free TIME SIGM f 4 VOLUME 60 TIME SIGM 4 OUTPUT 33 click split C3 Octave Figure 323 SLOW BALLAD BALLAD ARRANGER Tempo 76 Transp DRUM Wass SLOW BALLAD 63 CONCERT_GRAND end Stringsl BALLAD arand Piano Tempo 76 Transp PIANO Page 1 LINK MODE All Tempo 100 RUN MODE Free TIME SIGH 4 VOLUME TIME SIGN 4 om HORN TYPE click MENU Split C3 Octave DRUM BASS CHORD LOWER Figure 324 SLOW_BALLAD 63 CONCERT
287. pty CowbellO1 Empty Crash05 Empty 58 Vibraslap 106 Empty 59 Ride03 107 Empty 60 Bongo_Hi 108 Empty 61 Bongo Low 109 Empty R amp B Program Change 90 14 SnareO0l 62 Conga Slap 15 RollOl 63 Conga Hi 16 Roll02 64 Conga Low 17 Snare002 65 Timbales Hi 18 Snare003 66 Timbales Lo 19 Snare004 67 Agogo HI 20 Snare005 68 Agogo Low KETRON AUDYA 1 9 Drum Set 32 Snare063 80 Empty 33 RollO5 81 Empty 34 Snare057 82 Empty 35 Kick52 83 Empty 36 Kick54 84 Empty 37 Rimshot22 85 Empty 38 Snare055 86 Empty Snare050 Snare054 Tom38 Stick14 Tom4 Stick03 Tom40 OpenO7 Tom40 Tom39 Empty Crash10 Empty Tom39 Empty Ride04 Empty Crash02 Empty Ridebell03 Empty Middle09 Empty Crash10 Empty MiddleO2 Empty Crash10 Empty OpenO07 Empty RideO3 Empty MaracasO 1 Empty Maracas02 Empty Empty WhistleO Empty Whistle02 Empty GuiroO Empty Empty Guiro02 OpenO07 Empty ClavesOl Empty OpenO7 2 Snare006 69 Cabasa 22 Tom FlamOl 70 MaracasOl 23 Tom Flam02 71 WhistleO1 24 Crash0l 72 Whistle0O2 25 Snare007 73 Guiro0l 26 Fingsnap 0 74 Guiro02 27 Slap 75 ClavesOl 28 Snare008 76 W_Block_Hi 29 Scratch Up 77 W Block Lo
288. pty 62 Conga Slap 15 RollOl 63 Conga Hi 16 Roll02 64 Conga Low 17 SnareO002 65 Timbales Hi 18 SnareO003 66 Timbales Lo 19 Snare004 67 Agogo 20 Snare005 68 Agogo Low 21 Snare006 69 Cabasa 22 Tom 70 MaracasOl 23 Tom Flam02 71 WhistleO1 24 Crash09 72 Whistle0O2 25 Snare065 73 GuiroOl 26 Fingsnap 0 74 Guiro02 27 Slap 75 ClavesOl 28 Snare008 76 Block Hi 29 Scratch Up 77 W Block Lo 30 Scratch Down 8 Cuica0l 31 Sticks03 9 Cuica02 32 Click 80 TriangleOl 33 Metronomel 8 TriangleO2 34 MetronomeO2 82 ShakerOl 176 KETRON AUDYA 35 Kick37 83 ShakerO2 36 Kick35 84 SticksO2 37 RimshotlO 85 Castagnet 38 Snare024 86 TambourineOl 39 Snare023 87 RimshotO7 40 Snare044 88 Snare016 41 Tom37 89 Snare022 42 Stick02 90 Snare026 43 Tom36 91 MiddleO 44 Close0l 92 Stickl7 45 Tom35 93 Close02 46 94 OpenOIl 47 Tom34 95 Reverse 48 Tom33 96 Applause 49 Crash08 97 Belltree 50 Tom32 98 Empty 5 Ride03 99 Empty 52 Crashll 100 Empty 53 Ridebell02 101 Empty 54 TambourineO 102 Empty 55 Splashol 103 Empty 56 Cowbell0l 104 Empty 57 Crash06 105 Empty 58 Vibraslap 106 Empty 59 RideO7 107 Empty 60 Bongo Hi 108 Empty 61 Bongo Low 109 Empty Garage Program Change 82 14 SnareO001 62 Conga Slap 15 Rollo 63 Conga Hi 16 Roll02 64 Conga Low 17 Snare
289. r effects that is the original version with some effects applied like compressor reverb etc Groove Bank Drum 2 BACHATAA UJ gt O gt gt gt 0 AC AC AC AT AT v UJ r c m G JI gt 0 op A A O A A A A A A A JI LL i a N OIAIOINI MDI H H H E E E NO 25 BONGO 1T A A A H H H O O 21 BONGO SALSA 2 A 2 A A Z H H H No ja a OoOjdvc o o 4 BO BONGO SALSA a BossaB 25 BRUSH FAST 6 BRUSH MEDIUM BRUSH SLOW l BRUSH SLOW2 NO O BRUSH_SLOW3 0 BRUSH SLOWA Co g O gt UJ gt N gt Co CABA G G S S S C C C C C C E O D C O Z 1 2 2 2 2 3 4 3 7 8 9 3 5 O N Q2 N O 2 U N 37 O gt U GA 228 9 CONGA GA O O Z C gt NO CONGA 3T 31 CONGAST n2 OJO OJO zz C C gt gt 55 AB AC AD DA A DA B A B Ke AT NGO CHA A B C 2 A B D E F AT 3T 6T NIN G N o CONGA BOLERO CONGA BOLERO2 43 CONGA CHAT 44 CONGA CHA2 5 CONGA MAMBO 49 CONGA SALSA 51 CONGA SALSAS NO O Co co 0 0 5 55 B C5 N O N NIO O1 NO N O gt Z O Co 6 66 68 o o 97 o 99 03 208 i O Co NO NO O
290. r rangers only then Fills and Breaks will continue to play the Arrange Loop Giving a name with the initial symbol will make easier to recognize it as an audio Style 2 A special option has been provided into Style Mode Drum 2nd page to control the On Off condition for the User Audio Drums When the option is set to Off then the initial Audio Resources Loading will be skipped The On Off condition may be saved as de fault with Save Custom Start up function 3 The Audio Resources Loading time is directly pro portional to the amount for files present on the User Audio Drums folder KETRON AUDYA 5 User Live Guitar User Live Guitar User Live Guitar are located on DISK menu on USER LIVE GUITAR Folder Figure 164 Once you ll select this folder display menu will inform you on related operating menu On the left part of display you Il assign 4 available Ins bank of selection On the right part you ll operate with followed features Clear All F6 Allows to clear all memory User live Guitar data Load GTR F7 Load selected User Live Guitar Save Sel F8 This function create a file with GBK extension which like RBK file can load more than a single User Live Guitar at the same time and could be assigned as Autoload function hen Audya will be turned ON A Load On Off F9 Enable or Disable Autoload function for GBK file when Audya turn On GTR Disable Enable F10 Enable or Disable User Live Guitar
291. r Audio Drums fitted with a complete set up for all parts Intro Ending ABCD Fill and Break The Style are Houset Lounge NewBossa NuJazz In order to access the User Loops it needs to go into Style View and press repeatedly the tab F1 until appears the name User Audio Drum Figure 1 With Alpha dial is possible to scroll all the User Audio Drums available The Loops are automatically synchronized with MIDI and may be associated to each part of the Style such as A B C D Fill In Break Intro Ending Figure 162 In order to memorize the User Drums on other parts different than ABCD such as Fill Break Intro and Ending it S necessary to switch on the two tabs KEY START and KEY STOP on the panel On Style in Stop condition when pressing Fill tab the name Fill will appear on the screen thus allowing to set the proper Loop for the Fill Same thing for Breaks and Intro Ending But in order to achieve the Ending programming the tab Intro must be pressed twice The new Style that incorporates User Audio Drums can be saved as usual with SAVE into the User Style section Figure 163 User Audio Drum 33 k 012 U ftriga ooo Lond Chan EL Pann a 37 ES ELUES 1 APRANGER VOLLIMES d pL CJ hina Fi amp EJ Dale CHORD LOWER 5 YORE BCR VOLUMES EJ A E Z3 7 Ce BASS DWO LOWER Do o 5 1 If the User Audio Drums are associated to the 4 A
292. r Overdrive Presets are available Just press one of the F1 F5 buttons to select the corresponding Overdrive type Overdr1 Overdr5 When you activate an Overdrive Preset you can set the option Lock On Off as for the previous effects By pressing the EDIT button on the front panel you can access the parameters of the selected Overdrive Preset as shown in Figure 298 The parameters are identical for all the five Overdrive effects F1 Overdrive choose from 1 to 5 F2 GAIN effect level values 0 127 F3 FILTER LEVEL filter level values 0 63 4 FREQ frequency filter cutoff values 0 63 F5 FILTER RESO filter resonance values 0 63 F7 INPUT GAIN input level values 0 63 F8 OUTPUT LEVEL output level values 0 63 By pressing the CURSOR lt 4 gt buttons together you set the value to 0 After you set the parameters you can to store the custom Overdrive by pressing the USER 5 button SAVE or the SAVE button on the front panel A brief message SAVE DATA TO DISK will appear SLOVW_BALLAD 63 CONCERT_GRAND BALLAD Grand Piana end StringsL Tempo 76 Transp PIANO Fage 1 SLOW Split C3 Octave 53 DRUM BASS CHORD LOWER Figure 296 SLOW BALLAD CONCERT_GRAND end StringsL PIAMO Page 1 BALLAD Grand Piana Tempo 76 Transp Oyverdrt Oyverdr2 Cverdr a Overdr 4 Overdrs split c3 Octave BS BS B3 DROM B 55 CHORD LOWE
293. r Rev4 and User Rev5 The Figure 285 shows the parameters of User Rev1 that you can modify by using the F1 F10 buttons and the CURSOR gt buttons or the DATA VALUE wheel F1 User Rev choose from 1 to 5 F2 LEVEL reverb level values 0 63 F3 TIME reverb time values 0 63 F4 THESHOLD GATE threshold of gate values 0 63 F5 HIGH DAMP high frequencies damp values 0 63 F ALGORITHM algorithm type Long1 Long2 Medium Short1 Short2 By pressing the CURSOR lt 4 gt buttons together you set the value to 0 After you set the parameters you can to store the custom reverb by pressing the USER 5 button SAVE or the SAVE button on the front panel A brief SAVE DATA TO DISK message will appear CHORUS By pressing the F2 button on the DSP page you can access the CHORUS screen as shown in Figure 233 Here you can select the following parameters F1 CHORUS RIGHT selection of the Chorus for the right hand opens another window F2 CHORUS LEFT GM selection of the Chorus for the left hand and the GM parts opens another window F6 Right Level settings of the Chorus level for the right hand values 0 63 F7 Left GM Level settings of the Chorus level for the left hand and the GM parts values 0 63 BALL ADD NR aldpum A rey a rE ar o p Set eram IB A lie Lae F Shudiod Theatre 1 Cunt Theatre Ousd Stagel S HAT 1 5 weg EF 41 rJ 1 EN TE
294. r example to recall the REGISTRATION 0012 just digit 12 on the numeric keypad B Creating a REGISTRATION BLOCK The REGISTRATION BLOCK is a bunch of twenty SINGLE REGISTRATIONS or direct functions that can be quickly recalled 1 p Press the REGISTRATION button to open the corresponding screen If not selected press the USER 4 button to select BLOCK If there is no file an empty screen and EMPTY will appear Figure 129 Press the EDIT button Press the USER 1 button CREATE The display will show all the SINGLE REGISTRATIONS Figure 130 By using the F1 F10 buttons select to which button you want to assign the SINGLE REGISTRATION Select the SINGLE REGISTRATION by using the DATA VALUE wheel or the CURSOR A V Press the ENTER button in order to confirm the SINGLE REGISTRATION assigned to any F1 F10 button Repeat the operation for each F1 F10 button ds Fai tlie r EL PRA TIAS TG P OUT BLUE PES CUR DIDI PUO EXE Sa rg HET wa TIE OK LIVE BOCA Hl i HEH PARIME PP RORCE LAM E fin r 111 Poo pal Lies Dor wir tB hl CERE ALI DOREY I OTHAN DT SIM ROMANTIC Z E Doc PO 580 win uri tb ae 1 xs Darcy f Fish S at ees jm i ey T ret E WR Figure 128 You can store the SINGLE registrati
295. rack will drive the channel of the voice making double voices and choir effects 1 Select the part by pressing the CURSOR lt 4 gt buttons For example select part 04 2 Pressthe F9 button MODE 3 Turn the DATA VALUE to set the value by selecting VOCAL Figure 206 4 Turn the button VOCALIZER on 5 To edit the MIDI MODE please see VOICETRON section later in this manual KETRON AUDYA 89 GM Part B FILT TX RX USER 2 By pressing FILTER TX RX you can access the window where to edit the MIDI transmission filters Figure 207 By pressing the button again you can access the window where to edit the MIDI reception filters To change the MIDI transmission reception parameters please see the MENU gt MIDI section B FILT TO ALL USER 3 By pressing FILT TO ALL you can set the filter to all ALL or to a single MIDI channel SINGLE B 16 PARTS USER 4 By pressing 16 PARTS you can access the window where the status of the 16 parts appear divided into two windows of 8 parts each From each of the two windows you can change all the tracks parameters by using the F1 F10 buttons and the DATA VALUE wheel 1 Press the F1 or F6 buttons repeatedly to choose the Program Change of the part track In this way you see the 16 parts tracks of the MIDI file By using the CURSOR a gt buttons or the DATA VALUE or the VOICE buttons you can select the GM instrument for each part track Figure 208 2 Press the F2 or F7 b
296. rd Level master volume of the keyboard values 16 63 Not for the AUDIO parts MODULATION F3 Bend Sens Pitch Bend sensitivity values 0 24 By pressing the F2 button on the KEYBOARD semitones to O that is no Pitch Bend effect CONTROL page you can access the MODULATION F4 Keyb Only Transpose keyboard transposition settings Figure 306 Here you can control the only values ON OFF If set to ON the SENSITIVITY parameter for the Modulation Wheel transposition affects the keyboard and not the values 0 48 song of the Player F5 Player Transpose Lock transposition lock on the Player values ON OFF AFTERTOUCH F6 Right Boost Level maximum level for the Right By pressing the F3 button on the KEYBOARD Boost function value 10 50 when it s applied CONTROL page you can access the settings of the by the USER buttons This function boosts the AFTERTOUCH parameters Figure 307 volume of the right hand accordingly to the level F1 Sensitivity adjustment of the Aftertouch sensitivity set by the Right Boost Level parameter values 0 63 F7 Glide Time Sets the Glide effect time F2 Threshold threshold of the Aftertouch values 0 63 F3 Attack Time attack time of the Aftertouch values 0 100 F4 Slide Threshold threshold of the Slide effect values 10 127 The Slide effect must be programmed within a VOICE F5 Slide Time time of the Slide effect values 0 100 118 KETRON AUDYA F6 Bend Value Bend value of the Slide effect v
297. ress the SAVE button function which replaces the HARMONY button in order to alter dynamically the pitch of the scale while you are playing 120 KETRON AUDYA B FOOTSWITCH e By pressing the F9 button from the KEYBOARD CONTROL page you can activate the FOOTSWITCH screen Figure 314 where you can assign the functions to the pedalboard connected on the rear The optional FS13 pedalboard has 13 functions to which you can assign any parameter of the keyboard By using the CURSOR A V buttons select one of the 13 functions of the pedal and assign one of the parameters of the table below by using the CURSOR A buttons or the DATA VALUE oft Fill 1 4 NNI Lyric On Off Zoom z n ia pees Sia Dies B 35 mh 3 ika i 1 1 7 rri n rd d 1 z p T b Ur Li pact d i i EF off i 151 i i P m 4 i TEST amp TE Lam IEEE i i I F a P ES nc ee 2 i i ries 1 E 433 Ei m LE BAI i Voice Down A Play On Off s Up le Figure 314 ea BassToLowest a e Play Kick1 k Forward Tab File Up Down Sub Reg Up Down By activating Arabic Scale see page 120 the footswitches will become Arabic 1 2 3 Once you set the FOOTSWITCH parameters you can save them by pressing the USER 5 button SAVE or the SAVE bu
298. rts of the drum set Figure 215 By pressing the F1 F10 buttons you select the percussive parts of the drum e F1 KICK e F2 SNARE e FS HI HAT e FA CYMBAL e F5 TOM F6 RIMSHOT e F 7 LATIN1 Latin percussion 1 e F8 LATIN2 Latin percussion 2 e F9 LATIN3 Latin percussion 3 e F10 CLAP FX hands clap and effects When no USER 1 4 button is selected to deselect a button just press the button again you can MUTE the single percussive parts of the drum by using the F1 F10 buttons Figure 215 To UNMUTE a percussive part press the same F1 F10 button again The USER buttons from 1 a 4 let you modify the following items VOLUME REVERB PAN POT DRUM REMAP SINGLE GLOBAL VOLUME USER 1 By pressing VOLUME you can set the volumes of the percussive parts of the drum by using the F1 F10 buttons and the DATA VALUE wheel or by using the CURSOR lt 4 buttons The available values are from 0 to 15 Figure 217 By pressing the CURSOR lt gt buttons together you set the value to 0 B REVERB USER 2 By pressing REVERB you can set the reverb sends of the single percussive parts of the drum by using the F1 F10 buttons and the DATA VALUE wheel or by using the CURSOR gt buttons The available values are from 0 to 15 Figure 218 By pressing the CURSOR lt 4 buttons together you set the value to 0 B PAN POT USER 3 By pressing PAN POT you can set the stero position of the single percussive parts of
299. s FO 26 7B 11 00 Type F7 Type Distorsion Type Right FO 26 7B 13 03 Dist Type F7 Distorsion Type Left GM FO 26 7B 17 03 Dist Type F7 Dist Type Distorsion Level FO 26 7B 22 00 Dist Level F7 Distorsion Tone FO 26 7B 25 00 Dist Tone F7 Distorsion Resonance FO 26 7B 26 00 Dist Reso F7 DISK MIDIPORT SET FO 26 7B 30 00 Set F7 SPLIT FO 26 7B 03 00 Split F7 GLOBAL TRANSPOSER FO 26 7B 07 00 Tran F7 ARABIC TUNE FO 26 7B Oa Chan data1 data2 data12 F7 Dist Level Dist Tone Dist Reso Tran Ec Feed Ec Filter 00h Overdrive 3 O1h Overdrive 1 02h Overdrive 1 OOh Overdrive 1 01h Overdrive 2 02h Overdrive 3 03h Tube 1 04h Tube 2 05 Distorsion1 O6h Distorsion2 07h Distorsion3 O8h Hyper Dist 09h Grunge Set 00h gm Split 01h 7fh Chan 00h Ofh data 00h 7fh 7eh lower 7fh all channels OO right beside MIDI port used will be drive Right or GM Left part 196 KETRON AUDYA 00h 7f h 00h 7f h 00h 7f h 13h Triple User2 00h 7f h 00h 7f h 00h 7f h 00h 7f h 04h Distorsion3 05 Distorsion2 O6h Grunge Oah Fuzz Obh Hot British Och Org Over 1 Odh Org Over 2 Oeh Org Over 3 Ofh Over User1 10h Over User2 11h Dist User1 12h Dist User2 13h Dist User3 oet 01 keyb 28h 58h 40h no transp 40h no detune ARABIC MODE ACTIVE INACTIVE FO 26 7B OF 03 Val F7 Val 0 disactive Val 0 active MASTER TUNE FO 26 7B
300. s s lonar o voce4pornamenoswteh e9 ss lona o voce5pornamenoswteh s se loaz 2 voetponamenotme es s7 loaz 2 voce2pornamenotme e9 ss loaz 2 voce3ponamenotme e9 8 9 1 Voice 4 portamento time 99 60 0 127 Voice 5 portamento time 190 KETRON AUDYA B Effects NRPN 84H Compressor 0 Off 1 127 On Attack time 0 fast attack 0 1 ms 60 1ms 100 10ms 127 slow attack 100ms exp curve m 5 oexooa Release time 0 fast release 10ms 60 100 ms 100 21 s 127 slow release 5s exp curve 100 03 m p exe Threshold 127 0dB 96 6dB 64 12dB 45 18dB 32 24dB 16 36dB 8 48dB 0 64dB 100 Ratio 127 1 128 128 1 126 2 128 64 1 125 3 128 64 64 128 2 1 0 1 1 100 Boost applied to signal after compression 127 x8 64 x4 32 x2 16 to 02x1 100 pope Poo Compressor preset calls a compressor preset i e overwrites NRPN 100 01 tO 100 05 with predefined values 966 table below for description of the presets Lead EQ 101 Input gain 24dB OdB 12dB 1 dB step 76 101 T E n l Band gain 14dB 0dB 14dB 1 dB step 78 Harmony EQ Input gain 24d B OdB 12dB 1 dB step 102 mc Band gain A4dB OdB 14dB 1 dB step Heverb EchO Reverb Echo 103 0 127 Lead voice reverb send level same as CC 5Bh on lead channel 103 0 127 Harmony reverb send level same as CC 5Bh on h
301. s with one wider than the other A grounding type plug has two blades and a third grounding prong The wide blade or the third prong are provided for your safety If the provided plug does not fit into your outlet consult an electrician for replacement of the obsolete outlet Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched particularly at plugs convenience recepta cles and the point where they exit from the apparatus Only use attachments accessories specified by the manufacturer Use only by using the cart stand tripod bracket or table specified by the manufacturer or sold by using the apparatus When a cart is used use caution when moving the cart apparatus combination to avoid injury from tip over Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when unused for long periods of time Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel Servicing is required when the apparatus has been damaged in any way such as power supply cord or plug is damaged liquid has been spilled or objects have fallen into the apparatus the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture does not operate nor mally or has been dropped CE Marking Information a Applicable electromagnetic environment E4 b Peak inrush current 15 A CAUTION TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT REMOVE COVER OR BACK NO USER SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL Warning sign within equilateral triangle
302. s from the selected folder e CURSOR lt 4 gt buttons when the title is too long scroll the letters of the titles e The USER 5 button below the display enables the START function to start playback Once the track is playing the USER 4 and USER 2 buttons below the display enable the PAUSE and STOP functions respectively The F1 F10 buttons enable the following functions F1 LEAD MUTE mute the volume of the melody track F2 LYRIC ON shows the text lyric F3 ZOOM OFF makes the text smaller e FA MARKER Marker view Located when available on display side Once available allow to jump from different song point Select Jump meas by User 5 10 button to jump on the next marker as soon measure will be played or select Jump Next by User 5 10 button to jump on the next marker just only when marked phrase will be played Player When a track of the Player is playing the corresponding LED flashes The Remix On Off function works only when MIDIFILE is selected even if it is shown on the WAVE and MP3 player screens Li uL BN EJ RR LU TE i YI D S oz T m es i lal WT Cee Pe aire LEAP pA QUE VEW Pet Dore o voire LYRIC OH FETTE rc 4 a Hoen B Plobed very Eos Lite Corte ume OFT Park agn Tra 5 J Roe Tone vm HHK FE Pe Iu 1nteevad s eu FH z de iW Seer et Pw Peon warns J Town Pode
303. s on the rear panel and adjust the gain level by using the GAIN 1 and GAIN 2 small knobs on rear panel B VOCALIZER The VOCALIZER button enables the multi processor effects for harmonization and automatic pitch control only on MICRO 1 input B Setting a vocal effect 1 Press and hold for few seconds MICRO button 2 The screen where to choose the MICRO PRESETS will appear Figure 51 3 Pressthe F1 F10 buttons to set one of the MICRO PRESETS that is an effect for the microphone connected to MICRO 1 and or MICRO 2 input 4 Press the CURSOR lt 4 gt to scroll the MICRO PRESETS pages By pressing the F1 F10 buttons you can access two pages with ten MICRO PRESETS each PAGE1 J PAGE2 F3 VIBRATO VOICETROM 16_POP_ ROCK Bip Grand PESE Micro Presets 43 Dis CHORD LOWER Voicetron To access the configuration menus of MICRO and VOICETRON hold down few seconds the corresponding buttons AF TOI E one Sot teed T 105 Trap PIANO Page j a3 3 Figure 51 Audya microphones input allows to use only Dynamic Microphones KETRON e AUDYA O Voicetron Setting a VOCALIZER effect 1 Press the VOCALIZER button 2 he screen where to choose the VOICETRON PRESETS will appear Figure 52 3 Press the F1 F10 buttons to set one of the VOICETRON PRESETS that is an effect for the microphone connected to MICRO 1 input 4 Press the CURSOR lt 4 amp to
304. s the speed of playing notes Trio1 2 mode As above but with three notes Steel mode It s a particular Pitch Bend control on the voices The Pitch Bend acts only on the lower played note Double and 2 Hands mode They are the copy of the Double and Harmony 2 Hands buttons on the panel By recalling one VOICE you can automatically activate the functions stored in the VOICE Down1 2 Folk1 2 these options are harmonizations that can be assigned directly to program voice KETRON AUDYA 5 f Program These parameters are of course linked to the NICE_BALLAD 1 MY POOGRAM Harmony parameter which specifies the voice BALLAD Grand PR ong Strings affected by harmonization Temp 11 Trap EDIT PROGR e Aft Morphing it assigns the morphing to the VORES Pusa tied Gad Pee aftertouch control E ca et ees e Aft Morph Coupl it assigns the additive PORT MOND _31_ teoatol ort pow ort morphing to control First second e Ped Morphing it assigns the morphing to the Em aa ES pedal control e Ped Morph Coupl it assigns the additive morphing to the volume pedal control e Sustain Switch it switches sounds by using the Se kie sustain pedal e Key off you can assign sounds on key off e Key off time 1 2 key off sound accordingly to the Figure 119 key pressure time e Key off random1 2 random key off sound p e F5 SPLIT 12 ON OFF Figure 118 you can en
305. s together you set the amount to 0 B PAN USER 3 By pressing PAN you can edit the panoramic position of each part of the style Figure 150 by using the CURSOR lt 4 gt buttons Please note that the PAN cannot be modified for the Audio Drum part B MUTE USER 4 By pressing MUTE you can mute the parts of the style by using the F1 F10 buttons The muted parts have an asterisk after the name Figure 151 Once you have set the MUTE parts in a style the parts remain muted also changing the style NOTE By pressing button USER 5 you can select the SINGLE or GLOBAL mode in order to change the single Varia tion of the style or all the Variations 68 KETRON AUDYA SLOW BALLAD CONCERT_GRAND 2nd Stringsl PIANO Page 1 BASS MODE Dist2 Echo4 Cha Rev REVERB TYPE Halli REVERE AMOUNT 53 CHORUS TYPE Chorusl CHORUS AMOUNT 53 ECHO Mona Echo ECHO AMOUNT T DIST TYPE Overdrive 1 DIST AMOUNT ARRANGER YOLUMES BALLAD Grand Piana Tempo YG Transp Split C3 Octave 63 55 B3 63 DRUM EASS CHORD LOWER CMai Z oZ o WOTCE EFFECT MUTE SINGLE Figure 149 SLOW BALLAD CONCERT_GRAND end Strings PIAMO Page 1 audio Drum chi 16 BEATI_76 zu pre Drumz chz STANDARD L lt 34L Bass che Precision ale Piano 20L Low Arp amp Lick Diaipad Sd eas ssurr oa SR Low Live Guitar Detune 1
306. s track ORCHESTRA adjusts all the other tracks LEAD adjusts the volume of the melody track usually on MIDI channel 4 LOWER volume of the left split B VOICES These three faders adjust the volumes of the VOICES parts on the keyboard Respectively LEFT volume of the voice on the left split 2ND volume of the second voice on the right split RIGHT volume of the voice on the right split STYLE MASTER VOLUME ANO ME La VCACH The volumes of the parts are shown on the display Figure 18 In the upper part at left the STYLE MASTER volume is shown In the upper part at right the RIGHT and 2Np volumes are shown In the lower part at left DRUM BASS CHORD and LOWER volumes are shown STYLE PARTE mu 1 5 Figure 18 24 KETRON AUDYA Player The Player section is a complete multimedia environment for live performances It s a mixer consisting of five faders allowing volume control over WAVE DJ LOOP MP3 SFX and MIDI file The five buttons above the faders switch on off in order to select the tracks for the mix B WAVE The WAVE button enables the WAVE screen where you select the audio track to start playback Figure 19 The fader below adjusts the volume of the track To navigate in this screen use the cursor buttons the ENTER and EXIT buttons e CURSOR A V buttons or the wheel scrolls up down the titles e ENTER button opens the selected folder e EXIT button exit
307. scriptions of all the main functions to get started by using the keyboard Before using the unit we strongly recommend you to read this manual thoroughly to ensure that you understand the operation of its many useful and convenient functions After you have finished reading this manual please keep it in a safe place for future reference Playing the DEMO songs 1 Press the REGISTRATION and PLAY LIST buttons simultaneously 2 By using the buttons from F1 to F10 to the right and to left of the display select one of the 10 demo songs displayed on the current page 3 By using the DATA VALUE wheel you can scroll various pages of demo songs 4 Use the START STOP button for start or stop the playback of the current song 5 Press either the REGISTRATION or the PLAY LIST buttons to exit the DEMO mode Main features Audya is the new state of the art arranger keyboard by Ketron featuring many advanced functions designed for live entertainment and professional use It offers a powerful audio multiplayer a very high quality sound engine and an unique automatic accompaniment arranger Audya includes a versatile video support separate audio connections and three USB ports to connect to a computer and other storage devices B New sounds and Supersolo voices Following the Best Natural Sounds tradition by Ketron Audya includes a new high quality sound engine 360 MB stereo and multilayer sound library including a new Stereo Grand
308. scroll the pages of VOICETRON PRESETS By pressing the F1 F10 buttons you can access two pages with ten VOICETRON PRESETS each PAGE1 PAGE2 B Editing a VOCALIZER effect 1 Select a VOCALIZER effect 2 By pressing the EDIT button a screen like the Figure 53 will appear 3 Press the F1 F10 buttons to access the parameter settings of the VOCALIZER F1 DUET duet effects two voices F2 TRIO trio effects three voices F3 QUARTET quartet effects four voices F4 QUINTET quintet effects five voices F5 FIXED INTERV fixed interval effects F6 VOCODER vocoder parameters F7 VOICES EDIT parameters of the voice up to five voices Volume Pan Formant Detune Cutoff Resonance F8 EQUALIZER 10 bands graphic equalizer F9 EFFECTS parameters of the effects F10 VOCAL TO ARR the vocalizer effect changes accordingly to the Arranger parts For example you can set a DUET effect for the START a TRIO effect for the A variation of the Arranger a VOCODER effect for the B variation of the Arranger and so on For details see on page 137 38 KETRON AUDYA pla B3 STAGE_73 re ene Softpad PIANO Page 1 m9 Tete 105 Trip AUTE E STANDARD COUNTRY DUET STAND QUARTET Yoaicetron Presets et 63 hive 83 x 5 DAI BASS CHORO LOWER Fai ee Figure 52 16 POP ROCK amp 3i STAGE 73
309. side Ca 1DJ LOOP Once you have inserted a USB device into one rcu E cu of the two USB ports the USB drive will appear 3 MP3 on the DISK menu as In Figure 388 700M OFF E tavusT 7i REGISTRATION The same functions in the DISK MENU are s GFX available also for the files and folders of the USB E drive H USER AUDIO DRUMS Audya recognize USB pen drive or external Hard disk FAT32 formatted However Floppy USB Hard Disk Mp3 Player CD ROM DVD ROM must be with power supply built in KETRON AUDYA 143 Technical Tables GM Voices BANK A CCO Value 0 N VOICE 1 3 7 Museite1 4 0 32 A lt O NO C2 NINI NINININININININ CO oo 1 6 5 NO BANK B CCO Value 1 N VOICE 1 Jingle Electric Latin Piano Piano1 oncert_Grand right win Fm Hard Dx Musicbox Tubular Bell Marimba Long Vibe Kalimba Ep Phase 1 rch Bell 16 Windchimes Dry Organ O j 0 k i JI co m N 65 144 KETRON AUDYA N VOICE 33 Acoustic Finger Picked Fretless S Funk Synbass1 Synbass2 Violin Viola Cellos ontrabass remolos izzicato s ns D O 1 mpani rings low Strings ynstrings1 ynstrings2 3 2 KO CD ynvoice exican ombone ba
310. ss the F1 button 10 corresponding to the part and assign the MIDI transmission channel choosing from 1 to 16 by using the CURSOR gt buttons or the DATA VALUE wheel F1 Right F2 Left F3 Bass F4 Drum1 F5 Drum2 F6 Global global channel of the keyboard F7 Registration F8 Voicetron F9 ARRANGER CHORDS opens another window F10 VOICE DRAWBAR opens another window Besides the F1 10 buttons you can also select the parts by using the CURSOR A V buttons ARRANGER CHORDS By pressing the F9 button an assign window for the MIDI channels will appear as shown in Figure 262 By pressing the F1 F10 buttons or the CURSOR A W buttons you can select the parts of the Arranger to which assign the transmission MIDI channel from 1 to 16 by using the CURSOR lt 4 gt buttons or the DATA VALUE wheel Fi Chord1 F2 Chord2 F3 Chorda3 F4 Chord4 F5 Chord5 F6 Lower1 F7 Lower2 F8 Live Chord L Mono F9 Live Chord R VOICE DRAWBAR By pressing the F10 button a window will appear where to assign the MIDI channels for each VOICE DRAWBAR Click and Percussion as shown in Figure 263 By pressing the F1 F10 buttons or the CURSOR buttons you can select the parts to which assign the MIDI transmission channel from 1 to 16 by using the CURSOR lt 4 gt buttons or the DATA VALUE wheel F1 Voice1 F2 Voice2 F3 Voice3 F4 2ndVoice1 F5 2ndVoice2 F6 GM RAM Voices F7 Drawbar F8 Click F9 Percussion SLOW BALLAD 3
311. st Overdr 21h Rimshot Off 22h Latin1 Off 23h Latin2 Off 24h Latin3 Off 25h ClapFx Off 26h Double 27h Midi Reset 28h VoicelistToArr 29h Lyric On Off 2ah A play On Off 2bh Start Stop 2ch Echo Delay 2dh Wha Wha 2eh Chorus 2fh Reverb 60h Auto Fill 61h After Fill 62h Arr Mute 63h Swing Bass 64h BassToRoot 65h Loop On Off 66h Lower Mute 67h Low Off Stop 68 Lower1 Hold 69h Lower2 Hold 6ah Arabic 14 6bh Arabic 15 6ch Arabic 16 6dh Key Start 6eh Key Stop 6fh Manual Bass gmpart 0 15 value 1 to voicetron value O to voice OOh Vocalizer O1h AutoTune Vocal 02h BlueGrass Duet 31h Text Page 32h Text Page 33h Voicetron 34h Arabic 1 35h Arabic 2 36h Arabic 3 37h Arabic 4 38h Arabic 5 39h Arabic 6 3ah Arabic 7 3ch Arabic 9 3dh Arabic 10 3eh Arabic 11 3fh Arabic 12 70h Exit 71h Regis Down 72h Regis Up 73h Play Kick1 74h Play Kick2 75h Right Boost 76h Break 77h Style Stop 78h DryOnStop 79h Pause Countln Rest 7ah Program Preset Voc On Off 7ch Aftertouch 7dh Portamento 7eh Not Used1l 7fh Not Used2 Oah User 1 Obh User 2 Och User 3 KETRON e AUDYA 199 Voicetron Lead on off O3h Country Duet 04h Chained Duet 05h Standard Trio 06 Standard Trio 2 07h Chained Trio 08h Stand Quartet 09h Jazz Quartet FO 26 7B 6E 00 Status F7 Status gt 1 On Status 0 off EQUALIZER Equalizer Type FO 26 7B 09 03 Type F7 Type OOh 04h Equalizer active disactive FO 26
312. st Drum Remap slot 5 Press the note corresponding to the kick of the style In our example is C1 6 The display will show the sound on that key Figure 223 7 Using the wheel DATA VALUE select kick15 Next to the name slot will appear with an asterisk In our example you will hear the bass drum sound with an electronic sound Figure 224 8 Press F1 again to move on the part of the Drum category so you can navigate between the different categories GA Ba om Please note that the Drum Remap applies to the style T I dumme c and to each Variation A B C D So if you select the z jamm B Variation the Drum Remap screen will be empty RI EDT a In this way you have the possibility to remap all the LEN ME NM Variations of the style independently Figure 223 KETRON AUDYA 93 Drum Mixer 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 Press F1 once more to deselect Repeat the same procedure for the snare see below Press F2 and the Eb1 key on the keyboard Figure 182 Select snare015 by using the DATA VALUE wheel Figure 183 Press F2 twice to deselect Press F3 to select a new Drum Remap bank Press the D1 note and select snare014 by using the DATA VALUE wheel Press F3 twice to deselect Same procedure for the Hi Hat Press F4 and the F 1 key on the keyboard Select stick09 by using the DATA VALUE wheel At
313. t be selected User Voice List BALLAD 63 GRAND PIANO BALLAD orand_ Piano end Softpad Tempo 76 Transp EFFECT Page 1 GRAND PIANC T PEDALSTER RECORDER LOWER 8 4 SET S TIO PRESET SELECTION Page l Split 3 Octave uu 65 63 ex DRUM BASS CHORD LOWER Save UVL Cave Figure 257 KETRON e AUDYA 103 Menu By pressing the MENU button on the front panel you can access the MENU main page Figure 258 Here you can find many edit pages where to set the keyboard The F1 F9 buttons will open the following pages F1 LANGUAGE F2 MIDI F3 DSP FA KEYBOARD CONTROL F5 OUTPUT ASSIGN F6 METRONOME CLICK F VIDEO MODE F8 AUDIO RECORDING F9 MIDI RECORDING B LANGUAGE e Press the F1 button LANGUAGE for the selection of the system language Figure 259 By using the F1 F10 buttons you can set the following languages F1 ENGLISH F3 DEUTSCH German F6 ITALIANO Italian Once the language is set exit from MENU by using the EXIT or MENU buttons Press SAVE and F6 CUSTOM STARTUP to store the language setting at Audya start up B MIDI e Press the F2 button MIDI to open the MIDI settings page Figure 260 By using the F1 F10 buttons you can access the following settings F1 CHANNEL TX transmission channels setting F2 FILTER PROG CHANGE TX Program Change transmission filter setting F3 TRANPOSE TX part transpose transmission F4 UTILITY utility page see more details later F6
314. t from Major which applies to all The default value is set to Major mode The user can change this value by pressing F3 to highlight then change with the Data Value Dial F4 METR On Off This enables disables the Metronome Click heard only in Record Mode F5 VELOCITY It edits the velocity value for notes F6 Displays the current Quantize Value F7 QUANTIZE Quantizes the current recording data notes F8 RECORD Used to start recording F9 COPY Access to the COPY menu F10 CLEAR Access to the menu where to clear programmed notes events User Buttons User 1 6 ALL SOLO This function allows to put solo the selected tracks e User 2 7 VOLUME OCTAVE It toggles between the Volume or Octave values e User 3 8 NEW STYLE It allows to create your own style from scratch e User 4 9 LOOP NO LOOP OFF Enables disables Arrangement loop during Recording e User 5 10 SAVE It saves the current style Arranger Arrangement by pressing F1 and the Dial or by pressing directly the A B C D buttons Parameter Here you can set Parameter values for Tempo BPM Time Signature and Arrangement Measure length These parameters except Tempo can be modified only when the arrangement is empty i e nothing has been recorded yet Furthermore in this section the user can set their own Metronome Volume value EXIT button now displayed in it s place allows you to exit from this menu when pressed KETRON
315. ted to the MICRO 1 connector enable the MICRO button in the VOICETRON section Press the USER 4 button STOP REC to stop recording If you stop recording before the MIDI file ends press the START STOP button on the panel A wave format file with the same name of the MIDI file plus a progressive numbering and the WAV extension will be created In the example the file is Cabaret 1 wav You will find it in the MIDIFILE folder Figure 331 Also you can overdub using the same MIDI file and the newly created audio file Repeat the procedure from step 3 to step 6 After overdubbing you will find your audio files with progressive numbering that means Cabaret 2 wav Cabaret 3 wav and so on Figure 332 Once the MIDI sync is created and played back remember that only two tracks will play in numeric order e g 1 and 20r 2and 3 if 1 is not present by pressing the SAVE button a pop up with two options appears F1 Save Sync Param it allows to save the information of the sync into the MIDI file so the next time you play the file it s not necessary to reload them You cannot change the audio file after you saved the sync information because you will loose the synchronization F2 Merge Audio Track it combines the current two tracks playing in one audio track This option appears only if you have 2 WAV tracks playing Once the files are merged a single audio file will be created by using the lower number of the two
316. ters for the second voice 2ND VOICE that you can activate by pressing the 2ND VOICE button in the VOICES section Press the F1 F10 buttons to access the parameters of the 2ND VOICE Modify the values of the selected parameter by using the DATA VALUE wheel or the CURSOR gt buttons e F1 2ND VOICE you can assign an instrument from those of the GM banks For example Strings Strings2 Strings3 Symphonic Timpani Geige Contrabass Tremolos etc NICE BALL AD Er UL E a BN NF p aM 7 Lr bk p F2 VOLUME you can adjust the volume of the 2ND VOICE Press the CURSOR buttons together to set the value to 0 e F8 OCTAVE you can set 2 octaves of the o ue a EM Ku 2ND VOICE Figure 94 Press the CURSOR ree Lowes A TEL za E ETT Mode buttons together to set the value to zero a F4 TUNE you can adjust the fine pitch by Figure 94 100 cent of semitone values from 63 to 64 NITE BAGDAD l MY PROCRAM e you can adjust the send level to re aaro dede e oer e the reverb Figure 95 Press the CURSOR a pamen a cim buttons together to set the value to 0 d e F6 EFFECT ASSIGN you can assign a second effect such as CHORUS or ECHO e F7 EFFECT SEND you can adjust the send level of the second effect CHORUS or ECHO e F8 SUSTAIN you can enable disable the SUSTAIN pedal on the second voice e F9
317. the corresponding SINGLE REGISTRATION By using USER 1 button you can enable the SINGLE PLAY or MULTI PLAY functions to play the Registration automatically Recalling a REGISTRATION BLOCK Once a REGISTRATION BLOCK is stored you can recall it from the list on the window by using the CURSOR A V buttons or the DATA VALUE wheel Once the file is selected just press the ENTER button Figure 132 to recall the REGISTRATION BLOCK Once the REGISTRATION BLOCK is loaded the REGISTRATION SINGLE is recalled corresponding to the F1 F10 buttons By using the USER 1 button you can activate the SINGLE PLAY or MULTI PLAY function in order to play the Registration automatically It can be useful to store several SINGLE REGISTRATIONS with some WAVE songs prepared into the Player Storing the SINGLE REGISTRATIONS by using the Player and AUTOPLAY sections enabled you can quickly recall the REGISTRATION BLOCK containing those SINGLE REGISTRATIONS by using the F1 F10 buttons Creating a fast REGISTRATION BLOCK In addition to SINGLE REGISTRATION you can save Styles Voices and Player directly Press Registration button than USER 4 BLOCK Press the EDIT button and the USER 1 button CREATE Press F1 F10 button to assign related position Select a Style a voice or a song from the Player Press ENTER to assign this feature on related button Do the same for any other F1 F10 button Figure 133 Press the SAVE button and give a name to t
318. this point the style is modified You can go on by using the same procedure to remap all the drum sounds as you like Once you are satisfied press the SAVE button on the front panel give a new name to the User style and press the USER 5 button SAVE to store the changes Figure 184 4 KETRON AUDYA SOUL POP 3 CONCERT GRAND ROCK zt Strings 177 Tri i Pure Du p d SOUL POP 3 ONDER T GRAND Po eer ZIME Siegert Pl Pare 1 f es Aiea a e r eee ORUM KOTE REMIS Nii CONCERT GRAND quisi prid EIE Pra TOH l l usa LATINS l I amen UM C3 bw CONCERT GRE AND Pl NO gt Pars Figure 227 Drum Set Drum Set By pressing the DRUM SET button in the PLAY CONTROL section you can access the screen where to select one of the available 53 DRUM SETS plus 20 user sets Figure 228 T i iI COTAT GAAHI By pressing the F1 F10 buttons you select the DRUM SET while the CURSOR lt 4 or the TEFAF i i BACK and FORWARD buttons below the display m e allow to access the various pages of the DRUM E SET The USER 1 5 buttons will show the corresponding edit pages INTERNAL USER INS FUNCTION FULL RANGE B INTERNAL USER 1 By selecting INTERNAL default selection you can set the DRUM SET among the 54 internal drum sets B USER USER 2 By selecting USER you can access the screen where to select edit the 20 DRUM SET
319. tick02 45 Tom03 93 Close02 46 94 OpenO2 47 Tom04 95 Reverse 48 Tom05 96 Applause 49 Crash02 97 Belltree 50 Tom06 98 Empty 5 Ride03 99 Empty 52 Crash03 100 Empty 53 RidebellO 101 Empty 54 TambourineO 102 Empty 55 Crash04 103 Empty 56 CowbellO1 104 Empty 57 Crash05 105 Empty 58 Vibraslap 106 Empty 59 RideOl 107 Empty 60 Bongo HIi 108 Empty 61 Bongo Low 109 Empty Crash0Ol Whistle02 Snare007 GuiroO Fingsnap 01 Guiro02 Slap ClavesOl Snare008 W Block Hi Scratch Up W Block Lo Scratch Down Cuica0Ol Sticks0O1 Cuica02 Click TriangleOl Metronome0Ol TriangleO2 MetronomeO02 ShakerO01 Kick06 Shaker02 KickO7 Sticks02 Rimshot06 Castagnet Snare016 TambourineO Clap01 Rimshot04 SnareO17 SnareO013 0 Snare018 Stick02 Snare015 Tom02 Close06 Close07 Stick02 Tom03 Close02 OpenO2 OpenOl Tom04 Reverse Tom05 Applause Crash02 Belltree TomO6 PanderoOl RideOl Pandero02 Crash03 PanderoO03 RidebellO1 Empty TambourineO Empty Crash04 Empty CowbellO1 Empty Crash05 Empty Vibraslap Empty Ride02 Empty 60 Bongo Hi 108 Empty 61 Bongo Low 109 Empty 164 KETRON AUDYA Jazz Dry Program Change 11 14 SnareO0l 62 Conga Slap 15 RollOl 63 Conga Hi Conga_Low Snare002 Timbales Hi Snare003 Timbales Lo Snare004 Agogo_Hi Snare005 Agogo Low Snare006 Cabasa Tom MaracasOl Tom Flam02 Whistle0O1 CrashOl Wh
320. ting Libraries for Bank Bass and Arp amp Lick makes the Audio Style Modeling a very powerful and easy system to compose new Styles It s enough to start from an existing Style and without programming a note to scroll the Modeling Libraries while listening in real time the final result and to replace the various parts of the Style using the huge templates available Let s take a look to some practical examples for the Audio style Modeling B Select a Style to be edited and access the Style View The parts underlined are the ones interested to the Bank functioning By pressing twice the tabs F1 F2 F3 etc it is possible to select the BANK Libraries The scroll for various templates is achieved by the l Alpha dial The new Bank Libraries once selected and assigned to the Style parts are replacing the original MIDI parts written for such Style F1 the Drum controlling on tab F1 is very sophisticated with the possibility to address 4 different ambients Audio Drum Figure 153 Drum Bank Figure 154 User Audio Drums Figure 155 Drum1 Figure 156 Audio Drum Internal Audio Drum library with more than 324 complete Audio files Drum Bank Midi Drum database with 255 Styles User Audio Drums Custom Wave Loops of the user This new powerful feature provided with the 3 0A allows to replace the internal Audio Drums of Audya with Drum Wave loops created from the user and located into a new HD folder named User Audio Dru
321. track at all past current and future locations so you don t have to repeat for each occurrence In order to Clear just a single note as a single event you will needs to press the Record button then select the CLEAR button once more Figure 171 The CLEAR feature operates only on the current Root of the selected part It is not applicable to Audio Drum parts or any other Banks used 78 KETRON AUDYA 16 1 6 amp 3 CONCERT_GRAND BALLAD ARRANGER end Strings1 Tempo 76 Transp PIANO Page 1 ma oe D B a KCN ee VELOCITY EXECUTE Figure 169 16 BEAT 1 53 CONCERT GRAHD FALLAL Grand Piana end Strings Tempo 7 amp 6 Transp PIANO Page 1 mou EE FROM EN eer POP suPER KIT 0 ARR pe ty mm pass Precision 1 40 eni Concert Grand 35 23 USER cna 16_BE aT linea El Piano em 22 USER Strings Live Guitar FINGERPICK 5 016 PthT EMTER for Bank EDIT PATTERH RECORD Switch dd BAR 8 Seti IT EXECUTE Figure 170 16_BE4T_1 a CONCERT_GRAND BALLAD ARRANGER 2nd Stringsd Tempo 76 Transp PIAMO Page 1 audio Drum 16 BEaTiRx 76 37 ARR rum Jor sueem o co ca ERU a Major 35 RECORD METR ON 4 Strings IP 34 vas ive Gate o mese ee ENTER for Bank EDIT PATTERN
322. tracks instead of the DRAWBARS For advanced operations about the DRAWBARS See on page 31 B Selecting the GM General MIDI voices 1 Press the GM button on the third row in the VOICE section The display will show a list of the GM voices Figure 10 Follow the same procedure for voices selection described on page 18 20 KETRON AUDYA i p J EA agi wi EE Ds wj Do aio ao 5 BL iles x B 0o 1 Figure 7 Limi na jes noose a pea Figure 10 Selecting the styles Selecting styles The numeric keypad of the STYLE section allows the selection of twelve style families divided into various musical genres UM un n B Selecting a PRESET style 1 Select one style family by pressing one of the E lt lt a SB twelve buttons of the keypad in the STYLE ieee e section For example press the POP family A nnn o on button a A LA ig Di 2 The display will show the first ten available styles Sgp A ani mgp Press one of the F1 F10 buttons to select one of FA n p Nam si the ten displayed styles In the example the F3 La a iaaa aaa Le button selects the FUSION FUNK style Figure o u c m 11 p EJ T4 O L3 g D g 3 Press the CURSOR gt to select further pages NM Lafi oo of STYLE containing ten styles each Figure 12 Figure 11 N
323. tton on the front panel A brief SAVE DATA TO DISK message will appear KETRON 121 UTILITY By pressing the F10 button from the KEYBOARD CONTROL page you can activate the UTILITY screen Figure 315 where you can enable disable the following functions F1 SPDIF In enables disables the digital SPDIF In port values ON OFF F2 SPDIF Out enables disables the digital SPDIF Out port values SPDIF MAIN The SPDIF volume is controlled by using the S PDIF LINE IN SFX slider of the PLAYER section F3 Edit Value Recycle enables disables the recycle of the volume effect send etc parameters type Values ON OFF F4 Fast Song eliminates measures at the beginning of the Midi file usually Count In or Setup Measure Values ON OFF F5 Show File Icon enables disables the icons display for the file types Values ON OFF F6 Intelligent Transpose affects the transposition of the MIDI file Each instrument is transposed within its natural octave Values ON OFF F7 LINE IN enables disables the LINE IN input The input volume is controlled by the MP3 slider of the PLAYER section Values ON OFF F8 Remix Live Guitar enables disables the Live Guitar of the style when making a MIDI Remix Values ON OFF F9 Headphone to Out3 amp 4 values ON OFF F10 Video Lyric enables disables the Lyric display on remote screen monitor In other words the Lyric OFF affects also the remote monitor Values ON OFF B Page 2
324. tween two or three VOICES by changing the MODES to MORPHING or MORPH COUPLING see below F4 MODES by using this parameter you can choose the interaction modes between the VOICES For example if you select MORPHING you can move the Modulation Wheel and the sound of the FIRST VOICE will morph gradually to the SECOND VOICE If the parameter is set to NORMAL no MORPHING will be applied to that VOICE Further interaction parameters between the VOICES are Voice Layer uet1 Duet2 rio1 Trio2 Country Steel Morph Coupling Hands Down1 Down2 rd Down Bluegrass Down Country Down p 1 Up2 th Up Country Up ull 1 Full 2 azz 1 Jazz2 olk 1 Folk 2 Aft Morphing Aft Morph Coupl ed Morphing ed Morph Coupl Sustain Switch Program PCLT EJ NEL E CE pal EDT PEWA x Pulte Cond ure Pani l ant Pon MORSU Fen Fa LL NN xxt ae Layer NARMONN fom BE TER hemos ite BALL AD Fab lure CEE Cuwnet Concert orr cer rar Moe PHA Mowm Fn Second EU AFTER HEELS Figure 117 Key off time 1 2 Key off random 1 2 Duet1 2 mode When you select DUET you can set one VOICE to FIRST and the other to SECOND If you play one single note only the VOICE set to FIRST will sound while the SECOND will sound only if you play two or more notes 1 2 change
325. ty 61 Bongo Low 109 Empty U S Pop Program Change 83 14 SnareO0l 62 Conga Slap 15 Rollo 63 Conga Hi 16 Roll02 64 Conga Low 17 Snare002 65 Timbales Hi 18 Snare003 66 Timbales Lo 19 Snare004 67 Agogo_Hi 20 Snare005 68 Agogo Low 21 Snare006 69 Cabasa 22 Tom 70 MaracasOl 23 Tom Flam02 71 WhistleO1 24 Crash0l 72 WhistleO2 25 Snare007 73 GuiroOl 26 Fingsnap OI 74 Guiro02 27 Slap 75 ClavesOl 28 Snare008 76 W Block Hi 29 Scratch Up 77 W Block Lo 30 Scratch Down 78 Cuica0l 9 StickO5 79 Cuica02 32 Click 80 TriangleOl 33 8 TriangleO2 34 MetronomeO02 82 ShakerOl 35 Kickl9 83 Shaker02 36 KlckOl 84 SticksO2 37 Rimshot26 85 Clap04 38 Snare079 86 Tambourinel 39 Clap09 87 Rimshotl2 40 Snare091 88 SnareO19 41 TomO7 89 Snare020 42 Stick04 90 Snare035 43 Tom08 9 Kick03 44 Middle04 92 Kick08 45 Tom09 93 StickO02 46 94 OpenO2 47 0 95 Close0l 48 Tomll 96 Applause 49 Crash02 97 Belltree 50 Toml2 98 Clap07 5 RideOl 99 Clap08 52 Crash03 100 Empty 53 RidebellO 1 101 Empty 54 TambourineO 102 Empty 55 Crash04 103 Empty 56 Cowbell0l 104 Empty 57 Crash05 105 Empty 58 Vibraslap 106 Empty 19 Snare004 67 Agogo Hi 20 Snare005 68 Agogo Low 21 Snare006 69 Cabasa KETRON e AUDYA 177 Drum Set
326. ty SD series FO 26 7B 06 00 Type F7 Type Echo Delay Type Right GM FO 26 7B 12 03 Ec Type F7 Echo Delay Type Left FO 26 7B 16 03 Ec Type F7 Ec Type Type for compatibility SD series OOh Chorus1 01h Chorus6 02h Chorus2 03h Chorus6 OOh Chorus1 01h Chorus2 02h Chorus3 03h Chorus4 04h Chorus5 05h Chorus6 O6h Tremolo1 07h Tremolo2 08h Tremolo3 09h Phaser1 00h 7f h 00h 7f h 00h 7f h 00h 7f h 00h 7f h 04h Chorus4 05h Phaser1 07h Flanger1 Oah Phaser2 Obh Phaser3 Och Flanger1 Odh Flanger2 Oeh Flanger3 Ofh User Cho1 10h User Cho2 11h User Cho3 12h User Cho4 13h User Cho5 OOh Stereo Echot Oih Stereo Echo5 02h Stereo Echo2 03h Stereo Echo3 04h Mono Echo4 O5h Stereo Echo3 06h Mono Echo3 00h Mono 01h Mono Echo2 02h Mono Echo3 03h Mono Echo4 O4h Mono Echo5 05h Stereo Echot O6h Stereo Echo2 07h Triple Echo4 Oah Triple Echot Obh Triple Echo2 Och Triple Echo3 Odh Triple Echo4 Oeh Triple Echo5 Ofh Mono User1 10h Stereo User1 KETRON AUDYA 195 Echo Delay Time FO 26 7B 29 00 Ec Time F7 Echo Delay Volume FO 26 7B 2a 00 Ec Vol F7 07h Stereo Echo3 O8h Stereo Echo4 09h Stereo Echo5 11h Stereo User2 12h Triple User1 Ec Time Ec Vol beside MIDI port used will be drive Right or GM Left part Echo Delay Feed FO 26 7B 2b 00 Ec Feed F7 Echo Delay Filter FO 26 7B 2c 00 Ec Filter F7 DISTORSION Distorsion Type for compatibilty SD serie
327. uced on Audya such as voice selection style changes player and any other feature except for Microphone signal will be recorded During the Macro Recording all Menus are deactivated The end of the performance is achieved by pressing STOP REC or RECORD In order to start the playback just go into MIDI folder select the file MRS and press Enter B Macro and Registration While recording a Macro you cannot access a Registration If you want to record a Macro using one Registration setting you can launch the Registration first and then the Macro Recording When the Macro will be executed it will automatically set the initial values also the previously selected Registration KETRON AUDYA 129 Voicetron Voicetron Once you connect two microphones to the MICRO 1 and MICRO 2 connectors you can access to a bunch of options for the voice treatment B MICRO The MICRO button enables the MICRO 1 input and MICRO 2 input Connect one or two microphones to the jacks on the rear and adjust the level by using the GAIN 1 and GAIN 2 wheels B VOCALIZER The VOCALIZER button enables the effect processor for the harmonization and the automatic pitch only on MICRO 1 Setting a vocal effect 1 Press the MICRO button 2 he MICRO PRESETS window will appear Figure 339 3 Press the F1 F10 buttons to select one of the MICRO PRESETS that is one effect for the microphone connected to MICRO 1 and or MICRO 2 4 Press the CURSO
328. urces are the following 2nd VOICE Once selected the source you can set the output destination with the CURSOR lt 4 P buttons choosing between Main Stereo or 1 amp 2 Stereo By pressing the USER 1 button you can toggle the 1 amp 2 Stereo and the 1 amp 2 Mono output as shown by the arrow on Figure 323 B METRONOME CLICK e By pressing the F6 button from the main page of the MENU you can access to the METRONOME CLICK screen where to make settings of the metronome Figure 323 By using the F1 F10 buttons you can set the following parameters F1 LINK MODE sets the metronome in the following environments All Style MIDI Wave MP3 F2 RUN MODE sets the start mode of the metronome Free Start F3 VOLUME output volume from 0 to 63 F4 OUTPUT output assign Figure 324 to Out 1 and 2 Out 3 and 4 Out 3 and 4 and headphones SA amp Hph In this last mode you will hear only the metronome on the headphones Useful for drummers F5 TYPE click type CLICK METR 1 and 2 F6 TEMPO tempo setting This applies only if the songs don t have tempo information usually the WAV and MP3 files F TIME SIG sets the numerator of the division Values from 1 to 12 F8 TIME SIG sets the denominator of the division Values 4 or 8 Press the USER 1 button ACTIVE INACTIVE to enable disable the METRONOME CLICK function as shown from the arrow in Figure 323 Bm VIDEO MODE e From the main page of the MENU
329. ust set volume of the Drum Set Drum 1 to O The selection of the Audio Drum is made globally for the entire Style Replacing the Audio Drum of a preset style with another Audio Drum could result in MIDI and Audio parts not matching while playing Intro Ending arrangements You can edit the volume of the Audio Drum separately for A B C and D and the other parts of the Arranger Audio Drum is guaranteed to work well within the range of 30 96 of the nominal speed shown for the Audio style A 2 bands parameters equalizer setting can be stored for each Audio Drum style Menu Style Mode Drum The Library contains more than 300 Audio Drum see list at the end of this manual When a style with Audio Drum is running the Wave player is not available 2 Groove Bank The Grooves are short rhythmic sequences loops synchronized by using MIDI and controlled in the same way of Drum Sets with individual controls for volume reverb pan etc The Groove Library contains more than 200 loops with acoustic traditional percussions Latin and dance percussions The Grooves work in the Drum2 section and they always replace the Drum Set if present The Grooves can be stored on the 4 arrangements of the style with its own volume each 3 Bass Bank The automatic Bass MIDI Library offers more than 180 bass riffs It works on the Bass section replacing the normal bass part of the style 4 Arp amp Lick The Arpeg
330. ust the pitch of three voices by 24 semitones independently Figure 87 Press the CURSOR lt 4 gt buttons together to set automatically the pitch to zero F4 F9 TUNE By pressing the F4 or F9 buttons you will highlight repeatdly the voice of which you want adjust the fine pitch Use the DATA VALUE wheel or the CURSOR lt gt buttons to adjust the fine pitch of three voices independently The value from 63 to 64 corresponds to 100 cents that is 1 semitone Figure 88 Press the CURSOR lt 4 gt buttons together to automatically set the fine pitch to zero F5 F10 PAN By pressing the F5 or F10 buttons you will highlight repeatdly the voice of which you want adjust the panoramic position PAN Use the DATA VALUE wheel or the CURSOR lt 4 gt buttons to adjust the PAN of three voices independently The value from 63R to 64L corresponds to the right and to the left position respectively Figure 89 Press the CURSOR 4 gt buttons together to automatically set the PAN in the center position ammo NICE Bal LAG na Let lli Trg NICE BALLAD VERI Uf nri 7 i Li HICE BALLAD Le Figure 89 Program EM AYP OAM he Ss errs HT PROG AM ptm Pre KETRON e AUDYA 49 Program VOICE EDIT Press the USER 1 button to access the edit page of each VOICE of the PROGRAM You will see a screen similar to Figure 90 where all the parameters of
331. utomatically start If the Arranger is already playing by pressing this button you will enable the same BREAK TEMPO SLOW FAST By pressing these buttons you can slow down SLOW or speed up FAST the tempo of the Arranger By pressing the two buttons simultaneously you will set the T Lock function that is Tempo Lock To restore the original tempo of the style press the and buttons simultaneously in the RECORD section HOLD By pressing the HOLD button the accompaniment of the Arranger will play even if you release all the keys from the keyboard If HOLD is disabled when you release the keys from the keyboard the accompaniment of the Arranger will stop playing except the drum part KETRON AUDYA 17 Selecting voices Selecting voices You can find three rows of eight buttons each in the VOICE section on the front panel The first two rows allow the selection of the voice families ordered by a common use see a full list of the voices at the end of this manual STS B rias Fi PIANO CAGAN ACCORDIOM GUITAR RASS STRINGS E EFFECT THOA urs SA FLUTE PAD SYNTH ETWMIC oA T GM l i Ee e v DRAWIARS MERSE CAA HAnMONS et BE AEN The third row contains the PROGRAM button and other voices selection buttons Moreover there are also the DOUBLE HARMONY buttons B Selecting a basic voice 1 Select one voice family by pressing one of the 16 buttons on the first t
332. uttons repeatedly to hilight one of the 16 parts tracks of the MIDI file By using the CURSOR gt buttons or the DATA VALUE you can set the volume from 0 to 63 By pressing the CURSOR gt buttons you set the value to 0 Figure 209 3 Press the F3 or F8 buttons repeatedly to highlight one of the 16 parts tracks of the MIDI file By using the CURSOR gt buttons or the DATA VALUE you can set the Reverb from 0 to 63 By pressing the CURSOR a gt buttons you set the value to 0 Figure 210 4 Press the F4 or F9 buttons repeatedly to highlight one of the 16 parts tracks of the MIDI file By using the CURSOR gt buttons or the DATA VALUE you can set the Chorus from 0 to 63 By pressing the CURSOR a gt buttons you set the value to O 5 Press the F5 and F10 buttons to set the MUTE and SOLO function of the selected part respectively When the part is in MUTE or in SOLO condition an asterisk will appear In Figure 211 the part 1 is in SOLO condition While more parts can be muted only one part can be soloed To find one or more parts in MUTE condition press the F1 F6 F2 F7 F3 F8 or F4 F9 buttons repeatedly Press F5 or F10 to disable the MUTE condition Press the F10 button SOLO twice if you want to disable quickly the MUTE condition on any part QO KETRON AUDYA rr cn kerk To tenir rmt rm w w ejsjaule ue sw e e 8 wl le c wo Ha
333. vesOl 28 Snare008 76 W Block Hi KETRON AUDYA 167 Drum Set 29 Scratch Up 77 W Block Lo 30 Scratch Down 78 CuicaOl 3 SticksOl 79 Cuica02 32 Click 80 TriangleO 33 MetronomeOl 8 TriangleO2 34 MetronomeO2 82 ShakerOl 35 Kick49 83 ShakerO2 36 Kick46 84 SticksO2 37 Rimshotl2 85 ClapO2 38 Snare038 86 Tambourinel 47 Tom04 95 Reverse 48 Tom05 96 Applause 49 Crash02 97 Belltree 50 Tom06 98 Empty 5 RideOl 99 Empty 52 Crash03 100 Empty 53 RidebellO 101 Empty 54 TambourineO 102 Empty 39 Clapl4 87 Rimshotl2 40 Snare077 88 Snare042 41 Tom26 89 Snare045 42 Stick23 90 SnareO61 43 Tom27 9 Kick21 44 Closel2 92 Kick20 45 Tom28 93 Stick21 46 OpenO5 94 Stick18 47 Tom29 95 Reverse 48 Tom30 96 Applause 49 Crash02 97 Belltree 50 Tom3l 98 Empty 5 RideOl 99 Empty 52 Crash03 100 Empty 53 RidebellO 101 Empty 54 TambourineO 102 Empty 55 Crash04 103 Empty 56 Cowbell0l 104 Empty 57 Crash05 105 Empty 58 Vibraslap 106 Empty 59 Ride03 107 Empty 60 Bongo HIi 108 Empty 61 Bongo Low 109 Empty Fusion Program Change 33 14 Snare001 62 Conga Slap 15 Rollo 63 Conga Hi 16 Roll02 64 Conga Low 17 SnareO002 65 Timbales Hi 18 Snare003 66 Timbales Lo
334. windows you should choose the Open folder to ip mi view files using Windows Explorer option Figure B toa ne Anyway you will be able to open Audya drive O G 0 aa from your local computer resources You will see 2i i T a Audya drive as any ordinary Removable Disk Figure A 4 After opening the Audya hard disk root folder you can handle the files like any ordinary storage device Figure C 5 You can copy from and to the internal folders of Remuvabte Disk 15 X Apps hard disk the following file types Tru danke eth p Corer do yeu ke PLAYLIST DJ LOOPS nbus e INSTRUMENTS e REGISTRATION aki na pepa WAVE SFX ETC 6 After you finished copying the files please follow the USB hardware SAFE REMOVAL procedure and disconnect the USB cable from the rear panel of Audya and or from the computer USB port In Windows OS you can click on the icon located on the task bar A pop up window will open L canc allowing you to disconnect the USB device safely 7 After a while Audya will operate again You do Figure B not need to restart Audya For advanced file handling and or file updating p mm on the internal hard disk of Audya please see Disk on page 142 z irg ms oe 2S 5 DR ore eee ia i a Ls z ies SMTi 8 3 m j HHJ 53 14 petiam TT Ld T ae e l RE Bm LE porrum TF
335. wise the name appears without any symbol Figure 144 In order to view and or edit the parts of the style with or without an Audio Style Modeling you can press the STYLE VIEW button of the PLAY CONTROL section In this screen the display shows the 10 parts of the style currently selected By pressing the F1 F10 buttons you can select the corresponding part of the style Figure 145 and Figure 146 e F1 DRUM 1 e F2 DRUM2 e F3 BASS FA LOW 1 e F5 LOW 2 F6 CH 1 e F7 CH2 F8 CH3 e F9 CH4 e F10 CH 5 The four buttons from USER 1 to USER 4 allow to access to the corresponding edit windows VOICE EFFECT PAN MUTE B VOICE USER 1 By pressing VOICE default selection you can set an instrument for each part of the style by using the DATA VALUE wheel By using the CURSOR lt 4 buttons you can raise or lower the volume of the part from 0 to 63 By pressing the CURSOR lt 4 gt buttons together you set the volume of the part to 0 By using the OCTAVE buttons you can change the octave of the LOW 1 and LOW 2 parts by 48 semitones 12 semitones steps Figure 147 m EFFECT USER 2 By pressing EFFECT you can select and edit the type and the amount of the effect for each part Figure 148 The multieffect unit allows the use of four effects simultaneously that is a type of the effect for all the voices Please note that the effects Chorus and Reverb are available for the drum and percussion parts DRUM1
336. wo rows in the VOICE section For example press the PIANO family button The first page showing the first ten available voices of the PIANO family will appear 2 By pressing one of the F1 F5 or F6 F10 buttons select one of the ten voices shown on the display corresponding to the name of the voice For example by pressing the F4 button you will select the voice named HONKY TONK Figure 1 3 Press the CURSOR to select the various VOICE pages with further ten voices each Figure Figure 1 2 Note that you can access more than 2 pages for each voice family By turning the wheel clockwise el counter clockwise you can scroll the D pages just like the CURSOR lt 4 JE Also you can scroll the pages by le pressing repeatedly the same VOICE family button e g PIANO EL PIANO r f and so on Figure 2 18 KETRON AUDYA Selecting voices Selecting a INS voice 1 Press the RAM INS SUPERSOLO button of the third row in the VOICE section The display will show a list of the SUPERSOLO voices stored on the hard disk Figure 3 2 Select one voice by using the CURSOR A V 3 Press the ENTER button to load the INS voice into the selected memory location The display will show the INS voice on the first free location In the example the APACHE GUITAR voice is loaded onto the memory location corresponding to the F1 button Figure 4 Selecting more INS voices 1 Press th
337. y Wn mo ei vores ent wen CONT o mmm WENI LFFEKTE j Country Dawn 3 EFT DHE TEHE i MEET ELEC TM Paw vat c ae FE FI FJ F TH immi Loree Figure 354 Uo COMET ORAND afud WET L zi ya votes ENT dre ima ty Tes Pii iki am Utkrs Le i been key diem li hip a i cons p ORAL TO PRETET CALECTION Page MX pn Bi 43 F is xD M md Figure 355 SOM 11 GHAND key a rea Peers Set E del n M FIANO ner mo pridem OTT Very Pars EUN LER Mer p Nak Chord oom Bock Chord Up a rnan DNTERY TOOL TO AH PESGI CELE TCM Peye Hae 1 iinet ek Fl zo eS HELIJ ERE LEPTE i Off Figure 356 QUINTET By pressing the F4 button the list of QUINTET effects similar to Figure 357 will appear from which you can choose one of the available quintet effects by using the CURSOR A V buttons or the DATA VALUE wheel tandard Open Octave Down extet Open FIXED INTERV By pressing the F5 button the list of FIXED INTERV effects similar to Figure 358 will appear from which you can choose one of the available fixed interval effects by using the CURSOR A buttons or the DATA VALUE wheel Duet Female Up Duet femal Down 5th
338. you select a parameter you can modify the value by using the DATA VALUE wheel or the CURSOR lt 4 buttons Press the USER 5 button Control 1 again to return to the CONTROL 1 page You can choose the the parameters by using the F1 F10 buttons e F1 F6 VOICES you can assign up to three VOICES to the same PROGRAM as already seen in the first PROGRAM EDIT screen e F2 F7 PORT MONO Figure 116 you can set the PORTAMENTO time with choosing values from 5 to 127 By pressing the CURSOR gt buttons together you set the value to OFF 56 KETRON AUDYA Figure 115 When the portamento is OFF you can set the MONO or POLY mode for the VOICE When you set the portamento to any value between 5 and 127 the portamento can be set to LEGATO or POLY on the first case the portamento acts on the sound in legato mode until a note is released In the second case it acts in polyphonic manner retriggering the portamento every time a note is played If the PORTAMENTO effect is stored in one PROGRAM and enabled by the Aft amp Port Autoswitch parameter Menu Keyboard Control gt Aftertouch you can activate it from the button on the front panel F3 F8 MORPHING Figure 117 you can set the Morphing modes from one VOICE to another choosing one of the NORMAL FIRST and SECOND parameters The MORPHING will affect the sound by moving the Modulation Wheel with the wording MORPHING in blue You can set the MORPHING effect be
339. zer Presets are available Just press one of the F1 F5 buttons to select the corresponding Wave Equalizer type Factory Flat When you activate an Wave Equalizer Preset you can set the option Lock On Off as for the previous effects By pressing the EDIT button on the front panel you can access the parameters of the selected Wave Equalizer Preset as shown in Figure 302 The parameters are identical for all the five Wave Equalizer effects F1 Wave Equalizer choose from 1 to 5 F2 BASS FREQ bass frequency values 50 990 Hz F3 TREBLE FREQ high frequency values 1030 16130 Hz F4 BASS GAIN bass gain values 12 dB F5 TREBLE GAIN high gain values 12 dB F VOICE ADJUST frequency adjustment for the vocal part reduction function values 1 300 See below Press the USER 1 button ACTIVE to enable the Wave Equalizer The USER 2 button DEFAULT resets the parameters to the default values By pressing the USER 3 button VOICE ON OFF as shown by the arrow on Figure 302 you can reduce the vocal part of the current WAVE file You can adjust the VOICE ADJIUST and the bass high gain parameters in order to reach the best result in the vocal reduction Press the F1 button LEAD MUTE when the WAVE Player is running Figure 303 to activate the vocal reduction function After you set the parameters you can to store the custom Wave Equalizer by pressing the USER 5 button SAVE or the SAVE button on the front

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

Manual de Instruções Aquecedor de Ar Enxutinha    Manual Multilenguaje CA-001X  +030221914 humiSteam r.5.1_Esp.qxp  Toshiba Satellite C855D-S5340  Description technique  MACCHINE SPECIALI - Formazione e Sicurezza  Lab 2  Joomla! extension JSN UniForm User Manual    

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file